JP5832109B2 - GAME SYSTEM, GAME MACHINE, AND GAME DEVICE - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming device comprising a gaming device capable of converting a gaming value owned by a player into a score, and a gaming machine capable of gaming based on the score and connected to the gaming device in a communicable manner. The present invention relates to a system, the gaming machine, and the gaming device.

  As a conventional game system, a virtual game ball display is provided in an enclosed game machine capable of digitally displaying the number of balls held, and the virtual game ball display is used to turn on / off the LCD that is like a game ball, or A system is known that is designed to make it easier for a player to sensuously understand how the number of balls is increased or decreased by moving six real balls enclosed in a virtual game ball display (patent) Reference 1).

JP 2005-261571 A

  However, the virtual game ball display is merely for making the player imagine the increase or decrease of the holding ball, and the movement of the virtual ball in the virtual game ball display is detected, and the digital display is updated based on the detected movement. Is not to be done. For this reason, the movement of the virtual sphere was not strictly reflected in the digital display.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of the actual situation, and the purpose of the present invention is to adopt a game of a point-type game, but when a score update condition is satisfied, Thus, it is to provide a gaming system, a gaming machine, and a gaming apparatus in which the points are updated by simulating the operation corresponding to the discharging or collecting of the value object.

(1) The present invention relates to a gaming apparatus (the card shown in FIGS. 1 and 110) that can convert a gaming value (card balance, saving medal, saving ball) owned by a player into a first holding point (holding point, gaming ball). Unit 3) and a gaming machine (Fig. 1) that can be played by the second holding point (credit) converted for use in the game from the first holding point and is communicably connected to the gaming device A gaming system comprising a slot machine 2S and a pachinko machine 2) of FIG.
Conversion means (the main control unit 323 of the CU) for converting the first score to the second score;
First score display means for displaying the first score (displays 51 and 54 and display 312 in FIGS. 7 and 115);
Second score storage means for storing the second score (credit number counter in FIGS. 7 and 115);
Game control means for performing game control of the gaming machine based on the fact that the second score above the predetermined point is stored in the second score storage means (FIG. 51; bet if the credit number counter becomes 0) A few operations disabled)
Moving means (motor 127 in FIG. 8) for moving a plurality of predetermined objects (pseudo balls 124 in FIG. 8);
Movement detection means (photosensor 131 in FIG. 8) for detecting movement of the plurality of predetermined objects;
When the first holding point is converted into the second holding point (the holding point is withdrawn and converted into credit), movement control means for sequentially moving the plurality of predetermined objects by the moving means (payout control unit 31 in FIG. 14). 116, the payout control unit 16 in FIG. 116, the flowchart in FIG.
The plurality of mobile predetermined object based on detected by the movement detection unit, before Symbol first lifting point display updating means first lifting point display means for deduction the first lifting point being displayed (FIG. 7 and FIG. 116 main control unit 323, payout control units 17, 31) ,
Abnormal when the time interval from the detection of the movement of one of the plurality of predetermined objects by the movement detection means to the detection of the movement of the next predetermined object is outside a predetermined reference range An abnormal time control means for executing time control .

According to such a configuration, the first holding point converted from the gaming value is converted into the second holding point for use in the game, on the condition that the movement of the predetermined object is detected. Since the display of one point is updated, the first point can be updated by performing an operation corresponding to the collection of the value object in a pseudo manner as in a game that is not a point type. Further, when the time interval at which the movement of the predetermined object is detected is out of the reference range, the predetermined abnormal time control is executed. For this reason, for example, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as updating the score by inputting a signal similar to the detection signal of the movement detection means without using a regular movement means.

(2) The present invention provides a gaming device (card unit 3 in FIGS. 7 and 115) capable of converting a player's gaming value (card balance, saving medal, savings ball) into a first point, A gaming machine (slot machine 2S in FIG. 1, FIG. 110) that can be played with the second holding point (credit) converted for use in the game from one holding point and is communicably connected to the gaming device. A game system comprising a pachinko machine 2),
Conversion means (the CU main control unit 323) for converting the second score to the first score;
First score display means for displaying the first score (displays 51 and 54 and display 312 in FIGS. 7 and 115);
Second score storage means for storing the second score (credit number counter in FIGS. 7 and 115);
Game control means for performing game control of the gaming machine based on the fact that the second score above the predetermined point is stored in the second score storage means (FIG. 51; bet if the credit number counter becomes 0) A few operations disabled)
Moving means (motor 127 in FIG. 8) for moving a plurality of predetermined objects (pseudo balls 124 in FIG. 8);
Movement detection means (photosensor 131 in FIG. 8) for detecting movement of the plurality of predetermined objects;
When the second holding point is converted to the first holding point (credit adjustment), the moving means sequentially moves the plurality of predetermined objects (payout control unit 31 in FIG. 14, payout control in FIG. 116). Unit 16, the flowchart of FIG. 10),
The plurality of mobile predetermined object based on detected by the movement detection unit, before Symbol first lifting point display updating means first lifting point display means for adding point the first lifting point being displayed (FIG. 7 and FIG. 116 main control unit 323, payout control units 17, 31) ,
Abnormal when the time interval from the detection of the movement of one of the plurality of predetermined objects by the movement detection means to the detection of the movement of the next predetermined object is outside a predetermined reference range An abnormal time control means for executing time control .

According to such a configuration, when the second holding point for use in the game is converted to the first holding point, the display of the first holding point is updated on the condition that the movement of the predetermined object is detected. Therefore, the first score can be updated by performing a pseudo operation corresponding to the discharge of the value object as in a game that is not a score system. Further, when the time interval at which the movement of the predetermined object is detected is out of the reference range, the predetermined abnormal time control is executed. For this reason, for example, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as updating the score by inputting a signal similar to the detection signal of the movement detection means without using a regular movement means.

(3) The present invention, the player owning gaming value (card balances, savings medals,貯玉) a first lifting point (lifting point, the game ball) first lifting depending on convertible at a reduced point command to Game device comprising first point display update means (main control unit 323 in FIGS. 7 and 116) for deducting the first point displayed by the point display means (display 312 in FIGS. 7 and 115) The second holding point converted from the first holding point is provided with a connecting portion (connector 220 in FIG. 4 and connector 420 in FIG. 113) for connecting to the communication unit (card unit 3 in FIGS. 7 and 115). A gaming machine capable of playing games (slot machine 2S in FIG. 1, pachinko machine 2 in FIG. 110),
Second score storage means for storing the second score (credit number counter in FIGS. 7 and 115);
Game control means for performing game control of the gaming machine based on the fact that the second score above the predetermined point is stored in the second score storage means (FIG. 51; bet if the credit number counter becomes 0) A few operations disabled)
Moving means (motor 127 in FIG. 8) for moving a plurality of predetermined objects (pseudo balls 124 in FIG. 8);
Movement detection means (photosensor 131 in FIG. 8) for detecting movement of the plurality of predetermined objects;
Movement control means (payout control unit in FIG. 7) that sequentially moves the plurality of predetermined objects by the moving means when the first holding point is converted to the second holding point (converted into credit by dropping the holding point) 31 and the payout control unit 17) of FIG. 115,
When the movement of the plurality of predetermined object is detected by the movement detection unit, S stand communication control unit 82 of the transmitting unit (Fig. 4 to send pre-Symbol deduction command to the gaming device, P base communication of FIG. 113 Control unit 81) ,
Abnormal when the time interval from the detection of the movement of one of the plurality of predetermined objects by the movement detection means to the detection of the movement of the next predetermined object is outside a predetermined reference range An abnormal time control means for executing time control .

According to such a configuration, the first score (the score, the game ball) converted from the game value (card balance, saving medal, saving ball) is used as the second score (credit) for using the game. At the time of conversion, the display of the first score is updated on the condition that the movement of the predetermined object is detected. By doing so, the first score can be updated. Further, when the time interval at which the movement of the predetermined object is detected is out of the reference range, the predetermined abnormal time control is executed. For this reason, for example, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as updating the score by inputting a signal similar to the detection signal of the movement detection means without using a regular movement means.

(4) The present invention, the player owning gaming value (card balances, savings medals,貯玉) a first lifting point (lifting point, the game ball) first lifting depending on convertible and a by pressurizing point command to First point display update means (the main control unit in FIGS. 7 and 116) for adding the first point (points, game balls) displayed by the point display means (display 312 in FIGS. 7 and 115) 323) and a connecting portion (connector 220 in FIG. 4 and connector 420 in FIG. 113) for communicably connecting to a gaming device (card unit 3 in FIGS. 7 and 115), from the first holding point A gaming machine (slot machine 2S in FIG. 1, pachinko machine 2 in FIG. 110) capable of playing a game with the converted second points,
Second score storage means for storing the second score (credit number counter in FIGS. 7 and 115);
Game control means for performing game control of the gaming machine based on the fact that the second score above the predetermined point is stored in the second score storage means (FIG. 51; bet if the credit number counter becomes 0) A few operations disabled)
Moving means for moving a plurality of predetermined objects (pseudo balls 124 in FIG. 8);
Movement detection means (photosensor 131 in FIG. 8) for detecting movement of the plurality of predetermined objects;
Movement control means (payout control unit 31 in FIG. 7 and payout in FIG. 115) that sequentially moves the plurality of predetermined objects by the moving means when the second holding point is converted to the first holding point (credit settlement). Control unit 17),
When the movement of the plurality of predetermined object is detected by the movement detection unit, S stand communication control unit 82 of the transmitting unit (Fig. 4 to send pre-Symbol Additional command to the gaming device, P base communication of FIG. 113 Control unit 81) ,
Abnormal when the time interval from the detection of the movement of one of the plurality of predetermined objects by the movement detection means to the detection of the movement of the next predetermined object is outside a predetermined reference range An abnormal time control means for executing time control .

According to such a configuration, when the second holding point for use in the game is converted to the first holding point, the display of the first holding point is updated on the condition that the movement of the predetermined object is detected. Therefore, the first score can be updated by performing a pseudo operation corresponding to the discharge of the value object as in a game that is not a score system. Further, when the time interval at which the movement of the predetermined object is detected is out of the reference range, the predetermined abnormal time control is executed. For this reason, for example, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as updating the score by inputting a signal similar to the detection signal of the movement detection means without using a regular movement means.

(5) The present invention relates to a first score (a score, a game ball) converted from a game value (card balance, saving medal, a saving ball) owned by a player, and a game converted from the first score. Of the second points to be used (credits), second score storage means for storing the second score (credit counter in FIGS. 7 and 115), the second score storage means has a predetermined score or more. Game control means for performing game control based on the stored second possession point (FIG. 51; control the bet amount operation invalid state when the credit counter is 0), a plurality of predetermined objects (FIG. 8). Moving means (motor 127 in FIG. 8), movement detecting means (photosensor 131 in FIG. 8) for detecting movement of the plurality of predetermined objects, and the first holding point as the first holding point. wherein the plurality by said moving means when converting the 2 lifting point Sequential movement control means for moving the predetermined object (payout controller 17 of the dispensing control unit 31 and 115 in FIG. 7), the result transmitting means for transmitting a detection result by the previous SL movement detecting means (S stand communication control 4 Unit 82, P-base communication control unit 81 in FIG. 113) , until the movement of the predetermined object is detected after the movement detecting unit detects the movement of one of the plurality of predetermined objects. For communicating with a gaming machine (slot machine 2S in FIG. 1, pachinko machine 2 in FIG. 110) provided with an abnormal time control means for executing an abnormal time control when the time interval is outside a predetermined reference range . A gaming device (card unit 3 in FIGS. 7 and 115) comprising a connecting portion (connector 330 in FIG. 4, connector 380 in FIG. 113) and capable of converting the gaming value into the first holding point,
First score display means for displaying the first score (display 312 in FIGS. 7 and 115);
And have groups Dzu on a detection result of said movement detecting means which is transmitted from the gaming machine, the first lifting point display updating means before Symbol first lifting point display means for deduction the first lifting point being displayed (Figure 7 and 116).

According to such a configuration, the first score (the score, the game ball) converted from the game value (card balance, saving medal, saving ball) is used as the second score (credit) for using the game. At the time of conversion, the display of the first score is updated on the condition that the movement of the predetermined object is detected. By doing so, the first score can be updated. Further, when the time interval at which the movement of the predetermined object is detected is out of the reference range, the predetermined abnormal time control is executed. For this reason, for example, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as updating the score by inputting a signal similar to the detection signal of the movement detection means without using a regular movement means.

(6) The present invention relates to a first score (a score, a game ball) converted from a game value (card balance, saving medal, a saving ball) owned by a player and a game converted from the first score. Of the second points to be used (credits), second score storage means for storing the second score (credit counter in FIGS. 7 and 115), the second score storage means has a predetermined score or more. Game control means for performing game control based on the stored second possession point (FIG. 51; control the bet amount operation invalid state when the credit counter is 0), a plurality of predetermined objects (FIG. 8). Moving means (motor 127 in FIG. 8), movement detecting means (optical sensor 131 in FIG. 8) for detecting the movement of the plurality of predetermined objects, and the second holding point as the first holding point. wherein the plurality by said moving means when converting the 1 lifting point Sequential movement control means for moving the predetermined object (payout controller 17 of the dispensing control unit 31 and 115 in FIG. 7), the result transmitting means for transmitting a detection result by the previous SL movement detecting means (S stand communication control 4 Unit 82, P-base communication control unit 81 in FIG. 113) , until the movement of the predetermined object is detected after the movement detecting unit detects the movement of one of the plurality of predetermined objects. For communicating with a gaming machine (slot machine 2S in FIG. 1, pachinko machine 2 in FIG. 110) provided with an abnormal time control means for executing an abnormal time control when the time interval is outside a predetermined reference range . A gaming device (card unit 3 in FIGS. 7 and 115) comprising a connecting portion (connector 330 in FIG. 4, connector 380 in FIG. 113) and capable of converting the gaming value into the first holding point,
First score display means for displaying the first score (display 312 in FIGS. 7 and 115);
Detection Based on the results, before Symbol first lifting point display updating means first lifting point display means for adding point the first lifting point being displayed (FIGS. 7 and of the movement detecting means which is transmitted from said gaming machine 116 main control section 323).

According to such a configuration, when the second holding point for use in the game is converted to the first holding point, the display of the first holding point is updated on the condition that the movement of the predetermined object is detected. Therefore, the first score can be updated by performing a pseudo operation corresponding to the discharge of the value object as in a game that is not a score system. Further, when the time interval at which the movement of the predetermined object is detected is out of the reference range, the predetermined abnormal time control is executed. For this reason, for example, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as updating the score by inputting a signal similar to the detection signal of the movement detection means without using a regular movement means.

(7) The present invention relates to a first score (score, game ball) converted from a game value (card balance, saving medal, saving ball) owned by a player, and a game converted from the first score. of the second lifting point for using (credit), indicator 51 of the second first lifting point display means in response to reduced point command to together as the game is possible by lifting points (14 and 120 ) is displayed first lifting point display updating means for deduction the first lifting point that has (FIGS. 14 and 120 of the dispensing control unit 17, 31) a gaming machine having a (slot machine 2S in FIG 1, slingshot FIG 110 Machine 2) having a connecting portion (connector 330 in FIG. 4 and connector 380 in FIG. 113) for communicably connecting, and a gaming device (FIG. 7 and FIG. 7) capable of converting the gaming value into the first holding point. 115. Card unit 3 in FIG. A variation in which a ball unit is provided))
Moving means (motor 127 in FIG. 8) for moving a plurality of predetermined objects (pseudo balls 124 in FIG. 8);
Movement detection means (photosensor 131 in FIG. 8) for detecting movement of the plurality of predetermined objects;
When the first holding point is converted into the second holding point (the holding point is withdrawn and converted into credit), the moving control means for sequentially moving the predetermined objects by the moving means (main in FIGS. 14 and 120) Control unit 323),
When the movement of the plurality of predetermined object is detected by the movement detection means, and transmitting means for transmitting a pre-Symbol deduction command to said game machine (CU communication control unit 80 of FIG. 4 and FIG. 113),
Abnormal when the time interval from the detection of the movement of one of the plurality of predetermined objects by the movement detection means to the detection of the movement of the next predetermined object is outside a predetermined reference range An abnormal time control means for executing time control .

According to such a configuration, when the second holding point for use in the game is converted to the first holding point, the display of the first holding point is updated on the condition that the movement of the predetermined object is detected. Therefore, the first score can be updated by performing a pseudo operation corresponding to the discharge of the value object as in a game that is not a score system. Further, when the time interval at which the movement of the predetermined object is detected is out of the reference range, the predetermined abnormal time control is executed. For this reason, for example, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as updating the score by inputting a signal similar to the detection signal of the movement detection means without using a regular movement means.

(8) The present invention relates to a first score (a score, a game ball) converted from a game value (card balance, saving medal, a saving ball) owned by a player and a game converted from the first score. of the second lifting point for using (credit), indicator 51 of the second first lifting point display means in response to the lifting pressure point command to together as the game is possible by points (FIGS. 14 and 120 ) is displayed first lifting point display updating means for adding point the first lifting point that has (FIGS. 14 and 120 of the dispensing control unit 17, 31) a gaming machine having a (slot machine 2S in FIG 1, slingshot FIG 110 Machine 2) having a connecting portion (connector 330 in FIG. 4 and connector 380 in FIG. 113) for communicably connecting, and a gaming apparatus (FIG. 115. Card unit 3 in FIG. A variation in which a ball unit is provided))
Moving means (motor 127 in FIG. 8) for moving a plurality of predetermined objects (pseudo balls 124 in FIG. 8);
Movement detection means (photosensor 131 in FIG. 8) for detecting movement of the plurality of predetermined objects;
Movement control means (main control unit 323 in FIGS. 14 and 120) that sequentially moves the plurality of predetermined objects by the moving means when converting the second holding point to the first holding point (credit settlement);
When the movement of the plurality of predetermined object is detected by the movement detection means, and transmitting means for transmitting a pre-Symbol Additional command to said game machine (CU communication control unit 80 of FIG. 4 and FIG. 113),
Abnormal when the time interval from the detection of the movement of one of the plurality of predetermined objects by the movement detection means to the detection of the movement of the next predetermined object is outside a predetermined reference range An abnormal time control means for executing time control .
According to such a configuration, when the second holding point for use in the game is converted to the first holding point, the display of the first holding point is updated on the condition that the movement of the predetermined object is detected. Therefore, the first score can be updated by performing a pseudo operation corresponding to the discharge of the value object as in a game that is not a score system. Further, when the time interval at which the movement of the predetermined object is detected is out of the reference range, the predetermined abnormal time control is executed. For this reason, for example, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as updating the score by inputting a signal similar to the detection signal of the movement detection means without using a regular movement means.

(9) In the gaming system of (1) and (2), the gaming machine of (3) and (4), or the gaming device of (5) to (8),
When the first condition for updating the first holding point is satisfied and the second condition for updating the second holding point is satisfied, the movement control unit is operated by the moving unit based on the establishment of the first condition. The movement of the predetermined object by the moving means based on the establishment of the second condition is started after a predetermined pause period has elapsed after the movement of the predetermined object (FIGS. 13 and 119).

According to such a configuration, even when both the first condition and the second condition for updating the first holding point are satisfied, the predetermined object is moved based on the satisfaction of the first condition and then the predetermined pause is performed. Since the movement of the predetermined object is executed based on the establishment of the second condition after the period has elapsed, the movement of the predetermined object corresponding to the first condition is distinguished from the movement of the predetermined object corresponding to the second condition. Can do.

(10) In the gaming system of (1) and (2), the gaming machine of (3) and (4), or the gaming device of (5) to (8),
The moving means is
Arrangement members (arms 125 and support members 126 in FIG. 8) for arranging the predetermined objects (pseudo balls 124 in FIG. 8) at predetermined intervals on a circumference around the rotation axis;
Drive means (motor 127 in FIG. 8) for rotating the arrangement member, on which the predetermined object is arranged at predetermined intervals, about the rotation axis.

According to such a configuration, the predetermined object can be repeatedly rotated by the rotational drive of the arrangement member, and the predetermined number of the predetermined objects can be used repeatedly, so that the cost can be reduced.

(11) In the gaming system of (1) and (2), the gaming machine of (3) and (4), or the gaming device of (5) to (8),
The moving means stops the predetermined object at a predetermined initial position when supplied with electric power (S1 to S4 in FIG. 9).

  According to such a configuration, by starting the rotation of the predetermined object from the intended position when the power is turned on, the time from the start of the rotation of the predetermined object after the power is turned on to the detection can be made constant.

( 12 ) In the gaming system of (1) and (2), the gaming machine of (3) and (4), or the gaming device of (5) to (8),
The movement control means moves the predetermined object when a first condition for updating the first holding point is satisfied and when a second condition for updating the first holding point is satisfied. It is possible to control the different aspects (FIGS. 12 and 118).

  According to such a configuration, the movement control means based on the establishment of the first condition for updating the first holding point and the movement control based on the establishment of the second condition for updating the first holding point. A distinction can be made from the control of the means.

It is a front view showing a card unit and a slot machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the front door of the slot machine. It is a figure which shows the design of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit used for a card unit and a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a combination and a combination of symbols. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in each of a card unit and a slot machine, and its transmission / reception aspect. It is a block diagram which shows the part relevant to addition and subtraction of the points of CU and S units. (A) is sectional drawing seen from the front of the pseudo ball unit for addition, (b) is sectional drawing seen from the front of the pseudo ball unit for addition. It is a flowchart which shows operation | movement of the payout control part when a power supply is turned on. It is a flowchart which shows operation | movement of the payout control part when an addition condition is satisfied. It is a flowchart which shows operation | movement of the payout control part when subtraction conditions are satisfied. (A) is a time chart which shows the waveform of the output signal of the optical sensor at the time of lending operation, (b) is a time chart which shows the waveform of the output signal of the optical sensor at the time of winning. (A) is a time chart which shows the waveform of the output signal of the optical sensor when the lending operation is performed during the winning addition, and (b) is the waveform of the output signal of the optical sensor when the winning is made during the lending. It is a time chart. It is a block diagram which shows the modification of the part relevant to addition and subtraction of the point of CU and S stand. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control aspect which memorize | stores game log | history data in each of CU side and S stand side. It is a figure which shows the content of the information for the control circuit of the main control part and CU communication control part, and memorize | stored. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the notification process at the time of detecting abnormality as a result of mutual authentication. It is an explanatory view for explaining an outline of commands and responses performed between the card unit and the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response performed between a main control part and a CU communication control part. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response performed between a main control part and a CU communication control part. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the recovery response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a communication start request | requirement. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of an operation instruction. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the detail of each bit of the operation request | requirement of an operation instruction command, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the detail of each bit of the CU state of an operation instruction command. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of an operation response. It is a figure which shows the meaning and decision point of various data. (A) is a figure which shows the detail of each bit of game machine state 1, (b) is a figure which shows the detail of each bit of game machine state 2, (c) is each bit of game machine error state 1 FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of a communication status response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of an apparatus information response. It is a figure which shows the aspect of transmission / reception of the command and response between a card unit and a slot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when a communication disconnection is detected by the card unit side. It is a figure which shows an example of a process at the time of detecting a communication disconnection on the slot machine side. It is a figure which shows an example of the process by the card unit and slot machine at the time of power activation. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of processing of the subroutine program of the authentication sequence shown in FIG. 33, (a) is an authentication sequence when CU power is activated, and (b) is when gaming machine power is activated. This is an authentication sequence. It is a figure which shows an example of the process of the subroutine program of the CU communication control part authentication sequence shown by Fig.34 (a). FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of processing of a subroutine program of a chip ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. 34. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine program of BB serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine program of the CU communication control part serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine program of the apparatus authentication sequence shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine program of the authentication key update sequence shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the memory | storage setting to the EEPROM of an authentication key. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the process of the business message sequence at the time of normality, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the process of the business message sequence at the time of abnormality. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when a card unit and a slot machine are reconnected. It is a figure which shows an example of the process in the time of standby when the operation of a card unit and a slot machine is not performed. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a slot machine when a card | curd is inserted in the card unit. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program for insertion processing shown in FIG. 45. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and slot machine when consuming the balance of a prepaid card. It is a figure showing an example of processing of a card unit and a slot machine at the time of replay. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a slot machine in the case of subtracting the number of points by the instruction | indication on the card unit side. It is a figure showing an example of processing of a card unit and a slot machine when a big bonus winning is generated. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a slot machine when the number of points in a slot machine runs out during a game. It is a figure showing an example of processing of a card unit and a slot machine when returning a card. It is a figure showing an example of processing of a card unit and a slot machine when a game is interrupted. It is a figure showing an example of processing of a card unit and a slot machine when unlocking and releasing a front door in a slot machine. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing performed by the card unit and the slot machine when the slot machine is not connected when the power is activated while the card unit is holding the card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a slot machine when the operation | movement instruction (no request | requirement operation | movement) from a card unit does not reach a slot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a slot machine when the operation response from a slot machine (response with respect to no request | requirement operation | movement) does not reach | attain a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a slot machine when the operation instruction (addition request) from a card unit does not reach the slot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a slot machine when the operation response from a slot machine (response to an addition request) does not reach the card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a slot machine when the operation instruction (subtraction request) from a card unit does not reach the slot machine. It is a figure showing an example of processing of a card unit and a slot machine when an operation response from a slot machine (response to a subtraction request) does not reach the card unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing performed by the card unit and the slot machine when the slot machine returns a response to reject addition in response to a card unit addition request. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing performed by the card unit and the slot machine when the slot machine returns a clear rejection response to the card unit clear instruction request. It is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the slot machine when the slot machine returns a permission rejection response to the card unit game permission request. FIG. 10 shows an example of processing performed by the card unit and the slot machine when the slot machine returns a prohibition rejection response to the card unit game prohibition request. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing performed by the card unit and the slot machine when the slot machine returns a front door opening rejection response to the card unit front door opening request. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a slot machine when the power failure in the card unit after reaching the operation response regarding addition / subtraction data occurs. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of recovery processing between a card unit and a slot machine in the case where a power interruption has occurred in the card unit before reaching an operation instruction. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a slot machine when a power failure occurs in a card unit before the operation response regarding addition / subtraction data is reached. FIG. 68 is a diagram illustrating an example of a control process in a case where communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off illustrated in FIG. 67 occurs. FIG. 69 is a diagram illustrating an example of a control process in a case where communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power interruption occurs illustrated in FIG. 68. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an example of a control process in the case of communication partner mismatch in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 69 occurs. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a slot machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before the addition request is reached. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a slot machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before reaching an operation response to the addition request. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing an example of a control process in the case of communication partner mismatch in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 73 occurs. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of a control process in the case of communication partner mismatch in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 74 occurs. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a slot machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before the subtraction request is reached. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a slot machine when a power failure has occurred in the card unit before reaching an operation response to the subtraction request. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an example of a control process in the case of communication partner mismatch in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 77 occurs. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an example of a control process in the case of communication partner mismatch in the recovery at the time of occurrence of a CU-side power interruption shown in FIG. 78. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of recovery processing between a card unit and a slot machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before reaching the clear request. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a slot machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before reaching an operation response to the clear request. It is a figure which shows an example of the control processing in the case of communication partner mismatch in the recovery at the time of the CU side power supply interruption shown in FIG. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an example of a control process in the case of communication partner mismatch in recovery at the time of occurrence of a CU-side power interruption shown in FIG. 82. It is a figure explaining the display screen of the operation state displayed in conjunction with the processing of the card unit and the slot machine when the card is inserted into the card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a slot machine in case the share point sharing process which carries out divided transfer (share point share) is performed during the game in which the member card was inserted. It is a figure which shows an example of the process of a card unit and a slot machine in case the score sharing process which carries out the division | segmentation transfer of a score (point sharing) is performed during the game in which the visitor card was inserted. It is a figure which shows the other example of the process of a card unit and a slot machine in case the score sharing process which divides and transfers (score sharing) is performed during the game in which the member card was inserted. It is a screen figure of a display device when a point sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of a display device when a point sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of a display device when a point sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of a display device when a point sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of a display device when a point sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of a display device when a point sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of a display device when a point sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a transition screen figure in FIG. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator during membership card insertion. It is a screen figure of the indicator during membership card insertion. It is a screen figure of the indicator during card return. It is a screen figure of the indicator during card return. It is a figure which shows the whole system for delivering the information for authentication which consists of the authentication key for security ensuring, and unique ID (it is also mentioned SID). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control aspect which memorize | stores game history data in each of the CU side and S stand side in a modification. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program in a variation of the insertion time process shown in FIG. 36. It is a front view which shows a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the glass door and front frame of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit used for a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in the card unit side and the pachinko machine side, and its transmission / reception. It is a block diagram which shows the part relevant to addition and subtraction of the game ball among CU and P units. It is a flowchart which shows operation | movement of the payout control part at the time of winning a prize. It is a flowchart which shows operation | movement of the payout control part at the time of a foul ball generation | occurrence | production. (A) is a time chart which shows the waveform of the output signal of the optical sensor at the time of lending operation, (b) is a time chart which shows the waveform of the output signal of the optical sensor at the time of winning, (c) is a foul ball generation It is a time chart which shows the waveform of the output signal of the optical sensor at the time. (A) is a time chart which shows the waveform of the output signal of the optical sensor when the lending operation is performed during the winning addition, and (b) is the waveform of the output signal of the optical sensor when the winning is made during the lending. It is a time chart, (c) is a time chart showing the waveform of the output signal of the optical sensor when a foul ball occurs during lending. It is a block diagram which shows the modification of the part relevant to addition and subtraction of the game ball among CU and P units.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. As a concept of terms used in the present embodiment, “gaming equipment” includes gaming machines (pachinko machines, slot machines, etc.), card units, Z counters, card issuing devices, clearing devices, hall management devices, prize exchanges. It is a concept that includes all devices installed in a game hall such as a device, and the “game device” is a concept that excludes only gaming machines from the “game device”.

  First, referring to FIG. 1, a slot machine (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as “S”) 2 is attached to each gaming island (not shown) arranged in a plurality of game halls. Card units (hereinafter also abbreviated as CU) 3 as an example of a gaming device are installed in a one-to-one correspondence with the slot machine 2S at a side position on a predetermined side of the machine 2S.

  The card unit 3 is issued to a visitor card having a prepaid function, which is a game recording medium issued to a general player who has not registered as a member, or a member player who has registered as a member in the game hall. By accepting a membership card, which is a game recording medium, and converting the game value of the player specified by the record information of the card into a score, the corresponding slot machine 2S exchanges the score for the score It has a function to set a game so that it can be played.

  Each of the visitor card and the membership card has a function of recording the card balance and the points earned by the game so as to be specified by the record information of the card. The difference in the handling of points between membership cards and visitor cards is that the card that can use the medal saving function to save the points earned by the membership card cumulatively even after the game day, while the visitor card Is a card that cannot use the function. Visitor cards and membership cards are composed of IC cards.

Hereinafter, both the membership card and the visitor card are also simply referred to as “cards”.
On the front side of the card unit 3, a bill insertion slot 302 for inserting bills, a projecting portion 305 projecting forward from the front of the apparatus, a card insertion slot 309 for inserting a membership card or a visitor card, etc. Is provided. The member card or visitor card inserted into the card insertion slot 309 is received by the card reader / writer 327 (see FIG. 4), and the information recorded on the card is read. In the protrusion 305 described above, on the surface facing the player, the display 312 and the member card ID recorded on the member card and the number of medals specified by the member ID when the member card is received are displayed. An IR light receiving unit 315 (FIG. 1) that receives an infrared signal from a replay button 319 for executing the replay game used and a remote control (not shown) possessed by an attendant of the game hall, converts it into an electronic signal, and outputs it. Is omitted).

  Further, a lending button 321, a return button 322, a call button 798, a credit button 422, and a credit settlement button 421 are provided between the display 312 and the replay button 319. The lending button 321 is a button for performing an operation for withdrawing the prepaid balance specified by the inserted card and securing the points used for the game. The return button 322 is a button operated when returning the card inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309. The call button 798 is a button operated by the player when calling a staff member of the game hall. The credit button 422 is a button for performing an operation for securing points to be used for a game by withdrawing points. The credit check button 421 is a button that is operated when converting into points, or when returning the card inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309.

  The display 312 displays a prepaid balance (also referred to as a card balance or simply a balance) recorded on the inserted game recording medium (card), and displays the number of points and various other information described later. In addition, the surface is configured with a transparent touch panel, and various operations can be input by touching various display items displayed on the display unit of the display 312 with a finger.

  When the replay button 319 is operated, if a score acquired by the player is recorded on the inserted card, a predetermined number of points will be deducted from that score and used for the game. When the inserted card is a membership card and the number of points is not recorded, and a stored medal is recorded in the hall management computer 1 or the like, a predetermined number of points are calculated from the stored medal. Will be withdrawn and given points for use in games. A predetermined number of points are deducted from the given points and converted into credits.

  Here, the concepts of “balance (remaining amount)”, “scoring points”, “stored medals”, and “credit” will be organized.

  “Balance” is an example of a value recorded on a card in exchange for cash. After inserting the card into the CU, by operating the lending button, a part of the “balance” recorded on the card is withdrawn and converted to “score”. For example, a “balance” equivalent to 500 yen is withdrawn by one lending operation, and converted to 25 “scoring points”.

  “Points” cannot be used directly in games, but can be used when seeking a wagon service. Further, by operating the credit button, a part of the score is withdrawn and converted to “credit”. For example, 25 credit points are withdrawn by one credit operation, and converted to “credits” with the same score.

  “Credit” can be used for games, and the number of bets can be set by using “credit”. For example, one “credit” is consumed for one BET. In addition, when a winning occurs, a credit of a number corresponding to the type of the winning is added. As described above, the data updated in accordance with the bet number setting during the game and the occurrence of winnings is credits, not points.

  “Credit” cannot be used for wagon service. For this reason, there is no situation where the “credit” that can be used for the game is lost by requesting the wagon service.

  At the end of the game, the “credit” is converted back into points by operating the credit check button. In this embodiment, one credit point is converted into one point. However, a predetermined number of “credits” may be deducted as a fee during reverse conversion.

  In this embodiment, there is no upper limit for credits, and until the player operates the credit check button, credits are cumulatively added according to the occurrence of winnings and the conversion from points to credits. The However, an upper limit value may be set for the credit in order to prevent a credit that is too high from being held. For example, it is conceivable that the upper limit number is the maximum number of credits obtained by the player when the stop is set in the slot machine.

  At the end of the game, further, by operating the card return button, the acquired points are written in an identifiable manner with the card. In this case, the score may be recorded directly on the card, or the score may be managed by the hall management computer using the card ID.

  When the returned card is inserted again into the card unit (which may be the same as or different from the CU at the end of the game), the “score” recorded on the card is read and read. “Point” is displayed on the CU. If the “scoring point” read at this time is greater than or equal to the “credit” deduction minimum score (for example, 25 points), the “scoring point” can be obtained without performing a lending operation for deducting the “balance” from the card. The credits necessary for the game can be secured by performing the withdrawal operation (credit button ON).

  However, the “score” is valid only on the day when it is acquired in the game, and on the next day, the “score” is managed as “save medal” in the game hall. Therefore, even if the player visits the amusement hall on the day following the day when “score” is acquired and inserts the card into the card unit 3, the score is displayed as 0. In the case of playing a game using “stored medals”, first, a stored medals replay operation (replay button ON) is required. When the replay button is operated, a part of “stored medal” is converted into points. For example, a “reward medal” corresponding to 25 points is withdrawn by one replay operation, and converted to “score points” of 25 points.

  In other words, the “stored medal” is a point deposited in a game hall and is generally managed by the hall management computer 1 or other management computer installed in the game hall. On the other hand, the “score” is the number of points owned by the player as a result of the player playing the game with the gaming machine, and has not yet been deposited in the game hall.

  The points may be managed by a management device for managing the number of points set in the game hall. In short, the difference between "save medal" and "scoring" is the point that the medal operation for depositing into the amusement hall has been performed and it has been deposited in the amusement hall, or is still deposited in the amusement hall. It is a point of whether it is a point of the stage not entered. “Credit” is the same as “Position” in that the game room is not deposited, but “Credit” is different in that it is used when playing a game.

  Further, “credit” is generated during the game, and when the game is finished, it is converted into “score”, so “credit” is not recorded on the card. Of course, instead of this, at the time of the end of the game, “credit” may be recorded so as to be identifiable with a card (directly recorded on a card or managed by a management device with a card ID).

  In this embodiment, the stored medal data is not recorded directly on the member card, but stored in the upper server such as the hall management computer 1 in association with the member card number so that the corresponding stored medal can be searched based on the member card number. It is configured. On the other hand, the score is recorded directly on the card.

  As a method of recording the card balance or the score so that the membership card or visitor card can be specified, (a) record the card balance or score on the card itself, (b) record the card balance or score on the card itself. Without storing, the card balance or score corresponding to the ID is stored in a computer such as the hall management computer 1 in association with the ID recorded in the card unit. (C) The card balance or score is recorded on the card itself. In addition, a method of storing a card balance or a point corresponding to the ID in a computer such as the hall management computer 1 in association with the ID of the card is conceivable, and any method is adopted in this embodiment. May be.

  The banknote inserted into the banknote insertion slot 302 is taken in by the currency discriminator 344, and its authenticity and banknote type are identified. The player is given points according to the bill amount.

  In the following description, giving the player the points to be used for the game by withdrawing the prepaid balance recorded on the card is referred to as “lending of points”.

  The points given by operating the replay button 319 or the lending button 321 and the points given by inserting the bill into the bill insertion slot 302 are collectively stored in the card unit 3. The score is displayed on the display 312. Note that a dedicated indicator for displaying the points may be provided in the card unit 3.

  Also, a predetermined number of points are deducted from the points and converted into credits that can be used for gaming machines. The card unit 3 subtracts and updates the credits stored for the number of bets set in the slot machine 2S, and adds and updates the credits stored for the winning equivalent generated in the slot machine 2S.

  In the slot machine 2S, the bet amount is set by using the credit, and the credit is added and updated according to the winning. For this reason, when playing a game in the slot machine 2S, a medal insertion operation is not necessary. Therefore, the slot machine 2S is not provided with a medal slot and a medal payout slot.

  Inside the casing 1a of the slot machine 2S, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are juxtaposed in a horizontal direction. As shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged so as to be seen from the see-through window 10 provided on the front door 2b.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the outer periphery of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, “black 7”, “net 7 (shaded 7 in the figure)”, “white 7”, “BAR”, “replay”, A plurality of identifiable symbols such as “watermelon”, “black cherry”, “white cherry”, “bell”, and “orange” are drawn in a predetermined order, 21 pieces each. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 10, respectively.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 4) respectively provided correspondingly. Thereby, the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are displayed in the see-through window 10 while changing continuously. Further, by stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three continuous symbols are derived and displayed as display results on the fluoroscopic window 10.

  Inside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R (see FIG. 4) for detecting a reference position for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the back A reel LED (not shown) for irradiation is provided. The reel LED is composed of 12 LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and each symbol can be irradiated independently.

  A display area 51a that is controlled to be displayed by the display 51 is disposed at a position on the front side (player side) of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 2b. The display 51 is a liquid crystal display device. In the display area 51a, points, bets set in the game, and other various images (see FIG. 85 or FIGS. 89 to 106) are displayed.

  In order to detect an instruction (for example, touch operation) from the player on the display surface on the front side (front side in FIG. 1) of the display 51 and to identify the position (for example, the position where the touch operation has been performed). A touch panel (not shown) is installed.

  The front door 2b has a single bet switch 5 that is operated when setting the number of bets using “credit = 1” corresponding to one medal, and the maximum bet determined according to the gaming state. It is operated when setting the number (for example, “credit = 3” in the normal game state before occurrence of BB and RT (Replay Time) in which the replay winning probability is high, “credit = 2” in the bonus) MAXBET switch 6, cancel button 9 operated when canceling the set bet amount and reducing the set bet number, start switch 7 operated when starting the game, rotation of reels 2L, 2C, 2R Stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, a chance button 58, and a jog dial 59, which are operated when stopping each, are provided. When the cancel button 9 is pressed and held, the set bet number set by the BET switches 5 and 6 is canceled. When the cancel button 9 is pressed briefly, the number of bets set by the BET switches 5 and 6 is decreased by one.

  The jog dial 59 selects and designates various display items (icons) and the like in the display area 51a when the player rotates. When the player rotates the jog dial 59, the display items to be selected among the various display items displayed on the display area 51a are sequentially moved and displayed. The player operates the jog dial 59 to rotate. When the player presses the chance button 58 after designating the display item to be selected, the selected display item is designated and the player's selection is confirmed.

  In addition, the front door 2b is provided with a game auxiliary display 12 on which an error code or the like is displayed, and a payout display 13 on which the number of points awarded and the number of credits given by the occurrence of a prize are displayed.

  Further, the front door 2b has a start valid LED 18 for notifying by light that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, a weight (the rotation of the reel since a certain period has not elapsed since the start of the previous game). A waiting LED 19 for notifying that a replay game is in progress and a replaying LED 20 for notifying that a replay game is in progress are provided.

  When playing a game in the slot machine 2S, first, the points secured using the card unit 3 are converted into credits, and the bet number is set using the credits. In order to use credits, the single BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 may be operated. When the bet number is set, the pay line determined according to the bet number and the game state is valid among the pay lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 1), and the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, that is, the game Is ready to start.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether a combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 10 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a winning symbol combination. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, a winning line L1 set across the symbols arranged in the middle stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and the symbols arranged in the upper stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R are displayed. The winning line L2 set across the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, the winning line L3 set over the lower symbols, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the lower stage of the reel 2R, that is, lower right There are 5 types of winning lines L4 set across straddling symbols, the lower line of reel 2L, the middle part of reel 2C, the upper part of reel 2R, that is, the winning line L5 set straddling the symbols lined up to the right It is defined as a line. The winning line is not limited to the lines indicated by L1 to L5 but may be other lines.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 10.

  When one of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) is set on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5. When the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped as a result of display, a prize is generated, and a score determined according to the prize is awarded to the player.

  In the slot machine 2S according to the present embodiment, after the game is started and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate and the symbols start to change, any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R When operated, the reels corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R stop rotating and the symbols are stopped and displayed. The maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is 190 ms (milliseconds).

  Of the three reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the first stop reel is called the first stop reel, the second stop reel is called the second stop reel, and the last stop reel is called the third stop reel. This reel stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, a second stop operation, and a third stop operation.

  The reels 2L, 2C and 2R rotate 80 times per minute, and 80 × 21 (the number of symbols per reel) = 1680 frames, so the maximum of 4 symbols is drawn in 190 ms. Will be able to. In other words, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols that are displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols that are four frames ahead of them, for a total of five symbols.

  For this reason, for example, when any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is used as a reference, the symbol from the symbol to four frames ahead Since the symbols can be displayed in the lower row, as a result, the symbols from the symbol to six frames ahead can be displayed in the upper row. That is, in each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated, within 7 frames including the symbols displayed on the lower row of the reel corresponding to the stop switch. The arranged symbols can be drawn and stopped on the winning line. Such reel control is referred to as pull-in control.

  Further, the front door 2b is formed with two vertically long transparent windows W0 and W1, and inside the one transparent window W0, a part of the pseudo ball unit for addition 120 is provided so as to be visible. A part of the subtraction ball unit 121 for subtraction is provided inside the transparent window so as to be visible. These pseudo ball units 120 and 121 are filled with pseudo balls in a state in which the player cannot extract them. The pseudo ball units 120 and 121 will be described in detail later (FIGS. 8A and 8B, etc.).

  Next, referring to FIG. 2, in the slot machine 2S, a front door 2b is provided to the main body frame 2a so as to be openable and closable with its left edge as a swing center.

  A pair of upper and lower engaging protrusions 6a and 6b are provided near the edge of the front door 2b opposite to the center of swinging. The engaging protrusions 6a and 6b are pressed downward by a spring (not shown). On the other hand, engagement receiving pieces 7a and 7b are provided at positions of the main body frame 2a facing the engagement protrusions 6a and 6b. When the opened front door 2b is pressed against the main body frame 2a, the engaging projections 6a and 6b get over the engaging receiving pieces 7a and 7b. Move and become locked.

  A front door opening solenoid 110 (see FIG. 4) is provided on the back surface side of the front door 2b. When the front door opening solenoid 110 is energized, a pair of upper and lower members against the biasing force of the spring is provided. The mating projections 6a and 6b are pushed upward, and as a result, the engagement projections 6a and 6b are disengaged from the engagement receiving pieces 7a and 7b to be unlocked, and the front door 2b is opened.

  The front door closing detector 112 (see FIG. 4) is provided at a position in contact with the front door 2b in the upper part of the main body frame 2a, and the front door 2b is pressed against the main body frame 2a to be in a locked state. Detected.

  Next, an outline of a control circuit for the card unit 3 and the slot machine 2S will be described with reference to FIG.

  The card unit 3 is provided with a main control unit 323 composed of a microcomputer or the like. The main control unit 323 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

  The main control unit 323 is provided with an external communication unit 324 for communicating with the hall management computer 1 and the like, and a CU communication control unit 80 for communicating with the payout control unit 31 of the slot machine 2S. Is provided. The card unit 3 is provided with a connector 330 for connection to the slot machine 2S side, and the slot machine 2S is provided with a connector 220 for connection to the card unit 3 side. The CU communication control unit 80 and the payout control unit 31 are communicably connected via the connectors 330 and 220 and connection wiring.

  When the CPU 805 (see FIG. 16) of the main control unit 323 detects an unconnected error such as disconnection between the external communication unit 324 and the hall management computer 1, it sends an error display command to the display control unit 797 for display. The controller 312 displays an error and controls to turn on or blink an abnormality notification lamp (not shown).

  Further, when the main control unit 323 detects an unconnected error such as disconnection between the CU communication control unit 80 and the S-unit communication control unit 82, the main control unit 323 transmits an error display command to the display control unit 797 and sends an error to the display 312. Control is performed so that an abnormality notification lamp (not shown) is turned on or blinked, and a notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer 1.

  The currency identifier 344 identifies the authenticity and type of the bill, and the identification result signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the IR photosensitive unit 320 receives infrared rays emitted from a remote controller owned by a game attendant, the received light signal is input to the main control unit 323. The card reader / writer 327 reads the information recorded on the inserted card, and the read information is input to the main control unit 323 and written to the card reader / writer 327 from the main control unit 323. When data is transmitted, the card reader / writer 327 writes the data to the inserted card.

  The CPU 805 of the main control unit 323 determines the suitability of the card based on the read information from the card reader / writer 327. When the CPU 805 determines that the card is an improper card (forged card or the like), an error display command is displayed to the display control unit 797. To display the error on the display 312 and turn on or blink an abnormality notification lamp (not shown) and transmit a notification signal to the hall management computer 1 that an error has occurred. .

  A display control unit 797 is connected to the main control unit 323, and display data such as balance, points, credits, and the like is output from the main control unit 323 to the display 312, and the output display data is output. Is displayed on the display 312. Further, when the player operates a touch panel provided on the surface of the display 312, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the lending button 321, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the replay button 319, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the return button 322, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the credit button 421, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the credit check button 422, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323.

  The slot machine 2S is electrically connected to a main control board 116 that controls the progress of the game of the slot machine 2S (game control) and a payout control unit 31 that transmits information about points and the like to the card unit 3. It is provided in the state. Further, the slot machine 2S is provided with a display effect control board 90 electrically connected to the payout control unit 31, and a display ROM board 92 electrically connected to the display effect control board 90. ing.

  A CU communication control unit 80 is further connected to the main control unit 323 on the card unit 3 side. The CU communication control unit 80 and the S unit communication control unit 82 provided in the slot machine 2S are connected to the connector 330 and It is electrically connected via a connector 220. The S-unit communication control unit 82 and the payout control unit 31 are configured by a one-chip LSI 117.

  Then, from the CU communication control unit 80 to the S-unit communication control unit 82, “addition request c (credit), addition request number c (credit)” and “subtraction request c (credit), subtraction request related to the credit update request. Number c (credit) ”,“ addition request p (score), addition request number p (score) ”, and“ subtraction request p (score) ”, subtraction request count p (score) In addition, various commands for game permission / prohibition request are transmitted, and the various commands are transmitted from the S unit communication control unit 82 to the payout control unit 31. Note that the main control board 116 and the LSI 117 may be integrated into one chip.

  As will be described later, the addition request p (score) command is transmitted to the payout control unit 31 when the points are loaned or replayed from the prepaid balance, and the payout control unit 31 receives it. Add and update the number of points. As will be described later, the subtraction request p (score score) command is transmitted to the payout control section 31 when a split score transfer (point share processing) or a wagon service is performed, and a payout control section that receives it. 31 subtracts and updates the number of points. However, the update of the holding points is conditional on the movement / detection of a pseudo ball described later.

  As will be described later, the addition request c (credit) command is transmitted to the payout control unit 31 when the credit is deducted from the holding point, and the payout control unit 31 receives and updates the number of credits. To do. As will be described later, the subtraction request c (credit) command is transmitted to the payout control unit 31 when the credit settlement is performed, and the payout control unit 31 receiving the subtraction request subtracts and updates the number of credits.

  The game permission / prohibition request command is a command requesting the payout control unit 31 to permit the game or a command requesting prohibition of the game. The number of addition requests is a command for designating the number of points to be added or the number to be added to credits by the above-described addition request p (score) command and addition request c (credit) command. The subtraction request number is a command for designating the number of points or the number to be subtracted from the credit by the subtraction request command described above.

  A game control microcomputer is mounted on the main control board 116. A microcomputer for gaming machine control includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) that stores programs and control data for operating the CPU, and a RAM (RAM that functions as a work area for the CPU). Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

  The main control board 116 includes a random number generation circuit that generates a predetermined range of random numbers, a sampling circuit that acquires random numbers from the random number generation circuit, and the like. The main control board 116 performs an internal lottery for a winning combination using the random number acquired from the random number generation circuit.

  The main control board 116 has a single BET switch 5, a MAXBET switch 6, a start switch 7, a cancel button 9, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, a game auxiliary display 12, a payout display 13, a start valid LED 18, and a waiting state. The LED 19, the replaying LED 20, the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, and the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R are connected.

  The main control board 116 detects the start operation after setting the bet amount, starts variable display devices (reels 2L, 2C, 2R), draws the results of one game, and stops each reel in response to the stop operation. Let

  In the slot machine 2 according to the present embodiment, the point addition rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the credit addition rate is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to a set value in an internal lottery described later. The set value consists of 6 levels of 1 to 6, where 6 is the highest addition rate, and the addition rate decreases as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value decreases in order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage decreases stepwise.

  Inside the slot machine 2S, an operation unit (not shown) for the administrator to change the set value is provided.

  Here, processing executed by the main control board 116 in the slot machine 2S will be described.

  In the slot machine 2S of the present embodiment, a winning is awarded when the winning symbols are aligned on any winning line of the variable display device constituted by the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. The types of winning combinations are determined according to the state of the game, but can be broadly divided into special roles with a shift to the big bonus (BB) and regular bonus (RB), and small roles with payout of medals. And a re-gamer (replay) that allows the next game to be started without the need to set the bet amount.

  In the following, the big bonus may be referred to as BB, and the regular bonus provided during the big bonus may be referred to as RB. In some cases, a big bonus or a regular bonus is simply referred to as a bonus. In order for each winning combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win an internal lottery and set a winning flag for the winning combination.

  Of the winning flags for each of these roles, the winning flags for the small role and the replaying role are valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and are invalid in the next game. It is valid until a combination of combinations permitted by the flag is completed, and is invalid in a game having a combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the special combination winning flag is won, even if the combination of the combinations permitted by the flag cannot be made, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It becomes.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the slot machine 1 has a big bonus (hereinafter referred to as BB as a big bonus) and a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as RB as a regular bonus) as a special role. Cherry, Bell are replayed as a re-playing role.

  The cherry is awarded when the symbol “white cherry” is derived on any of the winning lines for the right reel in any gaming state, and one point corresponding to one medal is given in any gaming state. It is done. Will be paid out. If the symbol “white cherry” stops at the upper or lower stage of the right reel, the combination of cherries will be aligned on the two winning lines of the winning lines L2, L5 or the winning lines L3, L4. Since you won the cherry on the winning line, you will be awarded 2 points.

  A watermelon is awarded when a combination of “Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon” or “Watermelon-Watermelon-BAR” is available on any of the winning lines in any game state, and 15 points are awarded for RB and BB. And 12 points are awarded in the normal gaming state. A bell is awarded when a combination of “Bell-Bell-Bell” is placed on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and 15 points are awarded for RB and BB, and 10 points are awarded for the normal gaming state. It is done.

  Replay is a combination of “Replay-Replay-Replay”, “BAR-Replay-Replay”, or “Black 7-Replay-Replay” in any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state. Wins when you have the right. When the replay wins, no credit is given, but the next game can be started without setting the number of bets again, so 3 points corresponding to the number of bets that became unnecessary in the next game are given. The same is true.

  RB is won when the combination of “net 7-net 7-black 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state, and the gaming state shifts to RB. The RB is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player over other gaming states by increasing the winning probability of the small role, particularly the bell, and when the 12 games are digested after the RB starts, or an 8-game winning ( When the type of a combination is allowed), it ends either whichever comes first.

  BB is a combination of “black 7-black 7-black 7”, “net 7-net 7-net 7” or “white 7-white 7-white 7” in any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state. When the combination is complete, a prize is awarded.

  When BB wins, the gaming state shifts to BB and shifts to RB at the same time. When RB ends, if BB has not ended, it shifts to RB again and is controlled repeatedly until BB ends. The That is, during BB, it is always controlled to RB. And BB is complete | finished when the total number of points given to the player in the said BB exceeds 465 points. At the end of the BB, the RB is also ended regardless of whether or not the RB end condition is satisfied.

  Hereinafter, the internal lottery of the present embodiment will be described. In the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not the above winning combination is permitted before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is detected). To do. In the internal lottery, first, a random value for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535) is acquired when the start switch 7 is detected. Specifically, the value of the random number storage work assigned to the RAM of the main control unit 41 is set to the lottery work assigned to the RAM of the main control unit 41. Then, for each combination determined according to the gaming state and whether or not the special combination is carried over, numerical data stored in the lottery work, and determination of each combination determined according to the gaming state, the number of bets and the set value This is done according to the number of values.

  The random value storage work is a storage area for storing numerical data latched in the random value register R1D simultaneously with the operation of the start switch 7, and is latched every time new numerical data is latched in the random value register R1D. The numerical data is read in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main), and the numerical data stored in the random value storage work is updated to the latest latched numerical data.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, the role that is the subject of the internal lottery differs depending on whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RB, or BB. Further, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the role to be subject to the internal lottery varies depending on whether or not the special role is being carried over.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state and any special combination is not carried over, BB, RB, replay, watermelon, cherry, and bell are sequentially read out as the target combination of the internal lottery.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state and any special combination is carried over, replay, watermelon, cherry, and bell are sequentially read out as the target combinations for the internal lottery.

  When the gaming state is RB (including the inside of the BB), watermelon, cherry, and bell are sequentially read out as the target combinations for internal lottery.

  In the present embodiment, an example is described in which three types of symbol combinations corresponding to BB, three types of symbol combinations corresponding to replay, and two types of symbol combinations corresponding to watermelon are defined. Then, each symbol combination is read out as a target combination. For example, for BB, a combination of “black 7-black 7-black 7”, a combination of “net 7-net 7-net 7”, and a combination of “white 7-white 7-white 7” are subject to internal lottery. Are read in order. Replays and watermelons are also sequentially read out as target combinations for each symbol combination. The number of determination values used in the internal lottery is determined for each symbol combination corresponding to the set values 1 to 6. That is, the winning rate is determined for each symbol combination corresponding to the set values 1 to 6. For this reason, in the internal lottery, the derivation (generation) of the symbol combination is permitted according to the winning rate determined for each symbol combination corresponding to the set value.

  In the internal lottery, the number of judgment values determined according to the internal lottery target, the current game state, and the set value are sequentially added to the internal lottery random value (the value of the lottery work) and added. When the result of overflows, it is determined that the winning combination is won. For this reason, a winning combination will be won with a probability (number of determination values / 65536) according to the number of determination values.

  When a winning combination is determined, a winning flag corresponding to the winning combination is set in the internal winning flag storing work assigned to the RAM of the main control unit 41. The internal winning flag storage work consists of a 2-byte storage area, of which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storing work in which the winning flag for the special role is set, and the lower byte is the winning of the general role It is assigned as a general role storage work for which a flag is set. Specifically, when a special combination is won, a special combination winning flag indicating that the special combination is won is set in the special combination storing work, and the winning flag set in the general combination storing work is cleared. When a general combination is won, a winning flag for the general combination indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If no winning combination or winning combination is won, only the general winning combination work is cleared.

  The “game” in the slot machine 2S, in a narrow sense, refers to a period from when the start switch 7 is operated until the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped. Since the setting of the bet number before the operation of No. 7 and the payout of medals and the transition of the gaming state are performed after the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped, these incidental processes are also included in the “game” in a broad sense. And

  First, the main control board 116 sets the number of bets by detecting the operation of the single BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6, and starts to rotate the reels 2L, 2C, 2R by detecting the operation of the start switch 7. .

  However, if the player has won a replay in the previous game, the same bet number as the previous game is automatically set by the replay game flag (the replay game flag is erased at this stage).

  When the number of bets is set and the start switch 7 is operated, the main control board 116 extracts a random number for internal lottery, and assigns to each combination determined according to the gaming state based on the extracted random number value. A lottery process is performed to determine whether or not winning is allowed.

  The main control board 116 performs a reel rotation process after the lottery process. In the reel rotation process, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in the previous game are processed on the condition that one game regulation time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has passed since the time counted by one game timer has elapsed. The motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven to start rotation of all the left, middle, and right reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

  The main control board 116 stops when a predetermined condition (the reference position is detected by the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R after the rotation speed reaches a constant speed) from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is satisfied. The operation of the switches 8L, 8C, 8R is made valid. Thereafter, when the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated by the player, the driving of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R is stopped, and the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped.

  When the driving of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, the main control board 116 performs a winning determination process for determining whether any predetermined role symbol is derived and displayed on the winning line. In the winning determination process, when it is determined that a winning combination such as BB has been won, a process for controlling the bonus (for example, setting a bonus value corresponding to the value of the gaming state flag) is performed.

  The main control board 116 performs a payout process when the winning determination process ends. In the payout process, an addition number signal indicating the number of points to be given is output to the LSI 117. In the payout process, a bonus end determination process for determining whether or not a bonus end condition corresponding to the bonus is satisfied is performed during the bonus (BB or RB) as various processes not related to winning.

  Next, configurations other than the main control board 116 mounted on the slot machine 2S will be described.

  The LSI 117 includes a payout control unit 31. The payout control unit 31 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer. The payout control microcomputer includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices. Note that the game control microcomputer mounted on the main control board 116 and the S-unit communication control unit 82 and the payout control unit 31 of the LSI 117 may be integrated into one chip.

  The payout control unit 31 includes a score counter for storing a player's total score separately from the card unit 3. For example, the player performs an operation (lending operation or replaying operation of the stored medal) to secure points by deducting the valuable value owned by the player, or the player uses the card unit 3 to store a card in which the points are recorded. Is inserted, the data of the addition request p (score) is transmitted from the card unit 3. When the payout control unit 31 receives the addition request data, the payout control unit 31 circulates and moves the pseudo balls of the adding pseudo ball unit 120 according to the data, and adds and updates the score counter based on the detected number of pseudo balls (Refer to FIGS. 7 to 13 and the like). On the other hand, when the request for the wagon service is made or the data of the subtraction request p (score) is received from the card unit 3, the payout control unit 31 subtracts the pseudo ball unit 121 for subtraction according to the number of subtraction requests. The pseudo ball is circulated and the number-of-points counter is subtracted and updated based on the number of detected pseudo balls. That is, the payout control unit 31 drives the pseudo ball unit for addition 120 when adding and updating the score counter, and drives the pseudo ball unit 121 for subtraction when subtracting and updating the score counter.

  The payout control unit 31 includes a credit number counter for storing the credit number of the player separately from the card unit 3. For example, when the player performs an operation to secure the credit by deducting the points, data of the addition request c (credit) is transmitted from the card unit 3, and the payout control unit 31 sends the addition request c (credit). ) And update the credit counter. On the other hand, when the bet amount is set or the subtraction request c (credit) data is received from the card unit 3, the payout control unit 31 subtracts and updates the credit number counter according to the set bet number or the subtraction request number. . In addition, the update of the credit counter is not conditional on the movement / detection of the pseudo ball. For this reason, for example, if the bet amount is set, the credit number counter is updated by subtraction without driving the pseudo ball unit 121 for subtraction. Further, if a winning occurs, the credit number counter is added and updated by the generated winning.

  Further, the front door opening solenoid 110 and the front door closing detector 112 are electrically connected to the LSI 117.

  When the front door closing detector 112 detects the closing of the front door 2b, the detection signal is input to the LSI 117. The LSI 117 transmits a front door opening solenoid excitation signal to the front door opening solenoid 110 to excite the front door opening solenoid 110 and unlock the front door 2b.

  The display effect control board 90 functions as a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU, control data, and the like, and a work area of the CPU. A random access memory (RAM), an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, and the like are provided.

  The display effect control board 90 is provided with a display 51, speakers 53 and 54, a chance button 58, and a jog dial 59. The display effect control board 90 includes a CPU, a RAM, and a VDP. The display effect control board 90 reads image data by inputting a data read signal to the ROM mounted on the display ROM board 92 and transmits the display data to the display 51. Control is performed to display a display screen such as a navigation effect relating to points, bets, or small roles.

  Further, the button input signal of the chance button 58 and the dial input signal of the jog dial 59 are input to the display effect control board 90, and the display effect control board 90 sends the chance button input signal and the jog dial input signal to the display 51. A display screen reflecting the operation of the jog dial 59 and the operation of the chance button 58 is displayed on the display 51.

  Next, signals transmitted and received between the card unit 3 and the slot machine 2S and between each board of the slot machine 2S will be described.

  From the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 31 of the slot machine 2S, an addition request p (score +), an addition request c (credit +), a subtraction request p (score-), and a subtraction request c (credit-) ), A game permission request, a game prohibition request, an addition request count p (score), an addition request count c (credit), a subtraction request count p (score), and a subtraction request count c (credit). Are transmitted as “commands”.

  The addition request p (score) command is transmitted to the payout control unit 31 when a score is loaned by debiting a prepaid balance or when a score is lent by operating the replay button 319. In response, the payout control unit 31 drives the pseudo ball unit 120 for addition, and adds and updates the score counter based on detection of the pseudo ball. The subtraction request p (score points) command is transmitted to the payout control unit 31 when a score is transferred and divided (score sharing process) or a wagon service is performed. Receiving it, the payout control unit 31 drives the subtraction pseudo ball unit 121 and subtracts and updates the score counter based on the detection of the pseudo ball.

  Further, the payout control unit 31 transmits the addition number p (score), which is the update number of the score, to the CU based on the driving of the pseudo ball unit 120 for addition, and based on the drive of the pseudo ball unit 121 for subtraction. The subtraction number p (score), which is the updated number of the score counter, is transmitted to the CU. The CU updates the display of the score by confirming the lending of the score, the replay of the stored medal, the transfer of the score split, and the wagon service based on the arrival of the addition number or the subtraction number.

  The addition request c (credit) command is transmitted to the payout control unit 31 together with the subtraction request p (score) command when a credit point is deducted by operating the credit button. In response to this, the payout control unit 31 drives the pseudo ball unit 120 for subtraction, and subtracts and updates the score point counter based on the detection of the pseudo ball, and adds and updates the credit number counter in exchange for it. In addition, since the update of the number of credits does not require the movement / detection of the pseudo ball, the credit may be updated before the pseudo ball is detected. Alternatively, credits may be added and updated in conjunction with the point subtraction update.

  The subtraction request c (credit) command is transmitted to the payout control unit 31 together with the addition request p (score) command when credit adjustment is performed by operating the credit adjustment button. Receiving it, the payout control unit 31 drives the adding pseudo ball unit 121 to add and update the score counter based on the detection of the pseudo ball, and in exchange for it, set the credit counter to 0. Subtract update. In addition, since the update of the number of credits does not require the movement / detection of the pseudo ball, the credit may be updated to 0 before the pseudo ball is detected. Alternatively, the credit amount may be gradually subtracted and updated in conjunction with the addition update of the points.

  Furthermore, when the payout control unit 31 updates the value of the score counter, the payout control unit 31 transmits a score addition number or a score subtraction number, which is the update number of the score counter, to the CU. Similarly, when updating the value of the credit number counter, the credit addition number or the credit subtraction number that is the update number of the credit number counter is transmitted to the CU.

  The CU updates the score or credit display based on the arrival of the score addition / subtraction number or credit addition / subtraction number, and finalizes the score update request and the credit update request (credit checkout). Let

  The game permission / prohibition request command is a command requesting the payout control unit 31 to permit the game or a command requesting prohibition of the game. The addition request number p (score) is a command for designating the number of points to be added to the score by the addition request command. The subtraction request number p (score) is a command for designating the number of points to be subtracted from the score by the subtraction request command. The addition request number c (credit) is a command for designating the credit number to be added to the credit number by the addition request command. The subtraction request count c (credit) is a command for designating the credit count to be subtracted from the credit count by the subtraction request command.

  From the payout control unit 31 of the slot machine 2S to the card unit 3, the number of points indicating the value of the point counter stored in the payout control unit 31, the number of credits indicating the value of the credit number counter, and the points are added. / Addition / subtraction number indicating a value to be updated / subtracted, credit addition / subtraction number indicating a value to be added / subtracted and updated, and external output information indicating various game states and the like are transmitted.

  The external output information includes bet number setting information (indicating the set bet number) transmitted when the bet number is set by operating the single BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6, and rotations of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Reel start information transmitted at the time of starting, internal winning status information (indicating the winning result) transmitted at the time when the internal lottery is executed by the start operation, and the time when each of the first to third stop operations is executed 1 to 3 stop operation information (indicating the type of stop reel) and result information (indicating the type of winning or winning combination) transmitted when the display result is confirmed.

  From the payout control unit 31 to the main control board 116, a health check command, a prize payout number reception command, and a BET impossible signal are transmitted. The health check command is a command for checking whether or not the main control board 116 is operating normally. The winning / dispensing number reception command is a command indicating that the addition number c (credit) transmitted from the main control board 116 has been received.

  The BET impossible signal is a signal indicating that the value of the credit counter is less than the minimum value required for setting the bet amount. When the main control board 116 receives this BET disabling signal, the main control board 116 enters a game prohibition state in which a game cannot be newly started thereafter. Specifically, the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAX BET switch 6 for setting the bet amount is invalidated.

  A connection confirmation signal is returned from the main control board 116 to the payout control unit 31. The connection confirmation signal is a signal for confirming that the main control board 116 and the payout control unit 31 are connected, and a signal of a predetermined voltage is constantly supplied from the main control board 116 to the payout control unit 31. The payout control unit 31 controls the operation on the condition that the payout control unit 31 receives the predetermined voltage signal.

  Further, the signal “addition number + (credit)” is transmitted from the main control board 116 to the payout control unit 31 when winning is detected, while “subtraction number + (( Credit) "signal is transmitted. “Addition number + (credit)” indicates the number of credits to be added according to the winning, and “Subtraction number + (credit)” indicates the number of credits to be subtracted according to the bet number setting. The payout control unit 31 adds the value of the credit number counter in accordance with the signal “addition number + (credit)” and adds “addition number c (credit)” to be transmitted to the card unit 3. Further, the payout control unit 31 subtracts the value of the credit number counter in accordance with the signal of “subtraction number + (credit)” and adds “subtraction number c (credit)” for transmission to the card unit 3. To do.

  Furthermore, various external output information indicating the bet number setting and reel starting described above is transmitted from the main control board 116 to the payout control unit 31. The payout control unit 31 transmits each external output information to the card unit 3 at the timing when the external output information is received. The external output information may be directly transmitted from the main control board 116 to the card unit 3.

  A display control command is transmitted from the payout control unit 31 to the display effect control board 90. This display device control command includes a gaming machine information command, a card unit (CU) operation command, a test command, and an effect command. The display 51 displays the current player's points, card balance, credits, medal savings, etc. based on display control commands. The gaming machine information command is a command indicating a gaming state of a slot machine such as BB or RT, and the card unit operation command is a command transmitted in response to the player operating the card unit 3. The test command is a command for testing the effect display operation of the display effect control board 90. The effect command is a command for instructing switching to various effect screens according to the gaming state.

  A command is transmitted from the payout control unit 31 to the display effect control board 90 every 300 ms. The display effect control board 90 detects a line disconnection and performs a time-over detection process (error process) when the next command is not received despite the elapse of a certain time exceeding 300 ms after the command is received. Specifically, if the next command has not been transmitted even though 300 ms has been received since the previous command was received, the error count is incremented by 1, and when the error count is counted 10 times continuously, The effect control board 90 detects the time-over, initializes the communication state, and controls the display 51 to display an error animation.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6, main data of various data stored on each of the CU side and the S platform side and its transmission / reception mode will be described.

  In the present embodiment, on the CU side, the current number of points and credits are managed by calculating the number of points and credits on the S platform. On the S side, the current number of points is calculated and stored. However, on the S side, in particular, the number of credits is only to prevent a new game from being started at the earliest possible stage when the number of credits is less than the minimum required for setting the number of bets (for example, 0). In addition, the number of points is also just a secondary one. For example, the number of points (point number counter) may not be stored and managed on the S platform side. . In the present embodiment, since the main management of the number of points and the number of credits is performed on the CU side, it is not necessary to provide a function for strictly managing the number of points and the number of credits on the S platform side. The cost of S units can be suppressed as much as possible.

  In particular, compared to the CU, the S units have a shorter replacement cycle at the game hall and are replaced early. For that reason, the running cost of the game hall where the S machines are introduced can be reduced by providing the CU side with the main management function regarding the number of points and the number of credits on the S machines side to suppress the cost on the S machines side. There is an advantage.

  FIG. 6 shows RAM storage data provided in the CU-side main control unit 323 and RAM storage data mounted in the S-side LSI 117. First, when the power is turned on in a state where the S units (slot machine 2S) and the CU (card unit 3) are electrically connected for the first time after being installed in the amusement hall, the LSI 117 on the S unit side performs main control. The main chip ID is transmitted from the board 116, the main chip ID is transmitted to the CU side, and the payout chip ID stored in the LSI 117 itself is transmitted to the CU side.

  On the CU side, the transmitted main chip ID and payout chip ID are stored. Next, connection time, that is, data of the time when the CU side and the S side are connected and communication is started is transmitted from the CU side to the S side, and the transmitted connection time is stored on the S side. .

  In this state, three pieces of information of the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time identified on the CU side are stored on the CU side and the S platform side. When the power is turned on thereafter, the three pieces of information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data are transmitted from the S side to the CU side.

  On the CU side, the transmitted data and the already stored data are collated, and it is determined whether or not the same S units as in the previous time are connected. Note that the connection time data is transmitted from the CU side to the S side when new power is turned on and communication between the CU side and the S side is started. Is stored on the S side.

  Each time an operation instruction and an operation response are transmitted between the CU side and the S platform side, the sequence number (SQN) is incremented by “1” on the CU side and the S platform side, and the sequence number is updated on the CU side. And S side. The SQN is a communication number for checking whether or not the communication is properly performed by updating the number every time data is transmitted / received between the CU and the S platform. SQN is a number updated at the end of the communication number to be updated.

  A specific aspect of SQN backup in the CU and S units in the present embodiment will be described. The CU backs up and stores the SQN transmitted to the S units in response to the operation instruction, and then receives the SQN from the S units and rewrites and stores the SQN stored in the backup with the received SQN. When the next operation instruction is transmitted, the SQN stored in the backup is updated by 1 and transmitted to the S units, and the transmitted SQN is stored in the backup. The CU repeats such processing.

  Similarly, in the S unit, the SQN received from the CU by the operation instruction is backed up and stored, and when the operation response is transmitted from the S unit to the CU next time, the SQN stored in the backup is updated by 1 and transmitted. The transmitted SQN is stored as a backup. When the next operation response is received, the SQN stored in the backup is rewritten and stored in the received SQN. Such processing is repeated for the S units.

  As shown in FIGS. 62 and 67 to 82 described later, when a communication interruption occurs during communication, the SQN is backed up and stored until the communication is reconnected. Since the operation response is always transmitted regardless of the occurrence time of the error (see FIGS. 62 and 67 to 82), the SQN stored in the backup until the communication is reconnected is always the last SQN transmitted. It has become. On the other hand, the CU side is in a state in which an operation instruction is transmitted or an operation instruction is received in accordance with the timing of communication disconnection (see FIGS. 62 and 67 to 82). The SQN stored during the backup is either the last transmitted or the last received.

  For example, an operation instruction is transmitted from the CU side to the S platform side, and the sequence number n at that time is transmitted, and the transmitted sequence number n is stored on the S platform side. When an operation response is returned from the S platform to the CU side, the stored sequence number n added by 1 (n + 1) is also transmitted. On the CU side, since the returned sequence number n + 1 is incremented by 1 from the already stored sequence number n, it is determined that data communication has been performed normally. The n + 2 sequence number is sent to the S side.

  Next, the current point-related information (point-related information being counted) is transmitted from the S platform to the CU side. This current point related information is stored by each counter in the current point related information storage area of the RAM.

  Also, the current credit related information (credit related information being counted) is transmitted from the S side to the CU side. The current credit related information is stored by each counter in the current credit related information storage area of the RAM.

  The current score-related information and the current credit-related information are collectively referred to as current score / credit-related information.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the current score / credit-related information storage area of the RAM has a score addition counter, a credit addition counter, a score subtraction counter, a credit subtraction counter, and an external output. A total of seven types of counters are provided: an information counter, a score counter, and a credit counter.

  The credit addition counter is a counter for counting the number of credits to be added. For example, when a winning occurs in the S units, an addition number signal capable of specifying the credit addition number is transmitted from the main control board 116 to the LSI 117. The LSI 117 adds and updates the credit addition number counter based on the addition number signal. Note that the credit addition number counter is not updated based on the movement / detection of the pseudo ball 121.

  The point addition counter is a counter for counting the number of points to be added. For example, when credit is settled by a credit settlement button, a point addition number counter and a credit subtraction number counter are updated.

  The credit subtraction number counter is a counter for counting the number of credits to be subtracted. For example, when a betting number setting operation is detected, a betting number setting signal is transmitted from the main control board 116 to the LSI 117. The LSI 117 adds and updates the credit subtraction number counter based on the betting number setting signal. Note that the credit subtraction number counter is not updated based on the movement / detection of the pseudo ball 121.

  The point subtraction counter is a counter for counting the number of points to be subtracted. The score subtraction number counter is a request to subtract scores from the CU (for example, a score subtraction request in response to a split split transfer, a score subtraction request in response to a wagon service request, and a score conversion into credits. When a point subtraction request corresponding to the operation for performing the operation is input, the count is counted up according to the number of points subtraction request.

  When a score addition request is input from the CU side (for example, a score addition request by insertion of a card in which a score is recorded, an addition of a score corresponding to a balance deduction operation) The request is also incremented according to the number of points requested to be added) according to an operation for changing credits to points at the end of the game.

  After transmitting the addition request p (score) or subtraction request p (score), the CU waits for the update result of the score addition counter or score subtraction counter to be transmitted from the S platform. Then, the addition request p (score) or the subtraction request p (score) is confirmed. That is, at the time when the CU transmits the addition request p (score) or the subtraction request p (score), the CU adds data such as the number of points, the total addition number, the total subtraction number, etc. stored in itself. It is not updated based on the (score) or subtraction request p (score).

  The credit addition number counter also counts as a credit addition request number when a credit addition request (for example, a point subtraction request according to an operation for converting a score to a credit) is input from the CU side. Count up accordingly. Similarly, the credit subtraction number counter also receives a credit subtraction request number when a credit subtraction request is input from the CU side (for example, a point addition request corresponding to an operation for changing credits to points at the end of the game). Will be counted up.

  After transmitting the addition request c (credit) or the subtraction request c (credit), the CU waits for the update result of the credit addition number counter or the credit subtraction number counter to be transmitted from the S side, and then adds the request c. (Credit) or subtraction request c (credit) is confirmed. In other words, when the CU transmits the addition request c (credit) or the subtraction request c (credit), the CU adds data such as the number of credits, the total addition number, and the total subtraction number stored in the CU to the addition request c (credit). Alternatively, it is not updated based on the subtraction request c (credit).

  The external output information counter is a counter for counting the number of times the game state has changed. The external output information counter includes a counter that counts the number of bets set by operating the single BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6, a counter that counts up when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R start rotating, and a start operation. A counter that counts the internal winning combination for each winning combination when the internal lottery is executed, a counter that counts the operation according to the first to third stop operations when the reel stop operation is performed, and the display result is fixed A counter that counts up at the time, a counter that counts up according to the gaming state when the gaming state changes, and a counter that counts up according to the error type when an error occurs are included.

  Note that counters that count up for each gaming state when the gaming state changes include a counter corresponding to BB, a counter corresponding to RB, a counter corresponding to RT, and the like. The LSI 117 adds and updates the corresponding external output information counter based on various types of external output information transmitted from the main control board 116.

  The score counter is a counter for storing the player's score (total score) at the current time. The LSI 117 adds and updates the score counter when adding and updating the score addition counter, and updates the score counter when adding and updating the score subtraction counter. The subtraction is updated by the addition of the counter.

  The credit number counter is a counter for storing the number of credits (total number of credits) of the player at the current time. The LSI 117 adds and updates the credit number counter by the addition amount of the credit addition number counter when adding and updating the credit addition number counter, and adds the credit number counter to the addition amount of the credit subtraction number counter when adding and updating the credit subtraction number counter. Just subtract update.

  A command requesting data transmission is transmitted from the CU to the S units at regular time intervals. The S units receive the above-mentioned seven types of counters (the point addition counter, the credit addition counter, the point subtraction counter, the credit subtraction counter, the external output information counter, the point counter, the credit number at the timing when the command is received. The value of the counter) is transmitted to the CU. Further, as shown in FIG. 6, the S units, for the five types of counters excluding the point number counter and the credit number counter among the above seven types of counters, change their counter values to “previous point points” every time data is transmitted.・ Back up to “Credit related information” storage area.

  That is, the value of the point addition counter is “addition number p (score)”, the value of the credit addition counter is “addition number c (credit)”, and the value of the point subtraction counter is “subtraction number p”. (Score points) ", the value of the credit subtraction counter is" subtraction number c (credit) ", the value of the external output information counter is" external output information ", and" previous score / credit related information "is stored respectively. Stored in the area. In addition, when storing in the storage area, the data stored before that is erased. That is, new data is overwritten and saved (rewritten) in the storage area of “previous score / credit related information”.

  After the counter value is backed up in the “Previous points / credit related information” storage area, the point addition counter, credit addition counter, point subtraction counter, credit subtraction counter, and external output information counter Initialized (cleared to 0) to prepare for the next data count.

  As a result, each data (score score) since the last data transmission to the CU is sent to the score addition counter, credit addition counter, credit subtraction counter, credit subtraction counter, and external output information counter. , Credit, external output information) change amount (untransmitted data to CU) is stored. When the data transmission request is received from the CU next time, the amount of change in data from when the data transmission request was last received until this time when the data transmission request is received is sent to the CU. Become. On the other hand, as described above, the total number of points and the total number of credits at the current stage are stored in the point number counter and the credit number counter that are not initialized every time data is transmitted. Each time a data transmission request is received from the CU, the total number of points and the total number of credits at the current stage are transmitted to the CU. That is, each time the S unit receives a command instructing transmission of the data change amount, the S unit transmits the data change amount from the previous reception of the command to the reception of the current change.

  In other words, in the storage area of the previous score / credit related information (current score / credit related information transmitted immediately before), the addition number p (the current number / credit related information transmitted to the CU side immediately before) Point), addition number c (credit), subtraction number p (point), subtraction number c (credit), and external output information data are stored as backup data. This backup data includes not only the value of each current counter but also the value of each counter of the previous time that was not transmitted at the next transmission when the current score / credit information is not transmitted from the S side to the CU side. It is intended to be able to send values as well.

  On the CU side, in the accumulated data storage area in the RAM, the total number of points added (addition total), the total credit addition number (addition total), the total point subtraction number (subtraction total), the total credit subtraction number (subtraction total) ), Accumulated external output information, the number of points, and the number of credits.

  The CU updates the total score addition number and the score number based on the value of the score addition number counter transmitted from the S side, the total credit addition number based on the value of the credit score counter, Update the number of credits. In addition, the CU updates the total score subtraction number and the score number based on the value of the score subtraction number counter transmitted from the S platform, and the total credit subtraction number based on the value of the credit subtraction number counter. And the number of credits is updated.

  Further, the CU updates the external output information cumulative number based on the value of the external output information counter transmitted from the S units. The external output information cumulative number is updated for each type of external output information counter. As a result, on the CU side, according to “number of bets”, “reel start”, “internal winning by winning combination”, “first to third stop operation”, “display result”, “game state change”, The number (number of times) is accumulated.

  In this way, the CU can manage the latest score by updating the score based on the current score / credit related information transmitted one by one from the S units. Similarly, the CU updates the total score addition number, total credit addition number, total subtraction number, total credit subtraction number, and total number of external output information according to the current score / credit related information transmitted from the S units one by one. This makes it possible to manage the latest information.

  In addition to the values of the point addition counter, the credit addition counter, the point subtraction counter, and the credit subtraction counter, the CU also counts the points of the score counter and the credit counter from the S side. The number of points and credits that have been received but are stored are updated based on the values of the above points and credit addition counter and the above points and credit subtraction counter. The count values of the sent point counter and credit counter are not used. For this reason, even if the number of points and credits sent from the S side does not match the number of points and credits managed on the CU side, the number of points on the CU side is sent from the S side. It will not be updated with the number of points and credits you have received.

  Further, the CU collates the value of the score counter transmitted from the S platform with the current score updated on the CU side, and determines whether or not they match.

  Similarly, the CU compares the value of the credit number counter transmitted from the S side with the current number of credits updated on the CU side to determine consistency.

  The CU sends a normal (normal) operation request (command) and a normal (normal) operation response (with normal operation) (provided that a match (confirmation confirmation) has been made) Continue to receive (response). On the other hand, when it is determined that they do not match, the CU performs control to shift to an error state.

  As control for shifting to the error state, for example, error notification is performed by the display 312 or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer 1 (in this case, the hall management computer). Error notification by 1) may be performed), or a predetermined notification for encouraging an artificial response by an attendant may be considered.

  Alternatively, when it is determined that they do not match, the CU generates a command for instructing the correction of the number of points and the number of credits to the number of points and the number of credits managed by the CU, and transmits the command to the S units. It is also conceivable to do so. In this case, the S units are provided with a function of correcting the number of points and credits stored in accordance with the correction instruction command. The correction instruction command may be a command specifying the number of points and credits managed on the CU side, or may be stored on the S platform side with the number of points and credits managed on the CU side. It may be a command indicating the difference between the number of points and the number of credits.

  In this way, the CU receives the values of the various counters transmitted from the S platform, and calculates and manages the current number of points and the number of credits based on the values of the points and the credit addition / subtraction counter in particular. The main management function of the number of points and credits. For this reason, it is not necessary to provide a main management function for the S units. Accordingly, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. In the present embodiment, the number of points and the number of credits are also stored on the S side for the purpose of allowing the game to be prohibited immediately when the number of credits becomes zero. However, it may be possible not to provide a score counter or a credit counter for storing the score and the credit number on the S side.

  The CU does not match the function of performing the score number coincidence determination process for determining whether or not they match by comparing the calculated current score number with the value of the score counter transmitted from the S platform. It sometimes has a function of performing control to shift to an error state (error control at mismatch).

  In addition, the CU performs a credit number coincidence determination process for determining whether or not they match by comparing the calculated current credit amount with the value of the credit number counter transmitted from the S side. And a function of performing control to shift to an error state when there is no match (error control at the time of mismatch).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of points and the number of credits are also stored on the S side, but the number of points and the number of credits are consistent with the number of points and the number of credits managed and stored on the CU side. (CU side function). Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the number of points stored on the gaming machine side does not coincide with the number of points or credits stored on the CU side due to fraud or other circumstances, it can be checked. Here, the determination function is provided on the CU side. For example, the hall management computer 1 connected to the CU stores the number of points and credits stored on the CU side and the S side. It is also possible to receive the number of possessed points and the number of credits and determine whether or not they are consistent.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the CU further includes a storage area for storing a medal and a storage area for storing a card balance of the accepted (inserted) prepaid card (game card). The main control unit 323 (see FIG. 4) of the CU stores the medal according to an input requesting use of the medal (for example, pressing input of a replay button 319 (see FIG. 4) provided on the CU). A predetermined number of stored medals is subtracted from the storage area. Further, the main control unit 323 (see FIG. 4) of the CU subtracts a predetermined value from a storage area for storing the card balance in response to an input requesting the use of the card balance (for example, pressing input of the lending button 321).

  In addition, when a player performs an operation for deducting the value from the player's own game value (for example, prepaid balance or number of medals) and using it for the game, the player has the number of points for the deduction. An addition request number p (score) for addition to the point counter is transmitted from the CU side to the S side. On the S platform side, in response to this, the pseudo ball is moved, and the score counter and score addition counter are added and updated on the condition of the detection. The value of the point addition counter after the addition update is transmitted to the CU. The CU waits for the reception of the data, confirms the addition request p (score), and updates the score display.

  On the other hand, when an operation for ordering a so-called wagon service in which a player-owned game value is deducted and exchanged for a drink or the like is executed, the number p (points of possession of the player-owned game value) ) Is transmitted from the CU side to the S platform side. On the S side, in response to this, the pseudo ball is moved, and on the condition of the detection, the score counter is subtracted and updated and the score subtraction counter is added and updated. The value of the point subtraction counter after the addition update is transmitted to the CU. The CU waits for reception of the data, confirms the subtraction request p (score), and updates the score display.

  Further, when the player performs an operation of deducting points and converting them into credits, a subtraction request number p (points) for subtracting the number of points for the deduction from the point number counter, and the deduction An addition request number c (credit) for adding the number of credits to the credit number counter is transmitted from the CU side to the S side.

  On the S side, in response to this, the pseudo ball is moved, and the score counter and the score subtraction counter are added and updated on the condition of the detection. Further, the credit number counter and the credit addition number counter are added and updated. The values of the point subtraction number counter and the credit addition counter after addition and subtraction update are transmitted to the CU. The CU waits for reception of the data, confirms the subtraction request p (score) and the addition request c (credit), and updates the score display and credit display.

  FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a portion related to addition and subtraction of the number of points and credits in the card unit 3 and the slot machine 2S. In FIG. 7, the card unit 3 is provided with a display 312 and a main control unit 323, and the slot machine 2S includes a display 51, a payout control unit 31, a pseudo ball unit 120 for addition, a pseudo ball unit 121 for subtraction, and A main control board 116 is provided.

  FIG. 8A is a cross-sectional view as seen from the front of the pseudo ball unit 120 for addition, and FIG. 8B is a cross-sectional view as seen from the side. 8A is a cross-sectional view taken along line XX in FIG. 8B, and FIG. 8B is a cross-sectional view taken along line YY in FIG. 8A. 8 (a) and 8 (b), the pseudo ball unit 120 for addition is provided with a rectangular parallelepiped hollow casing 122. A rectangular window 122a larger than the transparent window W0 (see FIG. 1) of the front door 2b is opened on the front surface of the housing 122. The outer wall 122b on the front side of the housing 122 is fixed to the inner wall of the front door 2b so that the inside of the housing 122 can be seen from the transparent window W0.

  A rotating body 123 is rotatably provided at the center in the housing 122. The rotating body 123 includes a plurality (eight in the drawing) of pseudo balls 124, a plurality (in this case, eight) arms 125, and a cylindrical support member 126. The rotating body 123 is integrally formed of plastic or metal. Further, the pseudo ball 124 is formed to have substantially the same size and shape as a game medal used in a game in a so-called pachislot.

  Normally, “ball” means a sphere, but in this specification, “pseudo ball” means something like a pachinko ball or something like a game medal. And Further, the pseudo ball 124 shown in FIG. 8 may be a pachinko ball.

  The plurality of pseudo balls 124 are circularly arranged at equal angular intervals around the rotation center line of the support member 126. A center line that vertically penetrates the center of each pseudo ball 124 is oriented in the same direction as the rotation center line of the support member 126. The end surface of each pseudo ball 124 is fixed to the outer peripheral surface of the support member 126 via the arm 125.

  A motor 127 is fixed to the central portion of the side surface of one side (left side in the figure) of the housing 122. As the motor 127, for example, a stepping motor that rotates the rotating shaft 127a by a minute predetermined angle each time the driving pulse φP is input is used. A bearing 128 is fixed to the central portion of the side surface on the other side (right side in the drawing) of the housing 123. A rotation shaft 127 a of the motor 127 passes through the holes of the housing 122 and the support member 126, and a tip end portion thereof is rotatably supported by a bearing 128.

  When the drive pulse φP is supplied to the motor 127, the rotating shaft 127a is rotationally driven, the rotating body 123 is rotationally driven, and the plurality of pseudo balls 124 circulate through the annular passage. When the supply of the drive pulse φP is stopped, the rotation of the rotating shaft 127a is immediately stopped.

  An optical sensor 130 is provided in the central hole at the upper end of the side surface of the housing 122 so as to face the passage of the pseudo ball 124. The optical sensor 130 emits light toward the path of the pseudo ball 124, detects the reflected light, and outputs a signal φS0 having a level corresponding to the intensity of the reflected light. When the pseudo ball 124 faces the optical sensor 130, the light emitted from the optical sensor 130 is reflected by the pseudo ball 124 and enters the optical sensor 130, and the signal φS0 becomes, for example, the “H” level. When the pseudo ball 124 does not face the optical sensor 130, the light emitted from the optical sensor 130 is not reflected by the pseudo ball 124, and the signal φS0 becomes, for example, the “L” level. The optical sensor 130 output signal φS0 is used to reset the position of the pseudo ball 123 to the reference position when the slot machine 2S is powered on.

  An optical sensor 131 is provided in the central hole at the lower end of the side surface of the housing 122 so as to face the passage of the pseudo ball 124. The optical sensor 131 irradiates light toward the path of the pseudo ball 124, detects the reflected light, and outputs a signal φS1 having a level corresponding to the reflected light intensity. When the pseudo ball 124 faces the optical sensor 131, the light emitted from the optical sensor 131 is reflected by the pseudo ball 124 and enters the optical sensor 131, and the signal φS1 becomes, for example, the “H” level. When the pseudo ball 124 does not face the optical sensor 131, the light emitted from the optical sensor 131 is not reflected by the pseudo ball 124, and the signal φS1 becomes, for example, the “L” level. The output signal φS1 of the optical sensor 131 is used to count the number of pseudo balls 124 that have passed through the passage. The subtraction ball unit 121 has the same configuration as the subtraction ball unit 120.

  In addition, the detection accuracy of the pseudo ball 124 may be improved by providing a mark having a light reflectance different from that of the surface of the pseudo ball 124 at the center of the surface of the pseudo ball 124 on the optical sensor 130, 131 side. A reflective film, a convex portion, a concave portion, or the like provided on the surface of the pseudo ball 124 can be used as a mark. Also, a mark is provided only on one of the plurality of pseudo balls 124, and when the power is turned on, the supply of the drive pulse φP is stopped when the mark is detected, thereby setting the position of the pseudo ball 124 to the initial position. You may reset to Further, only one of the optical sensors 130 and 131 is provided, and both the positioning of the pseudo ball 124 and the counting of the number of the pseudo balls 124 are performed using the output signal of one photo sensor when the power is turned on. May be. Further, by counting the number of the pseudo balls 124 using the plurality of optical sensors 130 and 131, the counting accuracy may be increased or an illegal act may be prevented. A magnetic sensor may be used instead of the optical sensors 130 and 131. When using a magnetic sensor, the pseudo ball 124 needs to be formed of a magnetic material. Further, the transparent windows W0 and W1 may be eliminated so that the player cannot see the pseudo ball 124.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the player deducts the balance (remaining amount), inserts a card in which the score is recorded (has a score), and replay operation for deducting the accumulated medal and adding the score (hereinafter referred to as “save”). When a credit amount adjustment operation or the like is performed, a request for adding points is transmitted from the main control unit 323 on the CU side to the payout control unit 31 on the S platform. When a credit amount adjustment operation is performed, a credit subtraction request is transmitted from the CU-side main control unit 323 to the S-unit-side payout control unit 31 at the same time.

  Further, when a player performs a wagon service request, a request to divide and transfer the points, an operation for adding the number of credits by deducting the points, etc. by the touch panel operation on the screen, the main control unit 323 on the CU side performs S A point subtraction request is transmitted to the payout control unit 31 on the table side. When an operation for adding credits by deducting points is performed, a credit addition request is sent from the CU-side main control unit 323 to the S-side payout control unit 31 at the same time. The

  On the other hand, on the slot machine 2S side, when the bet number is set, when the set bet number is decreased, when bet cancellation (to make the bet number once zero), or when a win is detected. If this happens, that fact is transmitted from the main control board 116 to the payout control unit 31. When there is a credit addition request from the main control unit 323, a winning is detected, a bet number is reduced, or a bet cancellation is performed, an addition condition for adding credit is established. When there is a credit subtraction request from the main control unit 323 and a bet amount is set, a subtraction condition for credit deduction occurs.

  The payout control unit 31 sets an addition target value according to the cause when the point addition condition (reception of the point addition request p from the CU side) is satisfied. The addition target value is the number of detection targets of the pseudo balls 124. In the present embodiment, the number of points to be updated and the target addition value correspond one-to-one.

  For example, when the balance is withdrawn by a lending operation, it is 25 points. In this case, the score is set as the addition target value.

  After setting the addition target value, the payout control unit 31 rotates the rotating body 123 of the adding pseudo ball unit 120 and increments (+1) the point addition counter every time the pseudo ball 124 is detected. When the same number of pseudo balls 124 as the value is detected, the rotation of the rotating body 123 is stopped after incrementing the point addition counter.

  Moreover, the payout control part 31 sets a subtraction target value according to the cause, when the point subtraction conditions are satisfied. For example, when the value of the service is set to 300 points by request of the wagon service, the subtraction target value is set to 300.

  The payout control unit 31 rotates the rotating body 123 of the subtractive pseudo ball unit 121 for point subtraction, and increments the point subtraction number counter every time the pseudo ball 124 is detected, and the same number of the pseudo balls 124 as the subtraction target value are obtained. When detected, the rotation of the rotating body 123 is stopped after incrementing the holding point subtraction number counter.

  In particular, among the points subtracting conditions, when a request for adding credits by deducting points is input (when a point subtraction request p and a credit addition request c are input), the payout control unit 31 Each time a pseudo ball 124 is detected by rotating the rotating body 123 of the subtraction pseudo ball unit 121, the point subtraction number counter and the credit number addition number counter are incremented to detect the same number of pseudo balls 124 as the point subtraction target value. In this case, the rotation of the rotating body 123 is stopped after incrementing the holding point subtraction number counter and the credit number addition number counter.

  The payout control unit 31 adds and updates the score counter and the credit number addition counter by the addition of the score addition counter and the credit number addition counter when adding and updating the score addition counter and the credit number addition counter. When the point subtraction number counter and the credit number subtraction counter are added and updated, the point number counter and the credit number addition counter are subtracted and updated by the addition of the point subtraction number counter and the credit number addition counter. The count values of the credit point counter and the credit counter are displayed on the S displays 51. As a result, the display of the score and the number of credits on the S display devices 51 is updated based on the detection of the same number of pseudo ball movements as the planned score update number.

  In addition, the count values of the addition counter and the subtraction counter for the S points and credits are transmitted to the main control unit 323 of the CU at regular time intervals. The main control unit 323 updates and stores the total number of points and the number of credits at the current stage based on the transmitted count value, and the total number of points and the number of credits are updated and displayed on the display unit 312 of the CU. The As a result, the score display on the CU-side display 312 is also updated based on the detection of the same number of pseudo ball movements as the number of scheduled score updates.

  Next, the addition and subtraction operations of the payout control unit 31 will be described in more detail. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the operation of the payout control unit 31 when the power of the slot machine 2S is turned on. The payout control unit 31 waits until the power is turned on in step S1, and when the power is turned on, the drive pulse φP is supplied to the motor φP of the adding pseudo ball unit 120 in a predetermined cycle in step S2, and the pseudo ball 124 is moved.

  Next, in step S3, the payout control unit 31 detects whether or not the pseudo ball 123 is detected based on the signal φS0 from the optical sensor 130. If not detected, the process returns to step S2 to output the drive pulse φP. , And the pseudo ball 124 is moved. If the pseudo ball 124 is detected in step S3, the output of the drive pulse φP is stopped in step S4, and the pseudo ball 124 is stopped at the reference position. For example, when the signal φS0 of the optical sensor 130 is raised from the “L” level to the “H” level, and then the signal φS0 is lowered from the “H” level to the “L” level. Then, it is determined that the pseudo ball 124 is detected, and the pseudo ball 124 is stopped. Therefore, even if the pseudo ball 124 moves to an arbitrary position during the period when the power is off, the position of the pseudo ball 124 can be reset to the reference position, and the pseudo ball 124 passing through the front of the optical sensor 131 can be reset. The number can be counted accurately.

  FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the addition process of the payout control unit 31. In FIG. 10, the payout control unit 31 stands by until the point addition condition is satisfied in step S10. When the point addition condition is satisfied, the addition target value is set in step S11 and the pseudo ball unit for addition is set. A driving pattern for rotating the rotating body 123 (see FIG. 8) in 120 is set.

  Note that the points are added when the card with the score recorded is inserted into the CU, when the balance debiting operation is detected by the CU, or when the operation of replaying the medal is detected by the CU. This is established when an operation for converting credits into points (credit settlement operation) is detected.

  Whether or not the score addition condition of S10 is satisfied is detected based on the addition request p (score) transmitted from the main control unit. The payout control unit 17 specifies the number of points to be added based on the addition request p (score).

  The driving pattern varies depending on the addition condition. The payout control unit 31 stores drive pattern data for each addition condition. For example, when a conversion operation from a holding point to the number of credits is performed, the rotating body 123 is rotated at a constant speed until a predetermined number of unit (for example, five) pseudo ball movement is detected, and then temporarily stopped. Then, drive pattern data is selected that repeats rotating the rotating body 123 until a predetermined number of pseudo balls move again after a predetermined period until the target value of addition is reached.

  Next, the payout control unit 31 supplies the driving pulse φP to the adding pseudo ball unit 120 at a predetermined period based on the set driving pattern, and rotates the rotating body 123. In step S <b> 13, the payout control unit 31 determines whether the pseudo ball 124 is detected based on the output signal φS <b> 1 of the optical sensor 131. If the pseudo ball 124 is not detected in step S13, the process returns to step S12. If the pseudo ball 124 is detected, it is determined in step S14 whether or not the second or subsequent detection is made.

  If it is determined in step S14 that the detection is for the second time or later, it is determined in step S15 whether the time from the previous detection to the current detection is within a specified range. If it is determined in step S15 that the time from the previous detection to the current detection is not within the specified range, there is a possibility that the adding pseudo ball unit 120 has failed or an illegal act has been performed. Perform processing. As error processing, game stop, display of occurrence of abnormality, notification of occurrence of abnormality, etc. are performed.

  If it is determined in step S15 that the time from the previous detection to the current detection is within the specified range, the score addition counter and score counter are incremented (+1) in step S17.

  Next, in step S171, it is determined whether or not the point addition condition determined to be established in S10 is credit settlement. If it is not credit settlement, the process proceeds to step S18. In the case of credit settlement, in order to subtract the credit in conjunction with the addition of the points, in step S172, the credit subtraction number counter is incremented (+1) and the credit number counter is decremented (−1).

  If it is determined in step S14 that the detection is not the second time or later, since it is the first detection, step S15 is not executed and the score addition number counter and score score counter are incremented in step S17 (+1).

  In step S18, it is determined whether or not the addition target value has been detected, that is, whether or not the count value of the addition counter has reached the addition target value. If the addition target value has not been detected, the process returns to step S12. When the addition target value is detected, the output of the drive pulse φP is stopped in step S19, and the rotation of the rotating body 123 of the adding pseudo ball unit 120 is stopped.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the subtraction process of the payout control unit 31. In FIG. 13, the payout control unit 31 waits until the subtraction condition is satisfied in step S <b> 20. When the subtraction condition is satisfied, the subtraction target value is set in step S <b> 21 and the rotating body 123 in the subtraction pseudo ball unit 121. A driving pattern for rotationally driving (see FIG. 8) is set.

  The score subtraction condition is that when a request for a wagon service is detected by the CU, when an operation for debiting the score and converting it to credit is detected by the CU, a request for dividing and transferring the score is detected by the CU. This is true if

  The subtraction target value is set based on the content of the subtraction request (wagon service, split point transfer, conversion operation to credit by deduction of points), and the set number of bets.

  The driving pattern differs depending on the subtraction conditions (wagon service, transfer of split points, conversion operation to credits by dropping points). The payout control unit 31 stores drive pattern data for each subtraction condition.

  Next, the payout control unit 31 supplies the driving pulse φP to the subtraction pseudo ball unit 120 at a predetermined period based on the set driving pattern, and rotates the rotating body 123. In step S23, the payout control unit 31 determines whether or not the pseudo ball 124 is detected based on the output signal φS1 of the optical sensor 131. If the pseudo ball 124 is not detected in step S23, the process returns to step S22. If the pseudo ball 124 is detected, it is determined in step S24 whether or not the second or subsequent detection is made.

  If it is determined in step S24 that the detection is for the second time or later, it is determined in step S25 whether the time from the previous detection to the current detection is within a specified range. If it is determined in step S25 that the time from the previous detection to the current detection is not within the specified range, there is a possibility that the subtraction pseudo ball unit 120 has failed or an illegal act has been performed. Perform processing. As error processing, game stop, display of occurrence of abnormality, notification of occurrence of abnormality, etc. are performed.

  If it is determined in step S25 that the time from the previous detection to the current detection is within the specified range, in step S27A, the establishment of the point subtraction condition is a conversion operation to credit by deducting the point. In step S27B, the point subtraction number counter, the credit number counter, and the credit number addition number counter are respectively incremented (+1) and the score number counter is decremented (−1). On the other hand, if the establishment of the score subtraction condition is not a conversion operation to credit by deduction of the score, the score subtraction counter is incremented (+1) and the score counter is decremented (-) in step S27C. 1) Do it.

  If it is determined in step S24 that it is not the second or later detection, since it is the first detection, step S25 is not executed, and in step S27A described above, the satisfaction of the score subtraction condition is a credit due to the deduction of the score. It is determined whether the operation is a conversion operation.

  In step S28, it is determined whether or not the subtraction target value has been detected, that is, whether or not the count value of the holding point subtraction number counter has reached the subtraction target value. If the subtraction target value has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S22. If the subtraction target value is detected, the output of the drive pulse φP is stopped in step S29, and the rotation of the rotating body 123 of the subtraction pseudo ball unit 120 is stopped.

  The values of the score addition counter, the score subtraction counter, the credit count addition counter, and the credit count subtraction counter updated in the processing shown in FIGS. Sent to. In response to this, the CU updates the number of points and the number of credits and updates the point display and the number of credits. On the other hand, the S units update the score display and the credit number counter based on the score number counter and the credit number counter updated in the processes shown in FIGS. 10 and 11.

  The payout control unit 31 uses the count values of the point addition counter, the point subtraction counter, the credit addition counter, the credit subtraction counter, the credit counter, and the credit counter at 200 ms intervals as operation response data. To the main control unit 323 (see FIG. 30). The value of each counter changes depending on the movement / detection of the pseudo ball 124. For example, when the pseudo ball 124 is rotationally driven by the pseudo ball unit 120, 121, the timing of transmitting the operation response data is reached. When this happens, the value of each counter at that time is transmitted, and at the time of transmission, the values of the point addition counter, the point subtraction counter, the credit addition counter, and the credit subtraction counter are cleared to 0 (held The value of the point counter is not cleared to 0).

  Next, a specific example of the drive pattern in the pseudo ball unit will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13.

  12A is a time chart showing the waveform of the output signal φS1 of the optical sensor 131 of the subtraction pseudo ball unit 121 during the holding point deduction operation, and FIG. 12B shows the signal φS1 when the wagon service is requested. It is a time chart which shows the waveform. In FIG. 12A, when the player performs a point deduction operation, a driving pulse φP is supplied from the payout control unit 31 to the pseudo ball unit 121 for subtraction, and the rotating body 123 is rotated. When the tip of the pseudo ball 124 reaches the front of the optical sensor 131, the signal φS1 is raised from the “L” level to the “H” level, and when the rear end of the pseudo ball 124 passes the front of the optical sensor 131, the signal φS1 is “ It is lowered from the “H” level to the “L” level. The payout control unit 31 determines that one pseudo ball 124 has passed when the rising edge and the falling edge of the signal φS1 are detected.

  The driving pattern corresponding to the holding point dropping operation is that the rotating body 123 is rotated at a constant speed until a predetermined unit number M (for example, 5) of pseudo ball movement is detected, and then temporarily stopped, and a predetermined period T1 is set. Then, the driving pattern is such that the rotation of the rotating body 123 until the predetermined number M of pseudo balls move again is repeated until the number of holding points is reached.

  Referring to FIG. 12A, the payout control unit 31 circulates and moves the pseudo ball 124 at a predetermined speed in accordance with the subtraction request, counts the number of positive pulses appearing in the output signal φS1 of the optical sensor 131, and outputs the positive pulse. When the count number reaches M, the circulating movement of the pseudo ball 124 is temporarily stopped and waits for a predetermined time T1. Thereafter, the operation of circulating the pseudo ball 124 is repeated until the number of counts reaches M again. In the present embodiment, since the number of credits given by one point deduction operation is 25, the above operation is repeated a total of five times.

  FIG. 12B shows a driving pattern when a request for a wagon service is detected. The payout control unit 31 sets the subtraction target value to N (where N is a positive integer) according to the type of wagon service.

  Thereafter, the payout control unit 31 circulates and moves the pseudo ball 124 at a rotational speed different from that of the holding point withdrawal operation of FIG. 12A, and counts the number of positive pulses appearing in the output signal φS1 of the optical sensor 131, When the count number of positive pulses reaches N, the circular movement of the pseudo ball 124 is stopped. As shown in FIGS. 12 (a) and 12 (b), the rotational speed of the rotating body 123 at the time of the holding point withdrawal operation is made faster than that at the time of the request for the wagon service, and the pseudo ball movement process at the time of the point withdrawal operation is performed. We are trying to finish it promptly. In this case, the pulse width of the positive pulse of the output signal φS1 of the optical sensor 131 during the holding point dropping operation is smaller than that when the wagon service is requested. When the cycle of the drive pulse φP is shortened, the rotation speed of the rotator 123 is increased, and when the cycle of the drive pulse φP is increased, the rotation speed of the rotator 123 is decreased. Further, when one positive pulse is detected, a predetermined score of 2 or more may be subtracted.

  As described above, the movement mode of the pseudo ball 124 is visually recognized by changing the movement mode of the pseudo ball 124 when subtracting the score depending on whether the operation is based on the point deduction operation or the generation of a wagon service request. It is possible to specify the factor whose score has been updated only by doing. Here, as a comparative example of the subtraction conditions, the case based on the point deduction operation and the case based on the generation of the request for the wagon service are illustrated, but the movement mode of the pseudo ball 124 is different for each of the other subtraction conditions. It is desirable to control such that

  Further, it is desirable to perform control so that the movement mode of the pseudo ball 124 in the adding pseudo ball unit 120 is different for each addition condition. Thereby, for example, only by looking at the movement of the pseudo ball 124 in the pseudo ball unit 120 for addition, whether the score is added based on the medal replay, or the score based on the balance withdrawal setting It can be specified whether it is added.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13, a description will be given of desirable control in a case where another holding point update condition is satisfied while the holding point update condition is satisfied and the pseudo ball 124 is being moved.

  For example, when the hand-drawing operation is performed while moving the pseudo ball 124 based on the request for the wagon service, as shown in FIG. 13A, the N points based on the request for the wagon service. Continue the subtraction process. When all the movements of the pseudo balls 124 based on the request for the wagon service are completed, after waiting for a predetermined time T2, the subtraction process based on the point deduction operation is performed by the method shown in FIG. That is, the process based on the wagon service request is prioritized over the process based on the point withdrawal operation. This priority order may be reversed. In other words, if the movement of the pseudo ball based on the wagon service request is not completed at the time when the holding point deduction operation is detected, the pseudo ball based on the wagon service request is performed after the subtraction process based on the ball lending operation. The movement of 124 may be continued.

  If the wagon service is requested while the points are being deducted, as shown in FIG. 13B, the subtraction process based on the deducting operation of the points is immediately interrupted, and after waiting for a predetermined time T2, Addition processing of N points based on the request is performed. That is, when the subtraction process of N points is completed for the point deduction operation, the suspended point deduction process is resumed after waiting for a predetermined time T2. Thereby, the process based on the request of the wagon service is prioritized over the process based on the operation of deducting the points. FIG. 13B shows a state in which Mm points are subtracted during the initial holding point deduction operation and m points are subtracted during the holding point deduction operation after restart. However, m is a positive integer smaller than M.

  In any case, in the present embodiment, when both of the two subtraction conditions are satisfied, the processing based on the satisfaction of one subtraction condition is executed or the processing based on the satisfaction of the other subtraction condition is performed. There is one feature in that it is possible to distinguish between the two. That is, in the example of FIGS. 13A and 13B, when switching between the pseudo ball movement based on the holding point deduction operation and the pseudo ball movement based on the request of the wagon service, by providing the pause period T2, It is possible to distinguish the pseudo ball movement based on the establishment of another subtraction condition.

In addition, here, as a comparative example of the subtraction condition, the case based on the point deduction operation and the case based on the request of the wagon service are illustrated, but the other subtraction conditions are similarly based on the establishment of one condition. It is desirable to provide a pause period between the end of the pseudo ball movement and the start of the pseudo ball movement based on the establishment of the other condition. In addition, it is desirable to control not only the subtraction condition but also the addition condition such as the stored medal replay setting.
<When a pseudo ball unit is provided on both the CU and S units>
FIG. 14 shows an example in which the pseudo ball units 120 and 121 are provided on both the CU and the S units. In this configuration, when a factor for updating the score is generated on the CU side, the pseudo ball 124 is moved by the pseudo ball unit on the CU side, while the factor for updating the score is on the S platform side. If this occurs, it is conceivable that the pseudo ball 124 is moved by the S-side pseudo ball unit.

  In that case, as compared with the case where the pseudo ball unit is provided only on the S side as shown in FIG. 7, the CU side at the time of the balance withdrawal, the replay of the stored medal, the insertion of the card in which the score is recorded, and the credit settlement The pseudo ball unit 120 for addition is operated, and the pseudo ball unit 121 for subtraction on the CU side is operated at the time of the wagon service, the splitting of assigned points, and the withdrawal of the points. Then, in these cases, the CU side can update the point display according to the detection of the pseudo ball on the local side without waiting for the operation response indicating the point update from the S units. Communication control for can be simplified. On the other hand, for the S units, when the balance is deducted, the replay of the medal and the insertion of the card in which the score is recorded, the credit settlement, the wagon service, the transfer of the split of the score, the deduction of the score, The point display is updated after receiving the addition request p (score) and the subtraction request p (score) transmitted from the CU side based on the ball detection.

In the case of FIG. 14, when a score update factor occurs on the CU side, the score is updated on the condition that the pseudo ball 124 is detected by the pseudo ball unit on the CU side, When a factor for updating the score is generated, the score is updated on the condition that the pseudo ball 124 is detected by the S-side pseudo ball unit. Is performed based on the detection of the pseudo ball.
<When a pseudo ball unit is installed only in the CU>
Alternatively, the pseudo ball unit 120 for addition and the pseudo ball unit 121 for subtraction may be provided only on the CU side and not on the S platform side. In such a configuration, the CU has a score update factor on the CU side, that is, a lending operation for debiting the balance of the card, a replay operation for saving medals, a card insertion in which a score is recorded, When an operation requesting a wagon service, a point deduction operation, or a credit checkout operation occurs, the pseudo ball unit 120 for addition or the pseudo ball unit 121 for subtraction is operated according to the type of addition or subtraction. Subsequently, the CU updates the score display on the display 312 by updating the memory of the score according to the detection / movement of the pseudo ball 124. Further, an operation instruction command for an addition request p (score) or a subtraction request p (score) is transmitted to S units.

  The S units that have received the operation instruction command add and update the score counter in response to the addition request p (score), and subtract and update the score counter in response to the subtraction request p (score). In addition, the score display on the display 51 is updated according to the value of the updated score counter. However, the point addition number counter and the point subtraction number counter are not updated. This is because, on the CU side, when the addition request p (score) and the subtraction request p (score) are transmitted, the score is already updated accordingly.

  On the other hand, the S units add and update the point addition counter or the point subtraction counter according to the type of addition or subtraction when a score update factor is generated on the S side. However, at this time, the score counter relating to the score display is not updated. Subsequently, the S units transmit an operation response (addition number, subtraction number) including the value of the addition / updated point addition number counter or point subtraction number counter to the CU.

  In response to this operation response, the CU receives the addition pseudoball unit 120 when the number of points added is included, and the subtraction ball unit 121 for subtraction when the number of points subtraction is included. Are operated, and the memory of the number of points is added or subtracted according to the movement / detection of the pseudo ball 124, and the update result is reflected on the display 312. Further, the CU sets an addition request p (point) or a subtraction request p (point) according to the movement / detection of the pseudo ball 124, and adds the request p (point) or subtraction request p (point) with an operation instruction command. Point) to S units. In response to this, the S units finally update the score counter and reflect the update result on the display 51.

  By controlling as described above, even if a pseudo ball unit is provided only on the CU side, both the CU and S units can update the display of the score on the condition that the pseudo ball is moved and detected. Is possible.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a control mode in which game history data is stored on each of the CU side and the S platform side. Note that the game history data is data indicating a game state history generated by a player playing a game with the S-unit 2S. For example, the number of start times (reel start times, that is, the number of games), The number of occurrences of a big bonus, the number of occurrences of RT, the number of starts from the previous big bonus to the current big bonus, the base value, and the like. The game history data includes game history data throughout the day on the S units and game history data aggregated for each player on the S units. As will be described in detail later, the former game history data is stored in the S game history data storage unit provided on both the S and CU sides, and the latter game history data is stored on the S and CU sides. Are stored in the current player game history data storage unit provided in both or the backup storage unit provided only on the S platform side. In other words, the game history data for the entire day at the S units and the game history data aggregated for each player at the S units are stored in both the CU3 and the S unit 2S.

  Referring to FIG. 15, various game data such as a big bonus is generated by a player playing a game with S units 2S, and the game data is input to game history data management unit 291. The normal game data generated as a result of the player playing the game on the S units is totaled, for example, by the normal mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 291 provided in the payout control unit 31, and the totaled game history Data is input to the display effect control unit 292 provided on the display effect control board 90, and the game history data is accumulated and stored in the S game history data storage unit. This S game history data storage unit can store game history data for 10 days including today's game history data. When the player operates the jog dial 59 and the chance button 58 to select the game history data on the day to be displayed, the game history data on the selected day is displayed on the display 51. The communication between the display effect control unit 292 and the game history data management unit 291 is a one-way communication from the game history data management unit 291 to the display effect control unit 292.

  On the other hand, the above-described game data input to the game history data management unit 291 is also transmitted to the game history data management unit 391 provided in the main control unit 323, for example, via the CU communication control unit 80 of the CU3. The game data is aggregated by the normal mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391. The accumulated game history data is stored in the S game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. This S machine game history data storage unit on the CU3 side is configured to store only the game history data of the day. If the player touches the display 312 configured with a touch panel to display the S game history data, the operation signal is input to the game history data management unit 391, and the game history data is displayed. Under the control of the management unit 391, the game history data of the current day stored in the current S game history data storage unit is displayed on the display 312.

  On the other hand, the CU 3 is configured such that the game history data of the other S units 2S installed in the game hall can be displayed on the display 312. Specifically, when the player touches the operation button icon of the other S unit information display displayed on the display 312, the operation signal is input to the game history data management unit 391, and the other S unit information is displayed. The other S game history data request notification is transmitted from the game history data management unit 391 to the hall management computer 1 by the operation of the processing unit. The hall management computer 1 receives the game history data of the other S units 2S via the other CU 3, and returns the received other S unit game history data to the game history data management unit 391. The game history data management unit 391 processes the returned other S game history data by the other S information processing unit, and processes the processed other S game history data to the other S game of the data storage unit 392. Store in the history data storage unit. The stored other S game history data is displayed on the display 312.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to aggregate game history data for each player who has played a game on the S platform 2S and display the game history data for each player on the display devices 51 and 312. In order to tabulate the game history data for each player, it is necessary to distinguish the players who are playing the game on the S units 2S. C-ID (card ID) stored in a member card possessed by a player who is a member is used as player identification information for distinguishing the player. The C-ID is an ID that is stored in a card and identifies the cards. The member card is issued to a player who becomes a member in the game hall, and the member and the member card have a one-to-one correspondence. Therefore, the C-ID stored in the member card can identify not only the member card but also a member player. Therefore, the C-ID stored in the member card functions as player identification information for identifying the player.

  As will be described in detail later, when a player who is a member inserts a member card into the CU 3, the C-ID stored in the inserted member card is read, and the C-ID is stored in the data storage unit 392. It is stored in the player game history data storage unit. On the other hand, the read C-ID is transmitted from the CU 3 to the S unit 2S, and the S unit 2S transmits the received C-ID from the game history data management unit 291 to the display effect control unit 292 to display the display effect. The current player game history data storage unit of the control unit 292 is stored.

  In this state, when the player plays a game with the S-unit 2S, the game history data from when the C-ID is stored in the current player game history data storage unit is the current player of the display effect control unit 292. Cumulatively stored in the game history data storage unit. When the player operates the jog dial 59 and the chance button 58 to display his / her own game history data, the game history a stored in the current player game history data storage unit is displayed on the display. 51. In addition, the game history data management unit 391 also counts the game history data by the normal mode processing unit based on the game data transmitted from the S units 2S, and stores the C in the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. -The game history data accumulated by the normal mode processing unit from the stage where A is stored as an ID is accumulated and stored in the current player game history data storage unit. When the player touches the display 312 including a touch panel and performs an operation for displaying his / her game history data, the operation detection signal is input to the game history data management unit 391 and the game history data management unit 391. Controls the display 312 to display the game history a stored in the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392.

  As described above, the game history data throughout the day at the S unit and the game history data aggregated for each player at the S unit are displayed on both the S side and the CU side by the display switching operation. One game history data and the other game history data are switched and displayed.

  When the player playing a game with the S platform 2S presses the return button 322 to return the member card inserted, the member card is discharged from the CU3. Then, the game history data management unit 391 deletes the C-ID and game history data stored in the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. As a result, even if the display 312 is operated to display the game history a stored in the current player game history data storage unit, the game history a is not displayed on the display 312.

  On the other hand, when the membership card is discharged from CU3, a card return notification is transmitted from the CU to the S unit 2S, and the game history data management unit 291 that has received the card return notification returns the card to the display effect control unit 292. Send a notification. In response to this, the display effect control unit 292 stores A as the C-ID stored in the current player game history data storage unit and the game history data a in the backup data storage unit, so that the current player game The C-ID and game history data in the history data storage unit are deleted. As a result, even if an operation for displaying the game history data a on the display device 51 is performed, the game history data a is not displayed on the display device 51.

  The return button 322 is normally operated to end the game by the S unit 2S. However, the player temporarily stops the game, returns to the S unit 2S where the game was played again, and played the game again. May resume. In such a case, usually after performing a game interruption operation described later, the card is ejected, the card is brought to the player, the player completes the small use, and returns to the same S unit 2S again to return the card to the CU3. Although it is inserted, the player may press the return button 322 to remove the card without performing such a game interruption operation, and may leave the S table 2S.

  In such a case, if the same player who has left the other player without playing a game at the S unit 2S returns to the S unit 2S and inserts the membership card into the CU 3 again, he leaves the seat. It is desirable to take over the previous game history data of the player and add and update the game history data after the game has been resumed to the game history data for cumulative storage. In order to realize this, the C-ID and game history data are backed up and stored in the backup data storage unit provided in the display effect control unit 292 described above. When the player who has returned to the S unit 2S inserts the member card into the CU 3, the card information of the member card is read and the inserted card information including the C-ID of the member card is transferred from the CU 3 to the S unit 2S. Sent. In the S unit 2S, the game history data management unit 291 receives the C-ID included in the inserted card information, and transmits the received C-ID to the display effect control unit 292. The display effect control unit 292 compares the transmitted C-ID with the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit and determines whether or not they match. If they match, it is determined that the same player as the player who has left the seat has resumed the game, and A as the C-ID and a as the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit are stored in the current game. It returns to the player game history data storage unit and stores it in the current player game history data storage unit. Then, the stored data in the backup data storage unit is deleted. Game history data generated after the player played the game with the S unit 2S in a state where the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit is stored in the current player game history data storage unit and taken over. Is added and updated to the game history data a stored in the current player game history data storage unit and accumulated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the comparison result between the C-ID included in the inserted card information transmitted from the CU 3 and the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit does not match, the backup data A as C-ID and a as game history data stored in the storage unit are deleted.

  As a modification, the following control may be performed after the communication between the game history data management unit 291 and the display effect control unit 292 is bidirectional communication.

  A comparison result between the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit by the display effect control unit 292 and the C-ID transmitted from the CU 3, and a determination result as to whether or not they match is the display effect control unit. 292, and transmitted to the game history data management unit 391 of CU3 via the game history data management unit 291. In the game history data management unit 391, if the transmitted C-ID determination result matches, the game history data management unit 391 uses the C-ID determined to match as the current player game history of the data storage unit 392. Store in the data storage unit. In the case of the determination result that the C-ID determination results match, the game history data a is included in the C-ID determination result. The game history data management unit 391 that has received the game history data a stores the game history data a in the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. Thereafter, if the player plays a game with the S unit 2S, the game data is transmitted to the game history data management unit 391, and is aggregated by the normal mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391. Is added and updated to the game history data a stored in the current player game history data storage unit and accumulated. In this state, if the player performs an operation of touching the display 312 to display his / her own game history data, the game history data stored in the current player game history data storage unit is displayed as described above. Displayed by the instrument 312.

  Note that the backup data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292 may be controlled so as to erase the backup data stored when a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has elapsed.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, a test hit mode (test mode) processing function is provided. The trial hit mode is a mode in which a shipping inspection at the time of manufacture of a gaming machine by a gaming machine manufacturer, an operation check at the time of installing a gaming machine at a gaming hall, and the like. When a game attendant inserts a test card for test hit mode into the CU 3, the card information of the test card is read and the test hit mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391 performs processing for shifting to the test hit mode. . Specifically, the test hit mode notification is transmitted to the S unit 2S, and the game history data management unit 291 that has received the test hit mode notification transmits the test hit mode notification to the display effect control unit 292 by the operation of the test hit mode processing unit. . In response to this, the display effect control unit 292 stores game history data based on game data generated thereafter in the trial hit game history data storage unit. The trial hit game history data storage unit is configured by a storage area different from the S game history data storage unit, the current player game history data storage unit, and the backup data storage unit described above. The game history data in the trial hit mode is stored in the part.

  Then, the game history data stored in the trial hit game history data storage unit is displayed on the display 51.

  Also in CU3, the game history data based on the game data transmitted from the S unit 2S is totalized by the operation of the trial hit mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391, and the totaled game history data is in the trial hit mode. Is displayed on the display 312 as game history data.

  In the display 312, operation button icons such as a recounting button are also displayed. When the game history data in the trial hit mode displayed in the total display is viewed, the game history data in the trial hit mode is to be displayed again. Touch the recount button icon. Then, the operation detection signal is input to the game history data management unit 391, and a recounting notice is transmitted from the game history data management unit 391 to the game history data management unit 291 of the S units 2S. Receiving it, the game history data management unit 291 transmits a recount command to the display effect control unit 292. In response to this, the display effect control unit 292 once erases the game history data stored in the test hit game history data storage unit, and then replays game data based on the game data generated thereafter, and stores the test hit game history data. Control to be stored in the unit is performed. Then, the game data of the trial hit game history data storage unit that has been re-calculated is displayed on the display 51. On the other hand, also on the CU3 side, the test hit mode processing unit has a game history based on the game data transmitted from the S unit 2S after the detection signal of the touch operation of the recount button icon is input to the game history data management unit 391. The test hit mode game history data that has been aggregated and recalculated is displayed on the display 312.

  The S units send a re-aggregation command to the game history data management unit 391 based on the reception of the radio signal (re-aggregation command signal) output from the remote controller, and the game history data management unit 391 notifies the re-aggregation notification. May be transmitted to the game history data management unit 291 of the S unit 2S. Alternatively, a recount command may be sent to the game history data management unit 391 based on the detection of the opening of the S front doors. In the case of such modification, the recount button icon may be displayed together, and the recount button icon may be omitted.

  Then, when the return button 322 is pressed and the test card accepted by the CU 3 is discharged, a card return notice is transmitted from the game history data management unit 391 to the S unit 2S, and the card return notice is received. The game history data management unit 291 transmits a card return notification to the display effect control unit 292, and the display effect control unit 292 that receives the card return notification erases the game history data stored in the trial hit game history data storage unit.

  When there are no more points in the trial hit mode, a point addition instruction is sent from the CU side to the S units to add the points, thereby enabling a game. When there are no more points in the test hit mode, the game may be made possible by automatically adding points on the S side without sending a point addition command from the CU side to the S units. Furthermore, instead of automatically adding points on the S side, it is allowed to continue to set the number of bets even if the points become 0, so that the game can be continued. May be.

  Similarly, in the case of P units, which will be described later, when the number of game balls is exhausted during the test hit mode, a game ball number addition command is sent from the CU side to the P units to allow the game to be added.

  A RAM clear switch 293 is provided in the S base 2S. The RAM clear switch 293 is used to clear the stored data of the RAM by outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control board 116 and the payout control unit 31 when the switch is operated. If the RAM clear output signal is input to the game history data management unit 291, the RAM clear signal is input to the display effect control unit 292, and the data stored in the backup data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292 is stored. In addition to being erased, the oldest stored data of the 10 days of stored data in this S game history data storage unit will be erased, and the remaining 9 days of stored data will be shifted one by one to the old day storage area Remembered. As a result, the newest storage area (current day storage area) becomes an empty area. Today's game history data is stored in this empty area (current day storage area). In response to the output of the RAM clear signal, the game history data of the newest day (game history data before shifting to the old day) in the S game history data storage unit is displayed on the display effect control unit 292, the game history. The data may be transmitted to the hall management computer 1 via the data management unit 291 and the game history data management unit 391 so that the data is backed up and stored in the hall management computer 1.

  In addition, the game history data management unit 291 that has received the RAM clear signal from the RAM clear processing unit 293 transmits a clear notification to the CU 3, and the game history data management unit 391 that has received the clear notification receives the S of the data storage unit 392. Control is performed to erase the game history data stored in the table game history data storage unit. As a result, the display of the current P game history data on the display 312 is erased (cleared).

  Note that while the card is held in the CU3, even if a RAM clear signal is output based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 293, the game history data is not cleared.

  The S units may output a RAM clear signal to the main control board 116 or the payout control unit 31 based on reception of a radio signal (RAM clear command signal) output from the remote controller. Alternatively, a clear switch is provided on the CU side so that when the CU detects the operation of this clear switch, a RAM clear signal is transmitted from the CU to the S units. The RAM clear signal may be output to the main control board 116 or the payout control unit 31 based on the reception. In these cases, the RAM clear switch 293 may or may not be provided.

  FIG. 16 is a diagram showing the control circuit of the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 and the contents of the stored authentication information. Referring to FIG. 16, the main control unit 323 functions as a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 805 as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 804 storing a control program and data, and a work area for the CPU 805. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 806, an I / O port 807, and an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable PROM) 808 are provided.

  On the other hand, the CU communication control unit 80 is also provided with a CPU 810 as a control center, a ROM 809 that stores control programs and data, a RAM 811 that functions as a work area for the CPU 810, an I / O port 812, and an EEPROM 813. .

  The main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 communicate with each other through the I / O ports 807 and 812. Although not shown in FIG. 16, the I / O port 807 is also communicably connected to the I / O port of the upper server 801. The I / O port 812 is also communicably connected to the I / O port of the S unit communication control unit 81.

  In the chip manufacturing stage of the ROM 809 of the CU communication control unit 80, the SID (unique ID) of the CU communication control unit is stored. The SID of this CU communication control unit is also referred to as an IC serial ID. There are two types of mutual authentication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80: authentication using this SID and authentication using an authentication key (common key) described later. As will be described in detail later, the authentication using the SID is performed by storing each other's own SID and the other party's SID and determining whether or not the other party stores the correct SID by a challenge response method described later. Is. As described later, this SID authentication includes BB serial ID authentication and CU communication control unit serial ID authentication, which are collectively referred to as serial ID authentication. As will be described later, authentication using an authentication key stores authentication keys composed of a common key and authenticates whether or not the stored authentication keys match each other. This is called authentication.

  As described above, the ROM 809 of the CU communication control unit 80 stores the SID of the CU communication control unit at the chip manufacturing stage. Therefore, the main control unit 323 also needs to store both its own SID and the other party, that is, the CU communication control unit SID stored in the CU communication control unit 80.

  In the manufacturing stage of CU3, the SID and authentication key (common key) of the main control unit are written in the EEPROM 813 by the ROM writer or the like, and the SID of the main control unit is written in the EEPROM 808. The SID of this main control unit is also referred to as a BB serial ID.

  In the case of mutual authentication by SID, it is necessary to store the SID of the other party and one's own, and also in the case of mutual authentication using an authentication key consisting of a common key, It is necessary to keep. However, at the stage where the CU is manufactured, the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit are not stored in the main control unit 323. The SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit are transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323 of the card unit 3 and stored in the EEPROM 808.

  FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a notification process when an abnormality is detected as a result of mutual authentication.

  Referring to FIG. 17, when an abnormality occurs in main control unit 323, CU communication control unit 80, S-unit communication control unit 81, payout control unit 31, or main control board 116, this is indicated by an arrow in FIG. 17. Notification is made. The abnormality mentioned here may be that the main control unit 323, the CU communication control unit 80, the S-unit communication control unit 81, the payout control unit 31, or the main control board 116 is replaced with other illegally manufactured ones, noise, etc. This includes a case where a malfunction occurs or a failure occurs due to the above, or an offline state due to disconnection or the like. A key management server 800 shown in FIG. 17 is a key management server that stores the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit in association with each SID of the main control unit. The key management server 803 is a key management server that can communicate with the main control board 116.

  First, when an abnormality occurs in the CU communication control unit 80 of the card unit 3, the main control unit 323 detects an abnormality as a result of the mutual authentication performed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 described above. Detect. In this mutual authentication, in addition to the above-described serial ID authentication and device authentication, device authentication using a session key described later (see FIG. 34) is also included. When the main control unit 323 detects an abnormality in the CU communication control unit 80, the main control unit 323 notifies the host server 801 to that effect and transmits an abnormality notification command to the display control unit 797 of the card unit 3. Then, the display control unit 797 is controlled to display that the display 312 indicates that an abnormality has occurred, and an abnormality notification lamp (not shown) is turned on or blinked to notify the abnormality. Further, the main control unit 323 transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred from the external communication unit 324 to the hall management computer 1.

  Further, the occurrence of an abnormality by the CU communication control unit 80 is also detected by the S unit communication control unit 81. When the S-unit communication control unit 81 detects the occurrence of an abnormality, it notifies the payout control unit 31 to that effect, and the payout control unit 31 further notifies the main control board 116 to that effect. In response to the abnormality occurrence signal, the main control board 116 outputs a signal for lighting or blinking an abnormality notification lamp provided on the film plate or the like, and a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer 1. Send.

  When an abnormality occurs in the main control unit 323 of the card unit 3, the CU communication control unit 80 detects the occurrence of the abnormality by the mutual authentication described above, and sends a signal (abnormality notification signal) indicating that to the S unit communication control unit. 81 is notified. In response to this, the S unit communication control unit 81 notifies the payout control unit 31 that an abnormality has occurred. In response, the payout control unit 31 notifies the main control board 116 that an abnormality has occurred. As described above, the main control board 116 performs control to operate the abnormality notification lamp and transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer 1.

  When the CU communication control unit 80 detects an abnormality in the S-unit communication control unit 81, the CU communication control unit 80 notifies the main control unit 323 of the fact, and the main control unit 323 notifies the host server 801 of the fact.

  As described above, when the CU communication control unit 80 detects an abnormality of the main control unit 323, the CU communication control unit 80 notifies the S unit communication control unit 81 of the fact, while when detecting an abnormality of the S unit communication control unit 81, the fact is notified. To the main control unit 323, and the notification destination of the occurrence of abnormality by the CU communication control unit 80 is different. The reason for this is that even if the control unit in which an abnormality has occurred is notified that an abnormality has occurred, no abnormality notification control is performed and no abnormality prevention measure is provided. Moreover, the CU communication control unit 80 has a communication control function but does not have an abnormality notification control function. Therefore, the abnormality notification cannot be controlled by itself, and for this reason, notification is made that an abnormality has occurred in the direction of the control unit opposite to the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. The S communication control unit 81 that has received the notification of the occurrence of the abnormality from the CU communication control unit 80 notifies the payout control unit 31 to that effect, and the payout control unit 31 notifies that the abnormality has occurred. To notify. In response to the notification, the main control board 116 performs the same control for abnormality notification as described above.

  When an abnormality occurs in the S-station communication control unit 81, the CU communication control unit 80 detects that fact and notifies the main control unit 323 that the abnormality has occurred. The main control unit 323 notifies the above-described abnormality notification. In addition to performing control, the host server 801 is notified that an abnormality has occurred. Further, when an abnormality has occurred in the S-unit communication control unit 81 and no abnormality has occurred in the payout control unit 31, the payout control unit 31 detects that an abnormality has occurred, and the fact that the abnormality has occurred is mainly described. Notify the control board 116. In response to the notification, the main control board 116 performs the above-described abnormality notification control.

  When an abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 31, the main control board 116 detects the abnormality and performs the above-described abnormality occurrence notification control. If an abnormality has occurred in the payout control unit 31 and no abnormality has occurred in the S-unit communication control unit 81, the S-unit communication control unit 81 detects the occurrence of the abnormality and indicates that the abnormality has occurred. Notify the controller 80. Upon receiving the notification, the CU communication control unit 80 notifies the main control unit 323 that an abnormality has occurred. In response to the notification, the main control unit 323 performs the above-described control for abnormality notification and notifies the host server 801 that an abnormality has occurred.

  When an abnormality occurs in both the S-unit communication control unit 81 and the payout control unit 31, the main control board 116 detects the occurrence of the abnormality and the CU communication control unit 80 also detects the occurrence of the abnormality.

  When an abnormality occurs in the main control board 116, the payout control unit 31 detects the abnormality and notifies the S-unit communication control unit 81 that the abnormality has occurred. The S unit communication control unit 81 receives the notification and notifies the CU communication control unit 80 that an abnormality has occurred, and the CU communication control unit 80 receives the notification and notifies the main control unit 323 that an abnormality has occurred. . In response to this, the main control unit 323 controls the above-described abnormality notification and notifies the host server 801 that an abnormality has occurred.

  As described above, the LSI 117 detects and notifies the main control board 116 when an abnormality occurs in the CU communication control unit 80, and detects that when an abnormality occurs in the main control board 116. The CU communication control unit 80 is notified that an abnormality has occurred. Similarly to the above-described CU communication control unit 80, the LSI 117 is also not controlled for abnormality notification even if notification is given to the control unit in which the abnormality has occurred when it is detected that abnormality has occurred. Therefore, a notification is sent to the control unit or control board on the opposite side of the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. Note that the CU communication control unit 80 and the LSI 117 are not connected to abnormality notification means such as an abnormality notification lamp or an abnormality notification display, and do not have a function of performing abnormality notification control on their own even if an abnormality is detected. .

  In the control of FIGS. 7 to 17 described above, S units are shown as an example of the gaming machine, but an example of the gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine (P unit) described later.

  Next, an outline of commands and responses performed between the card unit and the slot machine will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 18 shows a transmission direction, names of transmission information, and an outline thereof. Data with a transmission direction of CU to S units is a command, and data with a transmission direction of S units to CU is a response.

  A recovery request command is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This recovery request command requests the S units to transmit recovery information.

  A response of the recovery response is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The response of this recovery response is to transmit the recovery information held in S units to the CU.

  A communication start request is transmitted from the CU to the S units. This communication start request requests the S units to clear the recovery information and back up the connection ID (communication start time).

  A communication start response is transmitted from the S units to the CU. This communication start response notifies the CU that the recovery information has been cleared and the connection ID (communication start time) has been backed up.

  An operation instruction is transmitted from the CU to the S units. This operation instruction instructs a game operation to the S units and requests transmission of game table information such as points.

  An operation response is transmitted from the S units to the CU. This operation response notifies the CU of the execution result of the game operation instruction and also notifies game table information such as points.

  A communication disconnection request is transmitted from the CU to the S units. This communication disconnection request requests the S units to disconnect the communication connection.

  A communication disconnection response is transmitted from the S units to the CU. This communication disconnection response notifies the CU that a communication disconnection request command has been received.

  A communication test request is transmitted from the CU to the S units. This communication test request notifies the S units of communication data.

  A communication test response is transmitted from the S units to the CU. This communication test response is a response of communication data to the CU.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, an outline of commands and responses performed between the main control unit and the CU communication control unit will be described. 19 and 20 show the transmission direction, the name of the transmission information, and the outline thereof. The transmission direction is a command from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit, and the transmission direction is data from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A BB serial ID authentication request 1 for requesting authentication of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This BB serial ID authentication request will be described in detail later. The BB serial ID is the SID of the main control unit 323 described above. This command is not sent up to S units but is exceptional.

  A BB serial ID authentication response 1 for notifying authentication information of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will also be described later.

  A second BB serial ID authentication request 2 is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A second BB serial ID authentication response 2 is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  Next, an IC serial ID authentication request 1 for requesting authentication of the IC serial ID is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This IC serial ID authentication request will be described in detail later. The IC serial ID is the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 described above.

  An IC serial ID authentication response 1 for notifying IC serial ID authentication information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will also be described later. Note that this command is not transmitted up to S units and is exceptional.

  The second IC serial ID authentication request 2 is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A second IC serial ID authentication response 2 is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A command requesting device authentication (device authentication request 1) is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This device authentication is for authenticating whether or not the authentication key (common key) stored in the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is the same key, and will be described in detail later. Note that this command is not transmitted up to S units and is exceptional.

  A response (device authentication response 1) for notifying the device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will be described later. This response is not sent from the S units, but is an exceptional one.

  A command (device authentication request 2) for requesting second device authentication is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A response (device authentication response 2) for notifying the second device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  Device authentication requests 1 and 2 and device authentication responses 1 and 2 will be described with reference to FIG.

  Counter information notification for notifying counter information is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A counter information notification response for notifying the counter information notification result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  The counter information notification and the counter information notification response will be described with reference to FIG.

  A writer management information request for requesting writer management information is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A writer management information response notifying the writer management information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  The writer management information request and the writer management information response will be described with reference to FIG. The data included in the writer management information response includes a command code, a writer ID (ROM writer ID), an authentication key version, and the like.

  The main control unit requests the CU communication control unit to update the authentication key, but transmits an authentication key update request.

  Data included in the authentication key update request includes a command code, a command size, a shipping manufacturer code, a writer ID (ROM writer ID), an authentication key version, an authentication key, a MAC key as an H-MAC key, and a MAC. include.

  An authentication key update response notifying the authentication key update result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A command (time notification) for notifying the current time is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A response (time response) that is a notification that a time notification command has been received is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A command (S-unit communication control unit authentication request) requesting authentication with the S-unit communication control unit is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. Mutual authentication is performed between the CU communication control unit and the S unit communication control unit. The main control unit requests the authentication result of the S unit communication control unit by the CU communication control unit as a result of the mutual authentication. Note that this command is not transmitted up to S units and is exceptional.

  A response (S unit communication control unit authentication response) for notifying an authentication result with the S unit communication control unit is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. This response is not sent from the S units, but is an exceptional one. The CU communication control unit 80 obtains information such as the chip ID of the main control board 116 and the LSI 117 and then returns an authentication result to the main control unit 323.

  A device information request for requesting device information is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A device information response notifying device information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A command (communication state request) for requesting a communication (transmission) state to the CU communication control unit is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This communication (transmission) state is a command for requesting whether or not the communication state between the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is normal. Note that this command is not transmitted up to S units and is exceptional.

  A response (communication state response) for notifying the communication (transmission) state is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. This is a response in which the CU communication control unit determines whether the communication state between the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is appropriate, and returns the determination result to the main control unit. This response is not sent from the S units, but is an exceptional one.

  A command for requesting re-authentication with the S-unit communication control unit (S-unit communication control unit re-authentication request) is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. Mutual authentication is performed between the CU communication control unit and the S unit communication control unit. The main control unit requests the authentication result of the S unit communication control unit by the CU communication control unit as a result of the mutual authentication. Note that this command is not transmitted up to S units and is exceptional.

  A response (S unit communication control unit re-authentication response) for notifying the response of the S unit communication control unit re-authentication request message is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The CU communication control unit re-executes authentication between the S unit communication control units, and the main control unit acquires the authentication result by receiving the S unit communication control unit re-authentication response. This response is not sent from the S units, but is an exceptional one.

  A BB serial ID authentication request A for requesting BB serial ID authentication is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. The BB serial ID authentication request A will be described in detail later. This command is not sent up to S units but is exceptional.

  A BB serial ID authentication response A for notifying authentication information of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will also be described later.

  A BB serial ID authentication request B for requesting BB serial ID authentication is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This command is not sent up to S units but is exceptional.

  A BB serial ID authentication response B for notifying authentication information of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  The BB serial ID authentication requests A and B and the BB serial ID authentication responses A and B will be described later with reference to FIG. Device authentication requests A and B and device authentication responses A and B will be described later with reference to FIG.

  A command requesting device authentication (device authentication request A) is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This device authentication is for authenticating whether or not the authentication key (common key) stored in the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is the same key, and will be described in detail later. Note that this command is not transmitted up to S units and is exceptional.

  A response (device authentication response A) for notifying the device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will be described later. This response is not sent from the S units, but is an exceptional one.

  A command for requesting device authentication (device authentication request B) is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This device authentication is for authenticating whether or not the authentication key (common key) stored in the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is the same key, and will be described in detail later. Note that this command is not transmitted up to S units and is exceptional.

  A response (device authentication response B) for notifying the device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will be described later. This response is not sent from the S units, but is an exceptional one.

  An authentication key setting request for requesting an authentication key update is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The authentication key setting request is a response for notifying the main control unit of the authentication key setting information, and the authentication key information written in from the dedicated IC writer (ROM writer) (the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 in FIG. 17). ) From the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Information included in the authentication key setting request includes a command code, a command size, a shipping manufacturer code, a writer ID (ROM writer ID), an authentication key version, an authentication key, a MAC key as an H-MAC key, and an encryption key. Padding character (random number), MAC. Except for the command code, the code information is encrypted and transmitted using the BB serial ID as an encryption key using the ECB block encryption mode.

  An authentication key setting response notifying the authentication key update result is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. The authentication key setting response is a command for notifying the CU communication control unit of the authentication key information setting result. Information included in the authentication key setting response includes a command code, a command size, an update result, an encryption padding character (random number), and a MAC. Other than the command code, the ECB block cipher mode is used for encryption and transmission using the BB serial ID as an encryption key.

  Next, based on FIGS. 21 to 29, among the commands / responses shown in FIGS. 18 and 20, the recovery response, the communication start request, the operation instruction, the operation response, the communication status response, the device information response, The contents will be described in detail.

  First, the recovery response will be described with reference to FIG. The response of this recovery response is to transmit the recovery information (recovery data) held in S units to the CU. This “recovery information” refers to the data stored in the backup storage for the S unit to send a recovery response to the CU when the CU sends a recovery request command to the S unit as the recovery process is executed. That is. As recovery information transmitted from the S platform to the CU, as shown in FIG. 21, the connection time, the last sequence number, the C-ID, the previous holding related information and the current holding related information, the previous credit related information and the current credit Related information.

  The “encrypted” column shown in FIG. 21 and subsequent figures is a column indicating whether or not the data to be transmitted is encrypted. The symbol “X” indicates that the data is not encrypted, and the symbol “◯” indicates that the data is encrypted. The key used for this encryption uses a session key (also called a telegram key), which will be described later.

  The connection time is a connection time backed up by the S units (connection time data received from the CU at the start of communication). The final sequence number is a sequence number received from the CU and backed up by S units. The C-ID is a C-ID that was backed up on the S units.

  The previous point-related information is the point-related information notified last time. The previous addition number p, which is the previously notified addition number, the previous subtraction number p, which is the previously notified subtraction number, and the previously output external output information. Each piece of information of the previous external output information.

  The current point-related information is the latest point-related information, and is the number of current points that are the number of points currently held in S units, the current number of points p that is the number of additions currently held in S units. The current subtraction number p, which is the subtraction number currently held in the S units, and the external output information currently held in the S units.

  The previous credit-related information is the credit-related information notified last time, the previous addition number c that is the previously notified addition number, the previous subtraction number c that is the previously notified subtraction number, and the previously output external output information Each piece of external output information.

  The current credit-related information is the latest credit-related information. The current number of credits, which is the number of credits currently held in S units, the current addition number c, which is the number of additions currently held in S units, The current subtraction number c, which is the subtraction number held in the S units, and the external output information currently held in the S units.

  Note that the information marked with * in FIG. 21 is data to be backed up by S units, and ALL0 is set at the time of factory shipment and when the backup data is indefinite.

  FIG. 26 shows the meanings and fixed points of various data in (Note 1) shown in FIG. The meanings of various numbers and the contents of the confirmation points are as shown in FIG. 26, but a supplementary explanation will be given below.

  The number of points is the number of points held by the S units. Although it cannot be used directly in games, it can be used on gaming machines by deducting credits from points. Moreover, it is recorded so as to be specified by a card at the time of checkout. The points can be used for credit conversion and wagon service. The CU checks whether the number of points on the S units matches the number of points after the correction of the CU. If they do not match, the CU sends a communication disconnection request command to the S units and disconnects the communication. At the same time, the S game is stopped (see FIG. 62, etc.). Then, the CU executes the recovery process, and transmits a communication start request to the S units (see FIG. 43), so that the point correction request is transferred to the S units in accordance with the data correction request included in the communication start request command. And processing for correcting the number of points of the S units to the number of points after correcting on the CU side.

  The addition number p indicates the number added to the score (including the “addition request number p” transmitted from the CU). Further, when the “addition request number p” is transmitted from the CU, the number of points corresponding to the “addition request number p” is added to the addition number p after the movement and detection of the pseudo ball. After the CU transmits the “addition request number p” to the S units and receives the “addition number p” updated based on the “addition request number p” from the S units, the CU changes to the “addition number p”. Add the corresponding score to the current score. However, the CU does not add the score when it receives this data without holding the card.

  The subtraction number p indicates the number of points subtracted from the points. When the “subtraction request number p” is transmitted from the CU, the number of points corresponding to the “subtraction request number p” is added to the subtraction number after the movement / detection of the pseudo ball 124. After the CU has transmitted the “subtraction request number p” to the S units and receives the “subtraction number p” updated based on the “subtraction request number p” from the S units, the CU sets the “subtraction number p”. Subtract the corresponding score from the current score. However, the CU does not subtract the score when receiving this data without holding the card, and the CU does not subtract when the score held by the CU is 0. .

  The number of credits is the number of credits held by S units. Credits are deducted from the points and changed. Used to set bets on gaming machines. On the other hand, it cannot be used for the wagon service. When the number of credits becomes “0”, S games are prohibited.

  The CU corrects the number of credits held by the CU using “addition number c” and “subtraction number c”, which will be described later, and then checks whether the number of credits of the S units and the number of credits of the CU match. In the case of a mismatch, the CU transmits a game stop to the S units.

  The addition number c indicates the number added to the credit (including the “addition request number c” transmitted from the CU). When the “addition request number c” is transmitted from the CU, the number of credits corresponding to the “addition request number c” is added to the addition number c. The CU transmits “addition request number c” to the S units, and then receives “addition number c” updated based on the “addition request number c” from the S units. Add the corresponding score to the current credit. However, the CU does not add the number of credits when the data is received without holding the card.

  The subtraction number c indicates the number of credits subtracted from the credits by setting the betting number. The subtraction number c includes the “addition request number c” transmitted from the CU. That is, when the “subtraction request number c” is transmitted from the CU, the number of credits corresponding to the “subtraction request number c” is added to the subtraction number c. The CU transmits “subtraction request number c” to the S units, and then receives the “subtraction number c” updated based on the “subtraction request number c” from the S units. Subtract the corresponding score from the current credit. However, the CU does not subtract the credit number when receiving this data without holding the card, and the CU does not subtract when the credit number held by the CU is zero. .

  The external output information is information indicating various game states and the like. The S units back up all external output information notified to the CU as previous external output information, and clear the current external output information to zero. The external output information includes a plurality of types shown in FIG.

  The betting number setting information is information indicating the betting number set for one game. The reel start information is information indicating that the reel has started to rotate. The start operation information is information indicating that a start operation for starting the rotation of the reel has been performed after the betting number is set. The internal winning status information is information indicating a winning result (including a miss) of a combination such as a big bonus, bonus, small combination (by type), or replay. In this slot machine, for example, a random value is extracted at the timing when the start operation is detected, and the winning determination is made, and this internal winning status information is transmitted from the S units to the CU at that timing.

  The first to third stop operation information is information indicating that the first stop operation has been performed, the second stop operation has been performed, and the third stop operation has been performed on the reel. Output when an operation is detected. The first to third stop information is information indicating each of the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop of the reel. The result confirmation information is information indicating that all reels have stopped and the result (the type of winning or winning combination). The CU receives these external output information from the S units and stores them.

  Next, referring to FIG. 22, the communication start request command requests the S units to correct the score and sequence number and to back up a new communication ID (communication start time).

  Specific data of the communication start request includes connection time, data correction request, sequence number, point data, and credit data, as shown in the lower part of FIG. The connection time is the time when the communication between the CU and the S unit is started. The connection time is held by the CU and transmitted from the CU to the S unit. This connection time is used as a communication connection ID.

  The data correction request is a request from the CU to correct data to the S units, and is composed of 3 bits of Bit0 to Bit2. Bit 0 is a bit for designating whether or not there is a clear request. When it is “0”, there is no clear request, and when it is “1”, clear request is designated. When there is a clear request, it is held on the S side such as “score”, “sequence number”, “score addition number”, “score subtraction number”, “credit addition number”, “credit subtraction number”, “external output information”, etc. A request is made to the S units to clear the existing backup data to zero.

  Bit 1 is a bit for designating whether or not there is a sequence number correction request. When it is “0”, there is no sequence number correction request, and when it is “1”, the sequence number correction request is specified.

  Bit 2 is a bit for designating whether or not there is a score / credit correction request. When it is “0”, a score / credit correction request is present, and when it is “1”, a score / credit correction request is not designated. Bits 3 to 7 are reserved.

  In the flowcharts of FIG. 30 and subsequent figures, when the bit specifying the presence / absence of a request is “0”, it is expressed as “no request”, and when it is “1”, it is expressed as “present request”. For example, when Bit 0 of the data correction request is “1”, it is expressed as “clear request present”, and when “0”, “clear request not present”. Also, as shown in parentheses in the data correction request column, “Clear request” is “Recovery clear”, “Sequence number correction request” is “SQN correction”, and “Point and credit correction request” are “ "Points / credit correction".

  The sequence number (also referred to as SQN) is a sequence number stored in the CU. The score is the number of points stored in the CU. The credit is the number of credits stored in the CU.

  The CU backs up the connection time and backs up the “main chip ID” and the “payout chip ID” when transmitting the communication start request command.

The S units perform the following processing when receiving this communication start request.
When clear request is ON, S side such as “number of points” “number of credits” “sequence number” “number of points added” “number of points subtracted” “credit added number” “credit subtracted number” “external output information” Clear the backup data stored in step 0 to 0.

  When the sequence number correction request is ON, the notified sequence number is overwritten with the sequence number held on the S units.

  In the case of the point correction request ON, the notified point and credit are overwritten with the point and credit held by the S units.

Back up the connection time.
Each process performed on the S units is executed in order from the top.

  Next, the operation instruction commands shown in FIG. 23 are “addition of points”, “subtraction of points”, “addition of credits”, “subtraction of credits”, and “allow / inhibit game” for S cars. In addition to instructing the operation of “clearing points / credits and sequence number”, it is also requested to transmit various game machine information. The CU uses this command to periodically check the status of the S units.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the data included in the operation instruction command includes “operation request”, “CU state”, “number of point addition request number”, “number of point subtraction request number”, “credit addition request number”, “Number of credit subtraction requests”, “By request type”, “Card balance” are included.

  As an operation request, 8-bit data of Bit0 to Bit7 is transmitted from the CU to the S units. For Bit0, the presence of a score addition request p is instructed when “1”, and the absence of a score addition request p is instructed when “0”. With respect to Bit 1, the presence of a score subtraction request p is instructed when “1”, and the absence of a score subtraction request p is instructed when “0”. As for Bit2, “1” indicates that a game permission is requested, and “0” indicates that no game permission is requested.

  For Bit 3, “1” indicates that there is a game prohibition request, and “0” indicates that there is no game prohibition request. With regard to Bit 4, when the number is "1", the clearing of the score and sequence number is instructed, and when it is "0", the clearing of the score and sequence number is not requested.

  The S units determine whether or not the game can be started by comprehensively considering “game permission / game prohibition” set by the CU, the remaining number of points held by the S units, the error state of the S units, and the like. The opportunity for the S units to change the setting value of the game permission is when a game permission request is received from the CU. The opportunity for the S units to change the setting value for prohibiting the game is when a game prohibition request is received from the CU, when communication disconnection is detected, or when the S units are powered on.

Bit 5 is used for a front door opening request (front door opening request).
For Bit 6, the presence of a credit number addition request p is instructed when “1”, and the absence of a credit number addition request p is instructed when “0”. For Bit7, the presence of a credit number subtraction request p is instructed when “1”, and the absence of a credit number subtraction request p is instructed when “0”.

  When a plurality of bits of Bit0 to Bit7 are “1”, the S units execute in order from Bit0.

  Further, data of the addition request number p that is valid only when Bit 0 of the operation request is “1” is transmitted from the CU to the S units. The data of the addition request number p indicates a value to be added to the score.

  Data of the number of subtraction requests p that is valid only when Bit 1 of the operation request is “1” is transmitted from the CU to the S units. The data of the subtraction request number p indicates a value to be subtracted from the number of points.

  Further, data of the addition request number c that is valid only when Bit 6 of the operation request is “1” is transmitted from the CU to the S units. The data of the addition request number c indicates a value to be added to the credit number.

  Data of the subtraction request number p that is valid only when the operation request Bit 7 is “1” is transmitted from the CU to the S units. The data of the subtraction request number p indicates a value to be subtracted from the credit number.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 24 (a), in particular, for each bit of the operation request of the operation instruction command, in particular, the opportunity for the CU to transmit the data and the operation of the S units that received the data will be described in detail. To do.

  First, when the CU transmits the “0 points score request” data of Bit 0, when the prepaid balance is consumed (when a lending operation is detected), or when an operation for replaying a medal is detected (when a replay operation is detected) ), When a card with a score recorded is inserted into the card unit. Receiving this, the S units add the value of the number of addition requests indicated by the received data to the holding points held by itself.

  The opportunity for the CU to transmit the Bit1 “scoring number subtraction request” data is when the operation of subtracting the scoring by the wagon service is detected, or when the scoring of the scoring is given to other players. This is when an operation is detected. Receiving this, the S units subtract the value of the subtraction request number indicated by the received data from the holding point held by itself.

The addition / subtraction of the points is performed on the condition that the pseudo ball 124 is moved and detected on the S platform side.
The opportunity for the CU to transmit the “game permission request” data of Bit 2 is the timing of switching from game prohibition to game permission. Receiving this, the S platform permits the game by the player. Specifically, the betting operation is permitted.

  The opportunity for the CU to transmit the Bit 3 “game prohibition request” data is the timing of switching from game permission to game prohibition. The S units that have received this prohibit the game by the player. Specifically, betting operations are prohibited.

  The opportunity for the CU to transmit the Bit 4 “Clear Points and Sequence Number Request” data is the card return timing. Receiving this, the S units clear their own holding points and sequence numbers to zero.

  The opportunity for the CU to transmit the Bit 5 “front door opening request” data is when a request to open the front door is detected. Receiving this, the S cars enter the game prohibition state by prohibiting the betting operation, and then release the lock state of the front door after a predetermined wait time has elapsed.

  First, the opportunity for the CU to transmit the Bit 6 “credit count addition request” data is when the score is consumed (when a credit button operation is detected). Receiving this, the S units add the value of the number of addition requests indicated by the received data to the credit held by itself.

  The opportunity for the CU to transmit the Bit 7 “credit number subtraction request” data is when the credit is settled (credit settlement button operation). Receiving this, the S units subtract the value of the subtraction request number indicated by the received data from the credit held by itself.

  Returning to FIG. 23, the “CU state” of the operation instruction command will be described. The “CU state” data of the operation instruction command is composed of 8 bits of Bit0 to Bit7. As shown in FIG. 23, Bit 0 to Bit 7 are “card holding”, “card insertion processing”, “point addition display”, “point subtraction display”, “credit addition display”, respectively. It corresponds to “Credit subtraction display”, “Clear display” and “Trial hit mode”.

  Here, the data of these “CU states” will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  First, Bit 0 indicates whether or not the card is held on the CU side. When it is 1, it indicates that the card is being held, and when it is 0, it indicates that the card is not held. Bit 1 indicates whether or not the card insertion process (card information reading, verification, etc.) is in progress from when the card is inserted on the CU side until the balance is fixed. When the card is 1, the card insertion process is in progress. Indicates that the card is not being inserted. Bit2 indicates whether or not a score addition display for adding and updating the score is being performed on the CU side. When the score is 1, the score addition display is being displayed, and when it is 0, the score addition display is not being displayed. Bit3 indicates whether or not a point subtraction display for subtracting and updating a point is being performed on the CU side, and indicates a point subtraction display when 1 and a point subtraction display other than 0. Bit 4 indicates whether or not the score and sequence number are being clear-displayed on the CU side, and indicates clear display when 1 and other than clear display when 0.

  Next, Bit 5 indicates whether or not the trial hit mode is in effect, and when Bit 5 is “1”, it indicates that the trial hit mode is in effect. During the trial hit mode, the CU ignores the addition number and subtraction number data notified from the S units, and if it detects that the S side points have reached 0, Add points automatically.

  Bit 6 indicates whether or not a credit addition display for adding and updating credits is being performed on the CU side, and represents a credit addition display when 1 and a credit addition display other than 0. Bit 7 indicates whether or not a credit subtraction display for subtracting and updating credits is being performed on the CU side, and represents a credit subtraction display when 1 and a credit subtraction display other than 0.

  This CU state is composed of 8 bits of Bit0 to Bit7, but may be composed of 16 bits of Bit0 to Bit15 so that the following information can be transmitted by each bit.

Bit0: 1 = Card insertion processing Bit1: 1 = Cash insertion processing Bit2: 1 = General card (visitor card) holding Bit3: 1 = Member card holding Bit4: 1 = Test card holding Bit7-5: Reserve Bit8 : 1 = Prepaid loan display in progress Bit9: 1 = Replay loan display in progress Bit10: 1 = Rewarded medals split display (in shared medals display)
Bit11: 1 = Wagon service is displayed Bit12: 1 = Clear is displayed Bit13: 1 = Breaking Bit15-14: Reserved Note that these CU status data are provided for display control on the S side. Whether or not the display control is performed using the data is left to the specifications on the S side. In this embodiment, a slot machine that performs display control based on these data is assumed, but the display control is not essential.

  Returning to FIG. 23, the “number of points addition request” of the operation instruction command will be described. The “number of points addition request number” data indicates a value to be added to the points. This data is valid only when Bit 0 = 1 of the “operation request”. Next, the “number of points subtraction request count” data of the operation instruction command indicates a value to be subtracted from the point. This data is valid only when Bit 1 = 1 of the “operation request”.

  The “credit addition request number” of the operation instruction command will be described. The “credit addition request count” data indicates a value to be added to the credit count. This data is valid only when Bit 6 = 1 of “operation request”. Next, the “credit subtraction request count” data of the operation instruction command indicates a value to be subtracted from the credit count. This data is valid only when Bit 7 = 1 of “operation request”.

  The “request type” data of the operation instruction command indicates the type of addition request p and subtraction request p of Bit 0 to Bit 4 of “Operation request”.

  Bit0: 1 = lending operation (addition request p), Bit1: 1 = replay of stored medals (addition request p), Bit2: 1 = card insertion with points (addition request p), Bit3: 1 = Wagon service (subtraction request p), Bit4: 1 = Point division transfer (subtraction request p).

  For example, the S machine specifies that the factor (addition condition) of the addition request is “a lending operation for withdrawing the balance” by receiving data with Bit0 set to 1. In the flowcharts of FIG. 30 and subsequent figures, illustration of request type data transmitted together with an addition request or subtraction request transmitted from the CU is omitted.

  Next, the “card balance” data of the operation instruction command indicates the prepaid balance of the card inserted in the CU. The C-ID transmitted from the CU to the S units is set with the following data depending on the state. When the card is not inserted, “ALL00h” is set. While the card is held, the C-ID of the card is set. “ALLFFh” is set during the test hit mode.

  It should be noted that during the holding of the card, the data may be such that the card inserted into the CU can be distinguished depending on whether the card is a membership card or a visitor card. For example, “holding card” is composed of 2 bits, and the first bit is set to “1” while the membership card is held, and the second bit is set to “1” while the visitor card is held. Furthermore, in the case of a visitor card, the card is basically kept in the CU at all times, so in the case of a visitor card, the card is held only when there is a balance in the visitor card. It may be controlled so that the C-ID is transmitted as (when Bit is 1). Further, the C-ID may not be stored in the visitor card, but the C-ID may be stored only in the member card.

  Further, an error code being displayed on the CU is transmitted from the CU to the S platform. Note that “ALL00h” is transmitted as the data of the CU error code in which no error has occurred.

  Next, the operation response will be described with reference to FIG. The response of the operation response is to notify the CU of the execution result of the instruction operation and the gaming machine information such as the number of points and the number of credits.

  As the sequence number, a value obtained by incrementing the sequence number received by the operation instruction is created, and this value is included in the operation response.

The C-ID is a C-ID that is backed up by S units.
As an execution result, 8-bit data of Bit 0 to Bit 7 is transmitted from the S units to the CU.

  Note that, as shown in parentheses in FIG. 25, “reduction of addition of points” and “refusal of addition of credits” are also simply referred to as “rejection of addition”, and “rejection of points subtraction” and “rejection of credits subtraction” It is simply called “subtraction refusal”, “game permission refusal” is simply called “permission refusal”, “game prohibition refusal” is simply called “prohibition refusal”, and “clearance refusal of points, credits and sequence numbers” It is also simply called “clear rejection”, and “glass door opening rejection” is also simply called “glass opening rejection”.

  For Bit0, when “1”, an execution result of rejection of the score addition is indicated, and when “0”, an execution result indicating that addition of the score is not rejected is indicated. For Bit1, when “1”, the execution result of the score subtraction refusal is shown, and when “0”, the execution result indicating that the subtraction of the score is not rejected is shown. As for Bit2, when “1”, the execution result of the game permission rejection is shown, and when “0”, the execution result that the game permission is not rejected is shown.

  For Bit 3, when “1”, the execution result of the game prohibition rejection is indicated, and when “0”, the execution result indicating that the game prohibition is not rejected is indicated.

  For Bit 4, when “1”, the score, credit number, and sequence number clear rejection result are shown, and when “0”, the score, credit number, and sequence number clear result are not rejected. It is.

  For Bit 5, when “1”, an execution result indicating that the opening of the front door is rejected is indicated, and when “0”, an execution result indicating that the opening of the front door is not rejected is indicated.

  For Bit 6, when “1”, the execution result of credit number addition refusal is indicated, and when “0”, the execution result indicating that addition of the credit amount is not rejected is indicated. For Bit 7, when “1”, the execution result of credit number subtraction rejection is indicated, and when “0”, the execution result indicating that the credit number subtraction is not rejected is indicated.

  As the score-related information (current score-related information) transmitted from the S platform to the CU, there are the score number, the addition number p, the subtraction number p, and external output information.

  The “number of points” is the current number of points on the S side (the number of points as a result of calculating addition / subtraction). The “addition number p” is the number of points to be added.

  The “subtraction number p” is the number of points to be subtracted. The external output information is a plurality of types of information as described with reference to FIG.

  The CU that has received the addition number p adds this addition number p to the number of points it holds. The S units back up the notified value of the addition number p as a previous addition number, and clear the current addition number to zero.

  The CU that has received the subtraction number p subtracts the received subtraction number p from the held number of points. The S units back up the notified value of the subtraction number p as the previous subtraction number, and clear the current subtraction number to zero.

  That is, the CU corrects the number of points currently stored (total number of points) using the “addition number p” and “subtraction number p” transmitted from the S units. Specifically, the number of score points + the number of additions p−the number of subtractions p is calculated, and the calculation result is corrected to a new number of score points (total number of score points). Then, it is checked whether or not the total score information transmitted from the S units matches the corrected score number (total score information), and if not, a recovery process is performed for communication. The start request command is transmitted to the S units, and the number of S points is determined based on the data correction request data (bit 2 is “1” data) included in the command and the number of points stored in the CU. A process of correcting (the total number of points information) to the corrected number of points (total number of points information) on the CU side is performed.

  The credit related information (current credit related information) transmitted from the S units to the CU includes a credit number, an addition number c, and a subtraction number c.

  “Number of credits” is the current number of credits on the S side (the number of credits as a result of addition / subtraction). The “addition number c” is the number of credits to be added. In addition, when there are a plurality of winnings at the time of one transmission due to a plurality of winnings occurring during one game, the total is added.

The “subtraction number c” is the number of credits to be subtracted (for example, in the case of setting a betting number).
The CU that has received the addition number c adds the addition number c to the held credit number. The S units back up the notified value of the addition number c as the previous addition number, and clear the current addition number to zero.

  The CU that has received the subtraction number c subtracts the received subtraction number c from the retained credit number. The S units back up the notified value of the subtraction number c as the previous subtraction number and clear the current subtraction number to zero.

  That is, the CU corrects the currently stored credit number (total credit number) using the “addition number c” and “subtraction number c” transmitted from the S units. Specifically, the number of credits + the number of additions c−the number of subtractions c is calculated, and the calculation result is corrected to a new number of credits (credit total number). Then, it is checked whether or not the total credit number information transmitted from the S units and the corrected credit number (credit total number information) match, and if they do not match, recovery processing is performed and a communication start request is made. Command is sent to the S units, and the number of S credits (credits) is determined by the data correction request data (Bit2 is “1” data) included in the command and the credit number data stored in the CU. The total number information) is corrected to the corrected credit number (credit total number information) on the CU side.

  The game table state data for notifying the game table state from the S units to the CU is transmitted. The game table state data includes a game table state 1, a game state 2, a game table error state 1, and a game table error state 2.

  Among these, as the gaming machine error state 2, each bit of Bit0 to Bit3 is prepared, but this is provided as a spare, and is manufacturer-specific error information that is not used for specifying the actual error state. It is for responding to.

  FIG. 27 shows the details of each bit in the gaming machine state 1 in (Note 2) shown in FIG. Supplementary explanation will be given below.

  Referring to FIG. 27 (a), the game permission state / game prohibition state in Bit 0 of the gaming machine state 1 indicates whether the game is permitted or prohibited by the CU, and is indicated by a command from the CU. The S units that have received the transition to the instructed state. Further, when a communication abnormality occurs, the S cars themselves transition to the game prohibition state.

  During standby / game in Bit1, it is data indicating whether or not the fan (player) is playing (the reel is rotating), and the state where the fan (player) is not playing is waiting. A state in which (player) is playing is playing. The completion of the game of Bit3 indicates whether or not the rotation of all reels in the S units is stopped. A state where at least one of the three reels is rotating is a game not completed (Bit3 = 0), and a state where all the reels are stopped is a game completed (Bit3 = 1). Further, if the rotation of all the reels does not stop even after the specified time has elapsed since the start of the rotation of the reels, the S units time out, notify the abnormality (display or alarm), and transmit that fact to the CU.

  The gaming table reset in Bit 4 indicates an initial reset signal of the gaming machine (S units), and is set to “1” for 30 seconds after the activation of the S units. The presence of game table history information in Bit 5 is data indicating whether or not game table history information such as “start count (start count)” and “big bonus count” is held in S units. No table history information is indicated, and “1” indicates presence of game table history information. When the game machine history information is cleared by clearing RAM, the S machine turns this data OFF. Further, after the RAM is cleared, this data is turned ON at a timing to which data such as “start count (start count)” and “big hit count” is added. In order to match the game machine history data with the S machines, the CU 3 also clears the game machine history data held in the CU 3 when detecting this data OFF.

  Credit “0” in Bit 6 indicates whether or not the remaining number of credits is 0. When “0”, the game is continued, but when it is “1”, game play is prohibited. The

  FIG. 27B shows details of each bit in the gaming machine state 2 shown in (Note 3) of FIG. A supplementary explanation will be given below.

  As for the big bonus of Bit 0, “1” is set in the big bonus. The regular bonus for Bit 1 is set to “1” during the regular bonus. Bit1 RT is set to “1” during RT.

  FIG. 27C shows details of each bit in the gaming machine error state 1 shown in (Note 4) of FIG. A supplementary explanation will be given below.

  The game table error state 1 is composed of 3 bits, Bit0 to Bit2, and details of each bit are shown in Note 4 of FIG. 27 (c). Bit 0 is a bit indicating whether or not the front door is open, and is set to “1” when the front door is open. Bit 1 is a bit indicating whether or not a reel rotation error is occurring, and is set to “1” when a reel rotation error is occurring. Note that the reel rotation error is, for example, an error in which the reference position detection sensor provided on the reel does not detect the rotation reference position of the reel even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of rotation of the reel. Bit 2 is an error indicating whether or not an illegal winning error is occurring, and is set to “1” when an illegal winning error is occurring. The illegal winning error is, for example, an error in which the reel stop appearance and the internal winning flag do not match, or an error in which the reel stop appearance and the added number do not match.

  Bit 0 to Bit 2 are all set to “1” and then returned to “1” by power ON / OFF of the S units.

  The gaming machine error state 2 indicates manufacturer-specific error information, and 4 bits of Bit0 to Bit3 indicate that a gaming machine error 1 is occurring, a gaming machine error 2 is occurring, a gaming machine error 3 is occurring, a gaming machine error 4 occurrences are indicated.

  FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating a response (communication state response) transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The response of this communication status response is indicated by a hexadecimal string, and 0x00 indicates that the communication status is OK (appropriate). In other cases, that is, in the case of 0x01, 0x02, 0x03, 0x04, and 0x10, it is indicated that there is an abnormality as shown in FIG. In FIG. 28, CRC-NG means that the result of parity check is NG, that is, abnormal. MAC-NG is NG of Message Authentication Code. Decryption NG means that the data transmitted after being encrypted is decrypted and becomes abnormal as a result of not being proper data. The data length NG means that the length of the received data is not normal. The disconnection detection means an abnormality in which the occurrence of a disconnection between the S platform and the CU is detected.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a response of a device information response transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The device information notified from the CU communication control unit to the CU includes a command code, a command size, an acquisition result, a main control chip ID, a manufacturer code, a format code, a payout control chip ID, a manufacturer code, a format code, and a MAC. It is.

  Referring to FIG. 29, a response of the device information response is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the CU. The response of the device information response is to transmit information on the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID to the CU. The command code identifies the command code. The data size of the command is specified by the code size. One of OK (with collected information), NG (without collected information), and uncollected is specified by the acquisition result. The main control chip ID is a chip ID recorded on the S main control boards 116, and the payout control chip ID is the S payout chip IDs stored in the payout control unit 31. It is.

  30 to 88 are shown by processing executed by the CPU in the main control unit 323 of the CU, processing executed by the CPU mounted on the LSI 117, and a timing chart.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in addition to the addition number and the subtraction number from the S units to the CU according to the operation response, changes in the gaming state of the S units (BET operation detection, start operation detection, reel rotation start, reel In response to the rotation stoppage, transition to BB, transition to RB, transition to RT, transition to AT, etc.), corresponding external output information is also transmitted. However, in the following timing chart, illustration of the transmission operation of the external output information as described with reference to FIG. 5 and the storage processing in both the S units and the CU are omitted.

  Also, in FIGS. 30 to 88 below, addition refusal (score addition refusal, credit number addition refusal), subtraction refusal (score subtraction refusal, credit number subtraction refusal), permission refusal (game permission) included in the operation response Refusal), ban refusal (game ban refusal), clear refusal (score score / credit and sequence number clear refusal), and front door open refusal are described as “ON”. On the other hand, a state in which no bit is set (= 0) is described as “OFF”.

  Further, the addition request (p, c) of the point addition request and the credit addition request is also referred to as an addition request (p, c), and the point subtraction request and the credit subtraction request are also referred to as a subtraction request (p, c).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the pseudo ball unit is based on the addition request (p, c) and subtraction request (p, c) from the CU side, and the establishment of the point addition condition and the subtraction condition on the S platform side. 120 and 121 are operated, and each counter is updated on the S platform on the condition that the pseudo ball 124 is detected. However, in the following communication sequence diagram, the movement of the pseudo ball 124 is excluded except for a part. Description is omitted. In the following, the description thereof may be omitted. Furthermore, in the subsequent flowcharts, illustration of request type data transmitted together with an addition request or subtraction request transmitted from the CU is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 30, the mode of transmission and reception of commands and responses between the CU and S units will be described. A command is transmitted from the CU to the S units, and the S units return a response to the CU in response to the command. After receiving the response, the CU transmits the next command to the S units, and the S unit returns a response to the CU in response to the command. As shown in FIG. 30, the period from the transmission of the first command to the S units from the CU to the transmission of the next command is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds. Further, the period from the transmission of the response from the S platform to the CU to the transmission of the next response is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds.

  Thus, both a command and a response are transmitted between the CU and S units at an interval of 200 ms. On the other hand, the S units cannot execute two games while one game regulation time of 4.1 seconds elapses. As a result, in the present embodiment, a plurality of commands and responses are transmitted and received during one game.

  Therefore, the response of the operation response for notifying the amount of change in the number of points is successively transmitted from the S units to the CU at intervals shorter than one game period. As a matter of course, the number of times the betting number is set in one game period is one and the number of winnings that can be generated is one. In other words, there is only one chance each of the points that can be subtracted and added in one game period. Since the response of the motion response is transmitted one after another during this one game period, the S units can finely notify the CU of the amount of change in the number of points. On the other hand, the CU can manage the points by finely reflecting the change of the points on the S platform side.

  Here, the transmission interval of the command and response is set to 200 ms, but the transmission interval may be longer or shorter than this. For example, the transmission interval may be set to one game restriction time for S units. It is also possible to match with Alternatively, the transmission interval may be half of one game regulation time or less. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the S platform receives a command from the CU and returns an operation response, but instead, when a BET operation is detected and when a winning occurs, The S units may transmit data notifying the subtraction number or the addition number.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, a process when a communication disconnection is detected on the CU side will be described. If the response is not received within one second after the CU transmits a command to the S units, the same command is transmitted to the S units again. If no response is received within one second, a second retransmission is performed in which the same command is transmitted to S units. If no response is received from the S units within one second after the second retransmission, the CU determines that there is a communication abnormality at this stage. This communication abnormality may be caused when the connector 330 or 220 shown in FIG. 4 is disconnected, or when the connection wiring is disconnected or the power supply of the S units is disconnected.

  The CU transmits a device information request command to the S units in order to start the connection sequence again after 5 seconds after determining the communication abnormality. The specific contents of the process of transmitting the device information request command to the S units and starting the connection sequence will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, processing when a communication disconnection is detected on the S platform side will be described. A command is transmitted from the CU to the S machine, and the S machine sends a response to the CU in response to the command. Next, if the state in which the command from the CU is not transmitted to the S machines continues for 4 seconds, the S machine determines that the communication has been interrupted, and even if the single BET switch 5 and the MAX BET switch 6 are operated, A game is prohibited as a “betting number operation invalid state (game prohibition state)” that is not set, and a transition is made to an unconnected state. The cause of the occurrence of this communication disconnection may be the disconnection of the connector 330 or 220, the disconnection of the connection wiring, the power supply disconnection of the CU, etc., as described in FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the processing of the connection sequence at the time of power activation will be described. The process of the connection sequence in FIG. 33 is a process that is executed when communication is resumed after the communication between the CU and the S units is completed normally. Specifically, it is executed when communication is resumed after the power of the CU is turned off while the card is not inserted (see FIG. 44). A typical example is a case where the power supply is turned off after one day of business at the amusement hall is finished, and the power supply is turned on at the start of business the next day.

  First, at the time of power activation, communication is started after the game is stopped at the S units. In the CU, an authentication sequence process is first executed. The specific control contents of this authentication sequence process are shown in the flowcharts of the subroutine programs shown in FIGS. By this authentication sequence process, a device information request command is transmitted from the CU to the S units. In response, the S unit returns a response of the device information response. The response of this device information response includes a main chip ID and a payout chip ID.

  The CU that has received the device information response stores the information included in the device information response, and requests authentication for the S units that have responded (S units specified by the received main chip ID and payout chip ID). Is sent to S units.

The S units that have received the authentication request return an authentication response to the CU.
Next, specific control contents of the processing of the authentication sequence shown in FIG. 33 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  34A and 34B are flowcharts showing a subroutine program of the authentication sequence shown in FIG. There are two types of authentication sequences shown in FIG. 33: an authentication sequence when the power supply of the CU is activated and an authentication sequence when the power supply of the S units (game machines) is activated. An authentication sequence when the power supply of the CU is activated is shown in FIG. Referring to FIG. 34A, the main control unit 323 starts communication after completing authentication with the upper server 801 (see FIG. 107). The CU communication control unit 80 performs authentication with the S unit communication control unit 81. Thereafter, communication is started. Then, a CU communication control unit authentication sequence is first executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, and then a chip ID authentication sequence is executed.

  FIG. 34 (b) shows an authentication sequence when the power source of S units (game machines) is activated. Referring to FIG. 34 (b), after communication disconnection with the S units is detected in the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, the CU communication control unit 80 returns to S after communication with the S units is restored. Authentication with the stand. Thereafter, a chip ID authentication sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. Thereafter, communication with the S units becomes possible.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the CU communication control unit authentication sequence shown in FIG. The main control unit 323 starts communication after completing authentication with the upper server 801. Then, a BB serial ID authentication sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. By this BB serial ID authentication sequence, the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. 17 is authenticated. Next, the main control unit 323 executes the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication sequence only when the serial ID of the CU communication control unit is acquired from the upper server 801. The CU communication control unit serial ID is authenticated by the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication sequence.

  Next, a writer management information request command is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. The writer management information is information related to the ROM writer used when writing the authentication information to the EEPROMs 813 and 808 described with reference to FIG. For example, data such as ROM writer ID, ROM writer manufacturer code, and key version stored in the ROM writer.

  Whether the main control unit 323 collates the writer management information included in the writer management information response transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 with the writer management information stored in the main control unit 323, so that they match. Check whether or not. As a result of the collation check by the writer management information, a certain level of security is ensured and the security is improved even if the authentication keys of the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 coincide.

  Next, a device authentication sequence using an authentication key is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. Next, a counter information notification command for requesting transmission of counter information is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. In response, the CU communication control unit transmits a response of a counter information notification response to the main control unit 323 to notify the initial vector of the CTR mode. When using the ECB mode, which is a simple block cipher usage mode, if the same plaintext is encrypted with a certain key, it becomes the same ciphertext. There is an inconvenience that it can be determined by comparing the ciphertext whether or not it is the same as the portion, and in order to solve this, the initial vector of the CTR mode is notified to the CU 323. The encryption mode is set by notification of the counter information. This encryption mode setting is reset every time the power is turned on every day at the game hall, so that security is improved. The ciphertext of communication after the setting of the counter information is further scrambled. For example, if this scramble processing is not performed, the same encrypted data is exchanged every day even if the encryption is performed, and the encryption is easily broken. Such inconvenience can be solved by scrambling.

  Next, the authentication key update sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 only when the main control unit 323 obtains update information from the upper server 801. By this authentication key update sequence, the authentication key can be changed to a new one.

  Next, the main control unit 323 transmits the current time to the CU communication control unit 80. The CU communication control unit 80 receives the time information, generates a session key (telegram key) from the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 and the received time information, and transmits it to the main control unit 323 as a time response. To do. The session key (message key) can be generated by any method. For example, the received time information and the authentication key are synthesized according to a predetermined algorithm (for example, exclusive OR). The time information generated or received may be encrypted with an authentication key, and the encryption result may be used as a session key (message key). The session key is cleared when the power is turned off and is generated again when the power is turned on next time.

  Next, an authentication sequence similar to the device authentication sequence shown in FIG. 39 is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 using a session key. Then, when the authentication result is appropriate, encryption communication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 is performed after encryption and decryption using the session key.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the chip ID authentication sequence shown in FIGS. The main control unit 323 starts communication after completing authentication with the CU communication control unit 80. Then, a payout control authentication result request command is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. This payout control authentication result request command requests the authentication result of the CU communication control unit 80 authenticating the S unit communication control unit 81 provided in the LSI 117 of the S unit 2S. The CU communication control unit 80 transmits a response of a payout control authentication result response for notifying an authentication result with the S-unit communication control unit 81 of the payout control chip (LSI) to the main control unit 323.

  Next, a device information request command is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. This device information request command requests the chip ID of the CU communication control unit. The CU communication control unit 80 transmits the chip ID of the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323 as a device information response. Receiving this, the main control unit 323 makes an inquiry to the upper server 801 to check the device information (chip ID), and stops communication after NG (inappropriate). If it is not NG, a business message can be transmitted to the S units thereafter. Then, transmission / reception of a recovery request, a recovery response, an operation instruction, and an operation response command response is performed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the BB serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. 35, in which challenge-response authentication is performed. Challenge-response authentication is generally an authentication method that prevents eavesdropping of IDs and the like during communication by applying special processing to character strings. For example, the authenticating side performs authentication. A random number sequence (called "challenge code") is sent to the recipient, and the recipient of the challenge code synthesizes the ID etc. and the received challenge code according to a predetermined algorithm, and a response code Generate and reply. On the side that received the response code, generate a response code in the same way from the transmitted challenge code and pre-stored ID, etc., and compare the sent response code with the generated response code to see if they match Authentication is performed to determine whether or not.

  In the present embodiment, first, a command of BB serial ID request 1 is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. Upon receiving this, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits a response requesting a challenge code as the BB serial ID authentication response 1. Receiving this, the main control unit 323 generates a challenge code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. 17, and uses the challenge code as a BB serial ID authentication request. It transmits to the communication control part 80. Upon receiving this, the CU communication control unit 80 generates a response code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 813 shown in FIG. 17, and uses the response code as the BB serial ID authentication response 2. To the main control unit 323. In response to this, the main control unit 323 checks the response code to determine whether it is appropriate. When it is inappropriate (NG), control is performed so that subsequent communication is not performed.

  Any algorithm for generating the challenge code and generating the response code may be used. An example of the algorithm is described below. As a challenge code generation, a random number (binary number) having the same data length is generated for the code data (binary number) of the BB serial ID, and an exclusive OR (exclusive OR) of the BB serial ID and the random number is generated. The calculation result is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80 as a challenge code. On the other hand, as a response code generation in the CU communication control unit 80, an exclusive OR of a BB serial ID (binary number) is calculated for the received challenge code. If the BB serial ID on the main control unit 323 side matches the BB serial ID on the CU communication control unit 80 side, it means that the exclusive OR of the same BB serial ID has been calculated twice for the random number. The result is the original random number. Then, the original random number is transmitted to the main control unit 323 as a response code. The main control unit 323 determines whether or not the generated random number matches the random number sent as a response code. If they match, the main control unit 323 determines that the random number is appropriate, while if not, the main control unit 323 determines that the generated random number is incorrect (NG). judge.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. First, the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication request 1 is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. Upon receiving this, the CU communication control unit 80 generates a challenge code A using the CU communication control unit serial ID, that is, the SID of the CU communication control unit stored in the ROM 809 shown in FIG. The CU communication control unit transmits the serial ID authentication response 1 to the main control unit 323. Receiving this, the main control unit 323 generates the response code A using the CU communication control unit serial ID, that is, the SID of the CU communication control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. The communication control unit serial ID authentication request 2 is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80. Receiving it, the communication control unit 80 checks the response code A to determine whether it is appropriate. Then, the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication response 2 including the determination result (check result) and the challenge code B request is transmitted to the main control unit 323. Receiving this, the main control unit 323 performs control so that subsequent communication is not performed when the check result is inappropriate (NG).

  The algorithm of challenge code generation and response code generation shown in FIG. 38 may be any algorithm, but for example, the algorithm using exclusive OR described in FIG. 37 can be used. .

  The challenge-response authentication algorithm is not limited to the above, and may be as follows. For example, the random number R1 is generated in the CU communication control unit 80, and the challenge code A is generated by encrypting the random number R1 using the SID (referred to as SIDM) of the CU communication control unit stored in the CU communication control unit 80 as a key. If expressed by an equation, challenge code A = ESIDM (R1). This is transmitted to the main control unit 323. The main control unit 323 generates a response code A by decoding with the stored SIDM. Expressed by the equation, response code A = DSIDM (challenge code A) = DSIDM (ESIDM (R1)) = R1. This is returned to the communication control unit 80, and it is checked whether or not the random number R1 previously generated in the communication control unit 80 matches the returned response code A (= R1). It is determined that the authentication is successful.

  Further, the main control unit 323 generates a random number R2 and encrypts the random number R2 using the SID (referred to as SIDT) of the main control unit stored in the main control unit 323 as a key to generate a challenge code B. If expressed by a formula, challenge code B = ESIDT (R2). This is transmitted to the communication control unit 80, and decrypted with the SIDT stored in the communication control unit 80 to generate the response code B. Expressed by the equation, the response code B = DSIDT (challenge code B) = DSIDT (ESIDT (R2)) = R2. This is returned to the main control unit 323, and the random number R2 previously generated in the main control unit 323 is compared with the returned response code B (= R2) to check whether they match. It is determined that the authentication is successful.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the device authentication sequence shown in FIG. This device authentication sequence is an encryption / decryption authentication sequence using an encryption key (authentication key), and an ECB mode is used as a block encryption mode. First, the main control unit 323 transmits a device authentication request 1 to the CU communication control unit 80. Upon receiving this, the CU communication control unit 80 generates a random number A and encrypts the random number A with the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 shown in FIG. Also create a MAC. This MAC is a Message Authentication Code. For example, a value obtained by calculating the generated random number A using a predetermined hash function is defined as MAC. That is, the message digest of the generated random number A becomes the MAC. Then, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits the encrypted random number A and MAC as the device authentication response 1 to the main control unit 323.

  Receiving this, the main control unit 323 decrypts the received encrypted random number A with the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. 17 to generate the original plaintext random number A, and the random number A is generated as the predetermined random number A. The MAC is calculated using the hash function. Then, it is checked whether or not the calculated MAC matches the MAC transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80. If they match, it is determined to be appropriate, and if they do not match, it is determined to be inappropriate (NG).

  Next, the main control unit 323 generates a random number B and encrypts the random number B using the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. Further, the random number B is calculated using a predetermined hash function to create a MAC. Then, the encrypted random number B and MAC are further transmitted as an apparatus authentication request 2 to the CU communication control unit 80 as an authentication result based on the apparatus authentication response 1. Receiving this, the CU communication control unit 80 decrypts the received encrypted random number B using the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 shown in FIG. Then, the MAC is calculated by calculating the random number B using a predetermined hash function. It is checked whether or not the calculated MAC matches the received MAC. If they match, it is determined to be appropriate, and if they do not match, it is determined to be inappropriate (NG). Then, the determination result is transmitted as a device authentication response 2 to the main control unit 323. When the determination result is inappropriate (NG), control is performed so that subsequent communication is not performed.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the authentication key update sequence shown in FIG. When there is an authentication key update request from the upper server 801, the main control unit 323 transmits the authentication key update request to the CU communication control unit 80. The update request from the higher-level server 801 includes new authentication key data. The main control unit 323 updates the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. 17 to a new authentication key transmitted from the higher-level server 801 and sends an authentication key update request transmitted from the higher-level server 801. Transmit to the CU communication control unit 80. Upon receiving this, the CU communication control unit 80 performs a process of updating the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 shown in FIG. 17 to the new authentication key that has been transmitted, and uses the result as the authentication key update response as the main control. To the unit 323.

  Receiving this, the main control unit executes a device authentication sequence with the communication control unit 80 using the newly updated authentication key. This device authentication sequence is the same authentication sequence as the control shown in FIG. If the authentication result is appropriate, communication is performed using the authentication key thereafter.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the storage setting of the authentication key in the EEPROM 808. The authentication key is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, and the authentication key is stored in the EEPROM 808 of the main control unit 323. .

  Referring to FIG. 41, this authentication key setting sequence is an authentication key writing sequence at the time of card unit (CU) manufacture. First, the main control unit 323 waits for transmission of authentication key information from the CU communication control unit 80 on condition that an authentication key with the CU communication control unit 80 is not written. The CU communication control unit 80 starts communication in response to a request from a dedicated IC writer (ROM writer). Then, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits the BB serial ID, that is, the SID authentication request A of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. 17 to the main control unit 323. Receiving it, the main control unit 323 transmits a BB serial ID authentication response A for requesting a challenge code to the CU communication control unit 80 to the CU communication control unit 80. Receiving it, the communication control unit 80 generates a challenge code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 813 shown in FIG. 17 and uses the challenge code as the BB serial ID authentication request B. Transmit to the main control unit 323.

  Receiving this, the main control unit 323 generates a response code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. 17 and uses the response code as the BB serial ID authentication response B. Transmit to the CU communication control unit 80. Receiving it, the CU communication control unit 80 determines whether or not the response code is appropriate, and transmits the authentication key information shown below only when it is appropriate (OK). The challenge response authentication shown in FIG. 41 can also use the same algorithm (for example, exclusive OR) as the challenge response authentication shown in FIGS.

  When the CU communication control unit 80 determines that the authentication result is appropriate, the authentication key information written from the dedicated IC writer (ROM writer), that is, the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 shown in FIG. Information is transmitted to the main control unit 323 as an authentication key setting request. Receiving this, the main control unit 323 stores the transmitted authentication key in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. 17 and transmits an authentication key setting response indicating the storage to the CU communication control unit 80.

  As a result, a common authentication key (common key) is stored between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. The CU communication control unit 80 then performs device authentication using the common authentication key. This device authentication is the same as the device authentication sequence shown in FIG. If it is determined that the device authentication is appropriate, the subsequent communication is not performed, and a reset wait state is entered.

  Next, returning to FIG. 33, the CU that has received the authentication response next transmits a recovery request to the S units. In response to this, the S units return the recovery data backed up inside the S units (specifically, the payout control unit 31) to the CU as a response. This recovery data includes connection time, final SQN (sequence number), C-ID, previous point-related information, and current point-related information. To be precise, it is the various data shown in FIG. 21, and “recovery data” in the subsequent flowcharts means the various data shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the “final SQN” included in the recovery data is the SQN transmitted last by S units as described above.

  The CU that has received this recovery response starts recovery processing from that point. This recovery process is a process for recovering the consistency of each other's data between the CU and the S units, and is not only executed when the power is turned on, but also recovered as a result of a trouble as described later. Sometimes even executed.

  The CU counts up this SQN (sequence number) each time an “operation instruction” is transmitted. However, it is not counted up when the operation instruction is retransmitted. The CU backs up the SQN and its request contents when transmitting an “operation request”. The S units store the SQN received by the “operation instruction” and send it back to the CU as it is by “operation response”. When the S unit receives an operation instruction of the same SQN as the previously received SQN, the S unit determines that the re-transmission text is that the communication failure has occurred and the CU has retransmitted the operation instruction.

  After the recovery process is completed, the CU updates the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time to the values received from the S units, updates the SQN to “0”, and sends a communication start request (recovery clear ON). As a command, a command of SQN correction ON, holding point correction ON, SQN = 0, holding point = 0, credit number = 0 is transmitted to the S units. In response to this, the “S number”, “scoring points”, and “number of credits” backed up in the S units are matched with the information of the CU (SQN = 0, points = 0, credits = 0). . Also, the notified “connection time” is backed up. Then, the S units return a communication start response to the CU. Thereafter, an operation instruction command and an operation response response are transmitted and received between the CU and the S platform.

  As described above, the CU counts up the sequence number (SQN) by one each time this operation instruction is transmitted. First, in the first operation instruction, an operation instruction command of no game permission request, SQN = 0, C-ID = 00h is transmitted to the S units. In response to this, SQN = 1, C-ID = 00h, pre-addition number p (score) = 0, pre-subtraction number p (score) = 0, pre-addition number p (credit) = 0 The data of the previous subtraction number p (credit) = 0 is backed up. Further, the S units clear the values of the respective points of the score and credit addition number and subtraction number, which are the current score related information. Then, S units have SQN = 1, C-ID = 00h, number of points = 0, number of credits = 0, number of additions p (points) = 0, number of subtractions p (points) = 0, The addition number c (credit) = 0, the subtraction number c (credit) = 0, and a game prohibition (game stop state) response are transmitted to the CU.

  The subscripts p and c are descriptions relating to points and credits, respectively. For example, the addition number p is indicated as a point addition number and the addition number c is indicated as a credit addition number. (P, c) is a description in which the subscripts p and c are combined. For example, the addition number (p, c) indicates the addition number p and the addition number c.

  The CU that has received the operation response backs up SQN = 1 based on the operation response, and the current number of points 0 + the received addition number p (score) (= 0) −the received subtraction number p (score) (= 0) is calculated and the current number of points 0 and the current credit number 0 + the received addition number c (credit) (= 0) −the received subtraction number c (credit) (= 0) In addition to backing up the number of credits 0, the addition number p total (score) = 0, the subtraction number p total (score) = 0, the addition number c total (credit) = 0, and the subtraction number c total (credit) = 0 Back up.

  Next, at the stage where the start-up process is completed on the CU side, the CU sends a game permission request presence, SQN = n, C-ID = 00h operation instruction to the S units, As follows: Game refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, C-ID = 00h, number of points = 0, number of credits = 0, number of additions p (points) = 0, number of subtractions p (points) = 0, number of additions c (Credit) = 0, subtraction number c (credit) = 0 and a game permission response are returned to the CU.

  When an appropriate authentication result is obtained as a result of the authentication sequence using the session key of FIG. 35, the business message sequence shown in FIG. 42 is executed. 42A shows a case where the business message sequence is normal, and FIG. 42B shows a case where the business message sequence is abnormal.

  First, referring to FIG. 42 (a), after an operation instruction command is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80, a request for confirming the communication state of the operation instruction message (communication state request). Is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80. The CU communication control unit 80 notifies the main control unit 323 of the reception status of the operation instruction message (MAC abnormality, CRC abnormality, decoding abnormality, data length abnormality, disconnection detection) as a communication state response (see FIG. 28).

  The main control unit 323 confirms the communication state based on the received communication state response, and determines that it is normal when normal.

  On the other hand, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits the operation instruction command to the P units (specifically, the P unit communication control unit 81) based on the reception of the operation instruction command. In response to this, the P platform returns an operation response to the CU communication control unit 80, and the CU communication control unit 80 receives it and transmits a response to the operation response to the main control unit 323.

  On the other hand, FIG. 42B shows a case where the business message sequence is abnormal. The difference from FIG. 42A is that the main control unit 323 that has received the communication status response transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 checks the communication status based on the communication status response and determines that it is abnormal. It is a point to do. This is determined to be abnormal when the transmitted response of the communication status response is numerical data other than 0x00 shown in FIG. If the main control unit 323 determines that there is an abnormality, the main control unit 323 executes a retry of checking the communication state. Specifically, after an operation instruction command is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80 again, a communication state request is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80 again, and based on the communication state response returned from the CU communication control unit 80. To determine whether a communication status error has occurred. If the main control unit 323 determines that the communication state is still abnormal as a result of executing the retry, the communication state abnormality notification control is performed. As the communication state abnormality notification control, for example, an abnormality notification command is transmitted to the display control unit 797 to notify the communication state abnormality by the display 312 or the abnormality notification lamp (not shown) is turned on or blinked. Or a signal indicating that a communication state abnormality has occurred may be transmitted to the hall management computer 1. The number of retry executions is one in FIG. 42B, but may be executed twice or more.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the processing of the connection sequence when the CU and the S unit are reconnected will be described. Here, “at the time of reconnection” refers to the time when communication is resumed after the communication between the CU and the S unit ends abnormally. This “abnormal termination” is described later, when the power supply is activated while holding the card in FIG. 55, or when the S unit in FIG. This is a case where power is cut off. As will be described later, when the CU resumes the connection sequence, a. The connection sequence is resumed in a state other than waiting (see FIG. 44), b. It is determined whether the connection sequence is restarted later (see FIG. 62), or whether the SQN backed up by c.CU is inconsistent with the SQN transmitted from the S units. When it is determined that either one of c is determined, it is determined that the normal communication is not completed (abnormal termination), and the connection sequence at the time of reconnection shown in FIG. 43 is executed instead of FIG.

  The connection sequence at the time of reconnection is similar to the connection sequence at the time of power activation described with reference to FIG. 33, and here, differences will be mainly described.

  First, the time when the S cars are prohibited from gaming in the bet number operation invalid state (game prohibition state) and the communication is started immediately after receiving the device information request command from the CU. This is because the S units can recognize that the S units have been reconnected only after receiving a device information request from the CU.

  Next, since the connection sequence in FIG. 33 is when the power is turned on, a recovery start request command for recovery clear ON is transmitted from the CU to the S units, and the S unit receives the command and clears the recovery data. At the same time, the sequence number (SQN) is set to 1 in accordance with SQN = 1 sent by the first operation instruction, and all the previous holding point related information and the current holding point related information are cleared to “0”.

  However, in the case of the connection sequence shown in FIG. 43, the recovery information backed up inside the S units and the information stored on the CU side may not match because of the reconnection time. Therefore, after starting the recovery process, the CU holds the data according to the contents of the recovery data on the S side (last score / credit related information, current score / credit related information, etc.) included in the recovery response. A process for correcting a point or the like is executed.

  Specifically, based on the addition number p (score), subtraction number p (score), addition number c (credit), and subtraction number c (credit) included in the recovery data sent from the S units. Then, the CU stores the number of points + the number of additions p-the number of subtractions p and the number of credits + the number of additions c-the number of subtractions c, and the stored number of points and credits are calculated. A process of correcting the score and the credit number is performed, and the corrected score and credit number are compared with the score and credit number transmitted as recovery data from the S units to determine whether or not they match.

  If they do not match, a command with the point correction ON, that is, the bit 2 of the data correction request set to “1” is transmitted to the S units as a communication start request. Further, the final SQN included in the recovery data sent from the S units is compared with the final SQN stored in the CU to determine whether or not they match. SQN correction ON, that is, a command for setting Bit 1 of the data correction request to “1” is transmitted to the S units. The correct number of points to be corrected = 300, the number of credits = 0, and SQN = 3 are included in the communication start request and transmitted to the S units.

  The S units receive the communication start request command, and perform correction processing to match the “sequence number”, “scoring points”, and “credit number” backed up at the S units with the information of the CU. Specifically, a process of correcting SQN = 3, holding points = 300, and the number of credits = 0 and backing up the notified “connection time” is performed.

  Then, at the stage where the recovery process is completed, the CU backs up the main chip ID and the payout chip ID transmitted from the S units and backs up the connection time that is the time of reconnection. For the sequence number, when the final SQN transmitted from the S units is not abnormal, the sequence number (SQN) is continued.

  On the other hand, after the recovery process is started in the CU, if it is determined that the S counterparts as communication partners do not match or if the SQN is determined to be abnormal, the recovery response transmitted from the S counterpart Is temporarily recorded in a game recording medium (card or the like) owned by the player. After that, the replay button 319 is operated so as to use the stored medal of the recording medium, the stored medal is converted into a score, and after the credit is deducted from the score, the replay can be performed. At that time, as in the connection sequence at the time of power activation shown in FIG. 33, the recovery clear ON is transmitted as a communication start request transmitted from the CU to the S units, and the S unit receives the recovery data in response to the request. clear. In the CU, the sequence number is set to “0”, SQN = 1 is transmitted to the S units in the first operation instruction, and the SQN = 1 is backed up in the S units. Further, in the S units, the pre-addition number p = 0, the pre-subtraction number p = 0, the pre-addition number c = 0, and the pre-subtraction number c = 0 are backed up, and the addition number p, the addition number c, the subtraction number p, Each counter value of the subtraction number c is cleared to zero.

  Next, processing during standby will be described with reference to FIG. The waiting state means that no game is played in the S units, no card is inserted in the CU, and the lending button 321 and the replay button 319 are not operated at all.

  First, an operation instruction command of no addition request, no subtraction request, SQN = n, and C-ID = 00h is transmitted from the CU to the S units. In response to this, the S units receive SQN = n + 1, C-ID = 00h, the number of points = 0, the number of credits = 0, the number of additions p = 0, the number of subtractions p = 0, the number of additions c = 0, the number of subtractions c = 0, and game prohibition data are transmitted. In the CU, SQN = n + 2, addition request number p = 0, subtraction request number p = 0, addition request number c = 0, and subtraction request number c = 0. In the next operation instruction command from the CU to the S units, data of SQN = n + 2 and C-ID = 00h is transmitted. In S units that have received this, SQN = n + 3, C-ID = 00h, pre-addition number p = 0, pre-subtraction number p = 0, pre-addition number c = 0, pre-subtraction number c = 0, Each counter value of the addition number p, the subtraction number p, the addition number c, the subtraction number c, the number of points, and the credit number is cleared to zero.

  Then, the S units have SQN = n + 3, C-ID = 00h, the number of points = 0, the number of credits = 0, the number of additions p = 0, the number of subtractions p = 0, the number of subtractions c = 0, the number of subtractions. c = 0 and a game prohibition response are transmitted to the CU. In the CU, every time the response of the operation response from the S units is received, C-ID = 00h, the number of points = 0, the number of credits = 0, the addition number p accumulation = 0, the subtraction number p accumulation = 0, the addition number c Back up cumulative total = 0 and subtraction number c cumulative = 0.

With reference to FIG. 45, the processing of the CU and S units when a card is inserted will be described.
In the CU, when a card is inserted, a command signal for taking the card is output to the card reader / writer 327, and the information recorded on the taken card is read by the card reader / writer 327 and the read information is received. For example, the card insertion process is executed.

  In this insertion processing, a card insertion request command is transmitted to the S units, in which the CU reads the C-ID recorded on the inserted card and transmits the C-ID to the S units. In response to this, the S unit returns a response of the card insertion response notifying the CU that the reception of the C-ID is completed to the CU. Further, as this insertion processing, control as shown in FIG. 50 described later is executed.

  The CU is in a card balance inquiry state for a predetermined period after the card is inserted. This is in the process of inquiring, for example, an upper server such as the hall management computer 1 about the suitability of the inserted card, whether it is a member card registered at the game hall, or the prepaid balance. This means that the display unit 312 and the display unit 51 on the S side are in the process of executing the process. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 85 or the like, the CU displays that the card inserted into the display 312 is being inquired, and provides an operation instruction including ON during card holding, C-ID, and ON during card insertion processing. Send to S units.

  In the S unit, by receiving the operation instruction command, the LSI 117 transmits display control commands including ON during card holding and ON during card insertion processing to the display effect control board 90, and inquires about the inserted card. The display effect control board 90 performs control to display on the display 51 to the effect (see FIG. 85).

  After that, S units have SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of points = 0, number of credits = 0, number of additions p = 0, number of subtractions p = 0, number of subtractions c = 0, number of subtractions c = 0. Then, a response including the game prohibition is transmitted to the CU.

  In the CU, the balance is determined when the balance of the card inserted as a result of the inquiry of the card balance is confirmed. The CU performs control to display the determined prepaid balance of the card on the display 312 (see FIG. 85). At this time, since the movement of the pseudo ball 124 is not detected, the holding point display is not fixed.

  When a card with a recorded score (score> 0) is inserted, the score is immediately displayed without moving the pseudo ball 124 (without moving / detecting the pseudo ball 124). You may make it do. In such a configuration, when a card with no score recorded (score = 0) is inserted, a pseudo ball is executed when a lending operation is performed and a process of converting the card balance into a score is executed. 124 is moved, and on the condition that the moved pseudo ball 124 is detected, the balance reduction display and the point addition display are validated.

Then, SQN = n + 4, C-ID, score = 0 (number of score before update) is backed up.
Next, as operation instructions, commands including addition request present, card holding ON, card insertion processing OFF, addition display ON, SQN = n + 4, C-ID, number of addition requests p = 5000 and card balance = 7000 Send to S units. The operation instructions during the card holding process and the card insertion process are divided into the membership card and the visitor card as described with reference to FIG. The operation may be displayed separately for each type of card.

  In the S units, the LSI 117 receives an operation instruction command including ON during addition display and the number of addition requests p = 5000. In response to this, the LSI 117 drives the adding pseudo ball unit 120 to detect the predetermined number a1 of pseudo balls 124, and then adds, as an operation response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 5, C-ID, score = a1, A command including the addition number p = a1, the subtraction number = 0, and the game prohibition is transmitted to the CU. Further, the LSI 117 transmits a display device control command including ON during addition display and the addition number p = a1 from the LSI 117 to the display effect control board 90. In response to this, the display effect control board 90 displays on the display 51 that the point a1 is being added as a score (during addition display) (see FIG. 85).

  The LSI 117 repeats such a process n times, and sequentially transmits a1, a2,..., An as the addition number p, and a1, a1 + a2, a1 + a2 + a3,. The total number of points in the nth time, that is, the addition number p is a1, a2,. The main control unit 323 of the CU updates the display of the number of points each time the number of points is sent from the S units.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the insertion time processing shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the steps indicated by broken lines indicate the control contents of the modification. The solid arrows indicate the flow of control, and the two-pointed arrows indicate the flow of information to be transmitted. In FIG. 46, each step of S31 to S37 is executed by the CU, and S38 to S40 and S42 to S45 are executed by the S units.

  First, in step (hereinafter simply referred to as S) 31, the CU determines whether or not it is interrupted. Whether or not the game is being interrupted is determined based on whether or not the interrupting operation shown in FIG. If it is suspended, it is determined in S32 whether or not the C-ID of the inserted card matches the C-ID of the suspended card. If not, the inserted card is inserted in S35. The card is ejected and the process proceeds to standby (see FIG. 44).

  On the other hand, if the C-ID of the inserted card matches the C-ID of the card that has been suspended, it is determined that the suspended player has returned to the gaming machine and started the game. Therefore, the control proceeds to S34, the interrupted state is canceled, and the process of restarting the game is executed at S36.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S31 that it is not interrupted, a process of transmitting the C-ID of the inserted card to the S units is performed in S33. The S unit receives the C-ID, and compares the received C-ID with the C-ID stored in the backup area (backup data storage unit shown in FIG. 7) (S38). Then, in S39, it is determined whether or not the comparison results match. If they do not match, it is determined that a player different from the player who has left the seat has started playing, and the subroutine program for this insertion processing ends. .

  Note that the processing of S45 and S37 may be performed as the control content of the modified example. Through S45, the game history data and C-ID stored in the backup area (backup data storage unit) are transmitted to the CU and then deleted. The CU receives it and transmits the received data to the upper server 801. The host server 801 stores the received game history data and C-ID as a backup.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that they match in S39, the process proceeds to S42, and the game history data in the backup area (backup data storage) is returned to the current area (player game history data storage unit shown in FIG. 7), and the game history data is returned. The game history data is newly added and updated.

  In addition, you may perform the process of S40, S43, and S44 as a control content of a modification. If YES in S39, the control proceeds to S40, in which it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has elapsed since the previous card was ejected. If it is determined that the game history data and the C-ID of the backup area (backup data storage unit) are deleted, a process is performed in S43. Further, after S42, in S45, a notification that the players are the same is transmitted to the CU. In addition, as a control content of a modification, you may control to perform all the processes of S40, S43, S44 and the processes of S45, S47.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, processing when the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted recording medium (card) is consumed will be described. In the process of FIG. 47, the prepaid balance is “1000”, and the current number of points is “10”. Note that when the card is inserted into the CU and the score = 10 is recorded on the inserted card, the pseudo ball 124 is not moved (the condition is that the pseudo ball 124 is moved and detected). It may be displayed immediately as the number of points = 10).

  First, a command with no addition request, OFF during addition display, SQN = n, C-ID, addition request number p = 0, and subtraction request number p = 0 is transmitted from the CU to the S units. In response to this, the S units receive SQN = n + 1, C-ID, number of points = 10, number of credits = 0, number of additions p = 0, number of subtractions p = 0, number of subtractions c = 0, number of subtractions. A response indicating that c = 0 game is possible is returned.

  On the other hand, CU lends for 500 yen, that is, 25 points by one lending operation. When the lending button (lending button) 321 is pressed in the CU, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, and balance = 1000 are backed up. At this stage, since the pseudo ball 124 is not detected, the balance consumption and the score are not determined yet.

  Then, the CU transmits, to the S units, commands of addition request present, ON during addition display, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, number of addition requests p = 25, and card balance = 500. In response to this, the LSI 117 drives the adding pseudo ball unit 120 to detect the adding balls p = 25 pseudo balls 124, and then sends a display control command including the number of points 35 to the display effect control board 90. Send. In response, the display effect control board 90 causes the display 51 to display a screen on which the score 35 is being added.

  Next, S units back up SQN = n + 2, C-ID, pre-addition number p = 0, pre-subtraction number p = 0, pre-addition number c = 0, pre-subtraction number c = 0, and create a response After that, the counter values of the addition number p, the subtraction number p, the addition number c, and the subtraction number c are cleared to 0, and the addition request number p (= 25) is added to the current number of points 10 to 35. Update the number of points.

  Then, as an operation response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, score = 35, addition number = 0, subtraction number = 0, a response indicating that the game is possible is returned.

  In the CU that has received it, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, the number of points = 10 (number of points before update) +25 (number of addition requests p) +0 (number of additions p) −0 (number of subtractions p) = 35 and the number of credits = 0 (number of credits before update) +0 (addition request number c) +0 (addition number c) −0 (subtraction number c) = 0 and backup, and addition number p total = 0, subtraction number p total = 0, addition number c accumulation = 0, and subtraction number c accumulation = 0.

  Eventually, when the display of the point addition on the CU side is completed, as shown in FIG. 78, an operation instruction command including OFF during addition display is transmitted from the CU side to the S platform side.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the process at the time of replay which consumes a medal is demonstrated. In FIG. 48, the stored medal specified by the inserted recording medium (card or the like) is “1000”, and the initial score is “0”. The replay process in FIG. 48 is similar to the process at the time of consumption of the balance shown in FIG.

  On the CU side, when a player's own game recording medium (member card or the like) is inserted and there is a stored medal specified by the card, the SQN = n + 2, C-ID, number of holding points = 0 (number of points before update), number of addition requests p = 25, number of subtraction requests p = 0, medal saving = 1000, number of credits = 0, number of addition requests c = 0, subtraction request The number c = 0 is backed up.

  When there is a stored medal corresponding to the inserted card when the card is inserted into the CU (the number of stored medals> 0), the number of stored medals is displayed on the CU or S units. Also good.

  Then, the CU transmits a command including an addition request, ON during addition display, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, the number of addition requests p = 25, and the number of subtraction requests p = 0 to the S units as operation instructions. In response to this, the LSI 117 drives the adding pseudo ball unit 120 to detect the adding request number = 25 pseudo balls 124, and then the LSI 117 issues a display control command including the number of points 25 to the display effect control board 90. Send to. In response to this, the display effect control board 90 causes the display 51 to display a screen on which 25 points are being added.

  Other processes are the same as those in FIG. As described above, the consumption of stored medals is determined by the CU alone when the re-play button 319 is pressed without waiting for the response of the operation response from the S units, and the score is from the S units. Wait for the response of the operation response of and confirm.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the processing of subtracting the number of points (wagon service etc.) according to the instruction on the CU side will be described. In the amusement hall, a wagon service is provided in which the player's own points are consumed and drinks are provided to the player. When the player receives such a wagon service, the player touches the display 312 (see FIGS. 96 to 100) and places a wagon order so that the order content ordered by the player is a card unit. 3 IR photosensitive unit 320 is input as an infrared signal to a remote control possessed by a shop clerk.

  The amusement hall clerk performs a wagon service according to the contents of the order entered on the remote control. FIG. 49 shows a case where a wagon order that consumes “300” used points is generated in a state where the player has “1000” points and “10” credits. When a wagon order occurs, the CU performs a process of backing up “300”, which is the number of points used when the wagon order is generated, as SQN = n + 2, C-ID, addition request number p = 0, and subtraction request number p. . At this stage, the CU does not actually subtract 300 from the score, but simply backs up “300” as the subtraction request number p. Then, from the CU to the S units, the subtraction request is present, subtraction display is ON, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, the number of addition requests p = 0 and the number of subtraction requests p = 300, the number of credits = 10, the addition request Commands with number c = 0 and subtraction request number c = 0 are transmitted.

  Receiving this, the S units determine whether or not the value of the score counter stored therein is equal to or greater than the subtraction request number p. This determination is executed by the LSI 117. In FIG. 49, it is assumed that the value of the score counter is equal to or greater than the subtraction request number p. In the S units, when the value of the score counter is equal to or larger than the subtraction request number p, the subtraction pseudo ball unit 121 is driven to move the pseudo ball corresponding to the subtraction request number 300. Thereafter, a display device control command including ON during subtraction display and the number of subtraction requests = 300 is transmitted from the LSI 117 to the display effect control board 90. In response to this, the display effect control board 90 displays on the display 51 that 300 is being subtracted as a score (during subtraction display). Also, the score is updated to “700” obtained by subtracting the subtraction number 300 from the current score 1000.

  Further, the S unit sends a subtraction rejection OFF, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, the number of current points = 700, the number of additions p = 0, the number of subtractions p = 300, the number of credits = 10, the number of additions c to the CU as an operation response. = 0, the number of subtractions c = 0, and a game ready response is returned. The S units back up SQN = n + 3, C-ID, pre-addition number p = 0, pre-subtraction number p = 300, pre-addition number c = 0, pre-subtraction number c = 0, and addition number p, The counter values of the subtraction number p, the addition number c, and the subtraction number c are cleared to zero.

  Then, the CU calculates SQN = n + 3, C-ID, score number = 1000 (number of score points before update) +0 (number of additions p) −300 (number of subtractions p) = 700, and corrects the score number to “700”. This is backed up together with SQN = n + 3. Thus, the subtraction of the number of points is determined only after waiting for the response of the operation response from the S units.

  Further, the CU backs up C-ID, the addition number p accumulation = 0, the subtraction number p accumulation = 0, the addition number c accumulation = 0, and the subtraction number c accumulation = 0.

  On the other hand, when the S units determine that the value of the score counter stored therein is less than the subtraction request number p, the S units do not perform the subtraction of the score according to the subtraction request number p. . In this case, the S platform returns an operation response indicating that the subtraction rejection is ON to the CU as an operation response. As a result, the CU is notified that the points have not been subtracted based on the subtraction request because the S units refused the subtraction request.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50, processing when a big bonus occurs during a game will be described. In FIG. 50, the initial number of points is 1000, the number of credits is 14, and a big bonus is generated while an operation instruction and an operation response are being transmitted and received between the S units and the CU in the game. The state is shown.

  First, in the CU, SQN = n and C-ID are backed up, and a command of no addition request, no subtraction request, SQN = n, and C-ID is transmitted as an operation instruction from the CU to the S units. In response to the S units, a 3BET game has started. As a result, in S units, SQN = n + 1, the previous addition number c = 0, and the previous subtraction number c = 3 are backed up, and the credit number = 14 + 0 (addition number) −3 (subtraction number) = 11 is calculated, Update the number of credits to 11. Further, after the response is created, the counter values of the addition number c and the subtraction number c are cleared to zero.

  As described above, credits are consumed during the game, and points are consumed by conversion to credits.

  The S units have SQN = n + 1, the number of points = 1000, the number of credits = 11, the number of additions p = 0, the number of subtractions p = 0, the number of subtractions c = 0, the number of subtractions c = 3, and the game is possible. Then, a response of big bonus OFF is transmitted to the CU. As described above, the S units transmit not only the addition number p, the subtraction number p, the addition number c, and the subtraction number c, but also the number of points and the number of credits to the CU. As a result, the CU can determine whether or not the number of points and the number of credits stored in the S units respectively match the number of points and the number of credits managed by the CU.

Upon receiving the response of the operation response, the CU calculates the number of credits = 14 + 0−3 = 11 and backs up 11 as the number of credits, and backs up the addition number c total = 0 and the subtraction number c total = 3.
As for the score, the number of score = 1000, the added number p accumulated = 0, and the subtracted number p accumulated = 0 is backed up.

  While the transmission / reception of the operation instruction command and the operation response response is repeatedly executed, a big bonus occurs in the S units, and the credit-related information includes the number of points = 1000, the number of credits = 25, and the number of additions. It fluctuates to c = 14 and the subtraction number c = 0. Then, a big bonus win is generated at the S units and the big bonus starts. For example, 15 points are awarded to the player by winning the small role in the big bonus. Then, S units back up SQN = n + N + 1, the number of previous additions = 15, the number of previous subtractions = 0, and the number of credits is added until the number of credits becomes 26. Specifically, the addition number c is added to the credit number up to 15. The number of credits = 11 + 15 (addition number) = 26 is calculated, and the number of credits is updated to 26.

  Further, after the response is created, the counter values of the addition number p, the subtraction number p, the addition number c, and the subtraction number c are cleared to zero. Furthermore, as for the S units, SQN = n + N + 1, the number of points = 1000, the number of additions p = 0, the number of subtractions p = 0, the number of credits = 26, the number of additions c = 15, the number of subtractions c = 0, the game is possible The response of the big bonus ON is transmitted to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU detects that a big bonus has been won and the big bonus has started. Further, the CU calculates SQN = n + N + 1, the number of credits = 11 + 15 (addition number c) = 26, corrects the credit number to 26 and backs up, and the addition number c total = 15, subtraction number c total = 0 Back up.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, a process in the case where it is detected that credits are exhausted while playing with S cars will be described. The initial number of credits = 6. First, the CU backs up SQN = n, C-ID, number of addition requests = 0, and number of subtraction requests = 0, and, as operation instructions, no addition requests, no subtraction requests, and SQN = N command is transmitted to S units. In S units, for example, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, pre-added number p = 0, pre-subtracted number p = 3, pre-added number c = 0, pre-subtracted based on the fact that 3 bets are set. The number c = 3 is backed up. After the response is created, the counter values of the addition number p, the subtraction number p, the addition number c, and the subtraction number c are cleared to zero.

  Then, S units have SQN = n + 1, C-ID, number of points = 106, number of credits = 3, number of additions p = 0, number of subtractions p = 0, number of subtractions c = 0, number of subtractions c = 3. Send a game ready response to the CU. In the CU, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, number of points = 6 + 0-3 = 3 is calculated and then the number of credits is corrected and backed up, and the addition number p total = 0, subtraction number p total = 0, addition The number c accumulated = 0 and the subtraction number c accumulated = 3 are backed up.

Thereafter, the exchange of commands and responses continues for a while.
Thereafter, when a game in which the bet number 3 is further set is started on the S units, the subtraction number = 3. As a result, the number of credits = 3-3 = 0. At the stage where the number of credits = 0, no credit is detected in S units. That is, the LSI 117 determines that the remaining credit amount is equal to or less than the number necessary for setting the betting amount based on the value of the credit number counter stored in itself. At this stage, the LSI 117 controls the bet number operation invalid state (game prohibition state) to prohibit the start of a new game. Specifically, a BET impossible signal for notifying prohibition of setting of the betting amount is transmitted from the LSI 117 to the main control board 116. In response to this, the main control board 116 invalidates the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6. Note that if the game is being executed when no point is detected, that is, if the variable display device is variably displayed, the S units continue the variable display game and prohibit the start of the next game.

  In the CU, SQN = n + N, C-ID, the number of addition requests p = 0, the number of subtraction requests p = 0, the number of addition requests c = 0, the number of subtraction requests c = 0 are backed up. A command with no subtraction request, C-ID, and SQN = n + N is transmitted to the S units.

  In S units, C-ID and SQN = n + N + 1 are backed up, and the pre-addition number p = 0, the pre-subtraction number p = 0, the pre-addition number c = 0, the pre-subtraction number c = 3, and the subtraction number c After creating a response including “= 3”, the counter values of the addition number p, the subtraction number p, the addition number c, and the subtraction number c are cleared to zero.

  Then, S units have SQN = n + N + 1, C-ID, holding point = 106, credit number = 0, addition number p = 0, subtraction number p = 0, addition number c = 0, subtraction number c = 3. A game prohibition operation response is transmitted to the CU. This motion response is “update information that can identify the amount of change identified between the time when the first motion response is transmitted and the bet number operation invalid state”.

  In response to this, the CU calculates the number of credits = 3 + 0-3 = 0, corrects the number of credits to 0, backs up, and backs up SQN = n + N + 1, C-ID. Then, the subtraction number p total = 0, the addition number c total = 0, and the subtraction number c total = 6.

  In this way, the main management of the number of points and credits is performed by the CU, but the number of points and credits on the S side are only determined when determining whether or not to perform the game prohibition control (betting number setting prohibition control). Use. Thereby, compared with the case where game prohibition control is performed based on the number of points and credits managed and stored by the CU, game prohibition control in accordance with the fluctuation of the score and credits can be performed in real time.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, processing when a card return operation is performed will be described. When the return button 322 is pressed at the stage when an operation instruction is sent from the CU to the S unit in response to an operation instruction from the S unit to the CU in the initial number of points = 500 and credits = 5 In addition, the CU transmits a command of prohibition request for prohibiting the game, no clear request, OFF during clear display, SQN = n + 2, C-ID command to the S units as the next operation instruction. In the S units, the bet number operation disabled state (game prohibition state) in which the bet number cannot be set is controlled according to the prohibition request presence instruction included in the command. Thereafter, a weight corresponding to a predetermined time equal to or longer than one game regulation time (for example, 4.1 seconds) is provided. The predetermined time is, for example, 10 seconds. During this wait time, polling is continued between the S units and the CU. By providing the wait time in this manner, the game result is fixed when the game has already started at the stage of receiving the prohibition request command from the CU (when the variable display device is variably displayed). This prevents the card from being returned before.

  During this polling, a sequence is used in which data indicating that preparation is in progress is repeatedly transmitted from the S units to the CU, while a prohibition request is repeatedly transmitted from the CU to the S units. May be.

  Alternatively, during this polling, data indicating that preparation is in progress is sent once from the S unit to the CU, while the CU has agreed to be in preparation to the S unit. A sequence may be adopted in which the indicated data is transmitted once, and thereafter, an operation instruction not including any instruction is repeatedly transmitted from the CU until the game ends.

  Alternatively, during this polling, a sequence may be adopted in which data indicating prohibition rejection is transmitted from the S units to the CU, while a prohibition request is repeatedly transmitted from the CU to the S units.

  Then, when the wait time has passed, the S units have SQN = n + N + 1, C-ID, number of points = 500, number of credits = 5, number of additions p = 5, number of subtractions p = 0, number of additions as operation responses. A response of c = 0, subtraction number c = 5, game prohibition, and game completion ON is transmitted to the CU.

  At this time, conversion from credits to points is performed, and the adding pseudo ball unit 120 is driven until the number of credits is exhausted, and converted to points.

  The number of points transmitted at this time is the final number of points at the end of the game. This sequence example shows a case where no winning occurs during the wait time, and neither the addition number nor the subtraction number changes due to the winning. If a winning occurs during the wait time, the credit amount corresponding to the winning is converted into a score, and the converted score is added and transmitted to the CU as an “addition number p”. become.

  Upon receiving this operation response, the CU backs up SQN = n + N + 2 and data with a clear request. Furthermore, according to “addition number p, subtraction number p, addition number c, subtraction number c” included in the operation response, the stored “number of points, total addition number p, total subtraction number p, credit number, Each data of “total addition number c, total subtraction number c” is updated. As a result, the score at the end of the game is determined on the CU side. As for the number of credits, since the final number of points is determined on the CU side as described above, it is not necessary to provide a point management function on the S unit side, and the cost of the S unit is suppressed as much as possible. Can do.

  The CU that backed up SQN = n + N + 2 and data with a clear request then sends a command of clear request, clear display ON, SQN = n + N + 2, and C-ID to the S units as operation instructions. . Thereafter, the CU displays on the display unit 312 a display indicating that the CU is being cleared (see FIG. 105 and FIG. 106). This “clear request is present” is data instructing the initialization of the number of S points.

  In the S unit, the LSI 117 transmits a display control command including ON during clear display included in the command transmitted from the CU to the display effect control board 90. In response to this, the display effect control board 90 displays a display screen that is being cleared (screen that is being cleared) on the display 51.

  In this example, the CU receives the input of a “signal for requesting completion of the game” based on the operation of the return button 322, and determines the number of points at the end of the game. However, the “signal for requesting the end of the game” is not limited to a signal based on the operation of the return button 322.

  For example, the CU is provided with a fingerprint authentication unit that authenticates a player's fingerprint. At the start of the gaming machine, authentication by the fingerprint authentication unit is mandatory, and the fingerprint information specified by the game card inserted into the CU by the player at the start of the game matches the fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit. The game is allowed as a condition. Furthermore, authentication by the fingerprint authentication unit is essential at the end of the game, and the game is ended on condition that the fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit matches the fingerprint information detected at the start of the game. In this case, the “signal for requesting game end” is fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit.

Alternatively, a button corresponding to the return button 322 may be provided on the S platform side.
In addition, when a game end request signal is input to the CU from a server or the like that manages the entire gaming machine installation island, the game may be ended regardless of whether or not the return button 322 is operated. In this case, the “game end request signal” is constituted by the game end request signal input from the server.

  Returning to the description of FIG. With clear request present, clear display, S units that have received the command of SQN = n + N + 2, C-ID shift and store the game history data and C-ID that are currently updated and stored in the storage area in the backup area .

  Next, as an operation response, the S units are clear rejection OFF not to reject the clear request, SQN = 0, C-ID, number of points = 0, number of credits = 0, number of additions p = 0, number of subtractions c = A response of 0, addition number p = 0, subtraction number c = 0, game prohibition, and game completion ON is transmitted to the CU. Then, the CU backs up SQN = 0, the number of holding points = 0, and the card recording holding point = 505. This card recording score = 505 is a value based on the score received immediately before the clear request.

  Thereafter, the CU records the score = 505 on the inserted card, discharges it, and returns it to the player. Then, as an operation instruction, a command including no prohibition request, no clear request, clear display OFF, SQN = m, and C-ID = 00h is transmitted to the S units. After that, S units have SQN = m + 1, C-ID = 00h, number of points = 0, number of credits = 0, number of additions p = 0, number of subtractions p = 0, number of additions c = 0, number of subtractions A response of c = 0, game prohibition, game completion ON, special prize OFF, and probability change OFF is transmitted to the CU. Instead of directly recording the card score on the card, the higher server may store the score in association with the card number of the card. In that case, the number of points stored by the CU and the card number of the inserted card are transmitted to the upper server, and the stored points are stored in association with the card number received by the upper server. The search is performed and the score is updated to a value corresponding to the score stored in the CU. The CU then ejects the card. In this way, both the recording of the card score directly on the card and the storing of the score in association with the card number in the host server are collectively referred to as “associating” the score with the card. To do.

  FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the slot machine when the game is interrupted.

  52 is similar to the processing of the card unit and the slot machine when returning the card in FIG. 52. The difference is that an interruption operation is performed instead of pressing the return button. This interruption operation is an operation for the player to temporarily suspend the game so that the player can finish the use, and the player calls a store clerk at the game hall and asks the store clerk to perform a remote control operation to interrupt the game. Then, the IR signal output from the remote controller is received by the IR light receiving unit 315, converted into an electronic signal, and input to the main control unit 323. In response to the prohibition request from the CU, the S platform prohibits the BET operation so that the game cannot be played. When a prohibition request is received while the reel is rotating, a wait time (for example, 10 seconds) is provided until the end of the game in the same way as described above. Game completion OFF is returned.

  In the case of this game interruption process, even if the CU detects the completion of the game, the clear request is not transmitted to the S units. As a result, in the S units, data (C-ID, score points, etc.) relating to the interrupted player is stored and held. Then, when the CU discharges the card, the card with 0 points is discharged and returned to the player. Thereafter, other players' games are prohibited during the interruption (see FIG. 46).

  With reference to FIG. 54, a process when the front door 2b is unlocked and opened will be described. First, as the first operation instruction, a command including an instruction for no front door opening request without a front door opening request is transmitted from the CU to the S units. Receiving it, the S platform returns a normal response including the score = 500 to the CU as an operation response.

  At this stage, for example, when a player calls an attendant at the game hall, for example, when a start operation is performed on the S units and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R start to rotate and a display trouble occurs on the display 51. In addition, the attendant at the game hall operates the remote controller that he / she owns to transmit an infrared signal to the IR photosensitive unit 320 for unlocking and opening the front door 2b.

  In response to this, the IR photosensitive unit 320 inputs a front door opening instruction signal included in the received infrared signal to the main control unit 323. Upon receiving the front door opening instruction input, the CU sends a command of prohibition request, front door opening request, and SQN = n + 2 to the S units to prohibit the game and open the front door as an operation instruction. To do.

  In response to this, the S units first control to a bet number operation invalid state (game prohibition state) in which a bet number cannot be set. As a result, the BET operation is prohibited. However, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R may already be rotating at that time, and the progress of the game itself is not stopped during such a game. In addition, the S platform prohibits the BET operation when receiving the above command, but does not immediately unlock the front door.

  For example, FIG. 54 shows a case where the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotating at the stage of being controlled to bet number operation invalid state (game prohibition state).

  Next, the S platform provides a wait time (for example, 10 seconds) of 4.1 seconds or more corresponding to one game regulation time. During this wait time, polling is continued between the S units and the CU. By providing the wait time in this way, the game result is confirmed when the game has already started at the stage when the command with the prohibition request is received from the CU (when the variable display device is being variably displayed). The front door 2b is prevented from being opened before the operation.

  Until the wait time elapses, the S units return, as a response, an operation response of prohibition rejection OFF and game prohibition to the CU. On the other hand, the CU continues to transmit a command with a prohibition request and a front door opening request.

  Eventually, the result of the game that has already progressed at the stage of being controlled to the bet number operation invalid state (game prohibition state) is determined. For example, it is assumed here that 10 points have been won. Then, as shown in FIG. 54, even in the bet number operation invalid state (game prohibition state), if there is a situation in which a score or credit should be added during that time, the number of additions from S units to the CU An operation response including (addition number c = 10 here) is transmitted. That is, the S units specify the change amount even when the points and credits change while the game is prohibited, and transmit the change amount to the CU. As a result, on the CU side, it is possible to manage the points and credits including the amount of change of credits and credits until the game result is determined after the game is prohibited.

  When the wait time elapses, the S platform (LSI 117) excites the front door opening solenoid 110 to unlock the front door 2b and open the front door 2b. In addition, the processing of turning on the bit 6 of Bit 6 during development of the front door in the gaming table state shown in FIG. 25, that is, “1”, is performed until the front door 2b is closed (the detection signal from the front door closing detector 112). Until it is input). Then, the S platform returns a response including the response during the front door opening rejection OFF, the C-ID, the game prohibition, and the front door development student as an operation response to the CU.

  In the CU, if the front door opening request command is not rejected, that is, if a response including a front door opening rejection OFF response is returned, it is determined that the front door 2b has been opened.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 54, according to the present embodiment, the command from the CU side does not affect the game progress in the closed state of the front door 2b as a specific example of the front member of the S platform. It can be released by.

  The S LSIs 117 determine whether or not any one of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is rotating when receiving a front door opening request command from the CU, If any one of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is rotating, after all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, or all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, You may make it cancel | release the obstruction | occlusion state of the front door 2b after the calculation time of a point and the credit addition number progress.

  In this case, the S units are information for instructing the lock means to release the lock during the game in which the symbols are variably displayed on the variable display devices (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) When the command is received, the control for releasing the lock by the lock means is delayed until the game is over and the game is prohibited.

  Alternatively, the S LSIs 117 determine whether a front door opening request is received from the CU, and determine whether or not the game is in progress. If the game is in progress, the S LSI 117 does not open the front door to the CU. On the other hand, a response indicating that the front door opening rejection is ON may be returned. That is, the S platform may accept a front door opening request only when the game is not being played when a command with a front door opening request is received from the CU.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, processing when the CU is powered on while holding the card and an abnormality in which the S units are not connected at that time occurs will be described. Since a communication interruption occurred between the CU and the S units while the card was inserted and a game was being played on the S units, a recovery request command was issued from the CU when the CU power was restarted. Sent to. However, since an unconnected abnormality of the S units has occurred, a response from the S units is not returned to the CU.

  Then, as described in FIG. 31, the CU retransmits the recovery request command to the S units. Nevertheless, if no response from the S units is returned, the second recovery request is retransmitted to the S units. If no response is returned from the S units for the second retransmission, at this stage, the CU determines that there is a communication error and displays on the display 312 that an error has occurred due to no connection. Execute the control. A device information request command may be transmitted instead of the recovery request.

  In this state, when the store clerk operates the remote controller for the CU and outputs an infrared signal forcibly ejecting the inserted card to the IR photosensitive unit 320, the forced ejection signal is sent to the main control unit 323. Entered. In response, the CU receives “scoring points” backed up by the CU and “scoring points (stored medals)” of the inserted card (including automatically converting from credits to points). In addition to clearing the “number of points”, “number of credits”, and “connection time” of the CU to 0, a command to eject the inserted card is output to the card reader / writer 327. Receiving it, the card reader / writer 327 discharges the taken card.

  Instead of recording the score directly on the card, the score may be stored in association with the card number of the card at the higher-level server. In that case, the number of points stored by the CU and the card number of the inserted card are transmitted to the upper server, and the stored points are stored in association with the card number received by the upper server. The search is performed and the score is updated to a value corresponding to the score stored in the CU. The CU then ejects the card.

  Thereafter, the CU transmits a recovery request command to the S units, and performs a resumption process of the connection sequence (see FIG. 43). The CU determines that the connection sequence is resumed in a state where a card is inserted (a state other than standby), and executes the connection sequence at the time of reconnection in FIG. 43 instead of the connection sequence at the time of power activation of FIG. To do. The number of additions p (for example, j) or the number of subtractions after the connection failure (see FIG. 43) is executed and the first operation response is transmitted by the S units after the S connection failure occurs. Processing when p (for example, r) has occurred is performed in the restart processing of FIG.

  Referring to FIG. 43, the CU receives the recovery response from the S units, thereby calculating the number of points = 0 + j (addition number p) + r (subtraction number p), and the number of points as the calculation result = j + r. Back up. Then, as described with reference to FIG. 43, SQN correction ON, holding point correction ON, and a communication start request including the SQN value and the holding point value are transmitted to the S units, Correct the number of credits.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, a process when an operation instruction from the CU (no requested operation) has not reached S units will be described. Here, a sequence from the start of one game by 3BET to the time when a winning occurs and 15 points are awarded to the player is illustrated.

  The S unit receives the operation instruction command from the CU, and stores the current points and credits current addition / subtraction number stored in the current points / credits related information storage area, and the previous points / credits related information storage. Backup clear processing for storing in the area as a pre-addition subtraction number for points and credits, and clearing the data of the current point and credit current addition subtraction numbers stored in the current point / credit-related information storage area to zero In the case of FIG. 56, the operation instruction from the CU has not reached the S units. Therefore, the above-described backup clear process is not performed on the S units. As a result, every time a bet number is set, a subtraction number c is generated, and each time an addition number c is generated due to winning, the data is stored in the current score / credit related information storage area as current score / credit related information. Add and store.

  First, it is assumed that at a certain time when the current number of points is 520 and the number of credits is 10, S units have returned an action response (both addition and subtraction numbers are 0) to the CU before the start of the 3BET game. Subsequently, the CU sends a command of no request and SQN = n to the S units as an operation instruction. However, since the command does not reach the S units, the response from the S units is not returned to the CU. As a result, as described with reference to FIG. 31, the CU transmits the same operation instruction command to the S units again. If this re-transmission does not reach the S units, the response from the S units is not returned to the CU, so the CU performs the second retransmission for the same operation instruction. When this retransmission is repeated, the value of SQN is maintained at n, and the addition update of “1” is not performed. In the meantime, the 3BET game starts and eventually ends.

  When the command reaches S units in the second retransmission, the 3 BET game has started and ended on the S units until the operation instruction is reached, as described above. In addition, three subtraction numbers c are generated, and fifteen additional numbers c corresponding to winnings are generated. Therefore, the S units store the data of the subtraction number c = 3 as the current credit-related information at the start of the game, and further store the data of the addition number c = 15 as the current credit-related information at the end of the game. Then, using the stored addition number c = 15 and subtraction number c = 3, the current credit number = 10 + 15−3 = 22 is calculated, and as an operation response, SQN = n + 1, credit number = 500, addition The response of the operation response of the number c = 15 and the subtraction number c = 3 is transmitted to the CU. There is no change in the number of points, and the addition number p = 0 and the subtraction number p = 0.

  In response to this, the CU calculates credit number = 10 + 15 (addition number c) −3 (subtraction number c) = 22, and performs processing for correcting and storing the credit number in 22. On the other hand, the number of score points = 520 + 0 (addition number p) −0 (number of subtractions p) = 520 is calculated, and the processing of storing the corrected score number in 520 is performed.

  In this way, the S units have the points that accompany the progress of the game while the state in which the operation instruction for instructing the transmission of the operation response cannot be received even after a predetermined period has elapsed since the first operation response was transmitted. The stored change amount is updated based on the credit change amount. Then, when an operation instruction is received, the updated score and credit change amount are transmitted as an addition number and a subtraction number.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the processing when the operation response from the S units (response to the absence of requested operation) has not reached the CU will be described. In the case shown in FIG. 57, since the command from the CU is input to the S units, the above-described backup clear processing is executed, but the value of the SQN of the command transmitted from the next CU to the S units. Since S is the same as the previous SQN value, the S units determine that the response of the operation response transmitted to the CU is a retransmission due to not reaching the CU, and the previous score / credit related information. The points and the current addition / subtraction numbers of credits as credit-related information are added to the data without clearing the data of the points and the credits prior addition / subtraction number to zero.

  In FIG. 57, a prize is generated after the first game with 3BET is started, 10 points are awarded to the player, and the operation response from the S machine is not yet received until the second game with 3BET is started. The sequence in case of reaching is illustrated.

  Specifically, assuming that the current number of points is 520 and the number of credits is 18, first, the CU transmits a command of no request and SQN = n to the S units as an operation instruction. In response to this, on the S platform side, a 3BET operation is detected, and at that stage, data of the addition number c = 0, the subtraction number c = 3, and the credit number = 15 are generated. In this case, the S units store the data of the addition number c = 0 and the subtraction number c = 3 in the pre-addition number c and the pre-subtraction number c, and store SQN = n + 1 as a backup, and an operation response command including these And a response of SQN = n + 1, the number of credits = 15, the addition number c = 0, and the subtraction number c = 3 is transmitted to the CU. In addition, the S units clear the data of the current score and credit current addition number and current subtraction number data as the current score / credit related information. At this time, the score, the addition number p, and the subtraction number p are not changed.

  However, since the response does not reach the CU, the CU transmits the same operation instruction as that of the previous time, that is, no request, SQN = n command to the S units.

  In response to this, a prize equivalent to 10 points has been generated on the S side, and at that stage, data of the addition number c = 10, the subtraction number c = 0, and the credit number = 25 are generated. Since the SQN of the operation instruction command received this time and the SQN of the operation instruction command received last time have the same value n, the S units are retransmitted because the response of the transmitted operation response has not reached the CU. The score as the current score / credit-related information for the previous score and credit-related information and without clearing the data of the previous number of credits and the previous number of credits without clearing the data. The data of the current credit addition number and the current subtraction data is added for backup. As a result, the pre-addition number c = 0 + 10 = 10 and the pre-subtraction number c = 3 + 0 = 3.

  After creating a response of the operation response composed of these data, the S units clear the data of the current addition number and the current subtraction number of points and credits to zero. Then, as an operation response, the S units transmit a response of SQN = n + 1, the number of credits = 25, the number of additions c = 10, and the number of subtractions = 3 to the CU. However, since this response also does not reach the CU, the CU transmits the same operation instruction (no request, SQN = n) command to the S units again.

  In response to this, the S unit detects that both the previous SQN and the current SQN are n and have not changed, and detects that the response of the operation response is a retransmission because it has not reached the CU. To do. At this stage, on the S platform side, a 3BET operation for starting the second game is detected, and data of the addition number c = 0, the subtraction number c = 3, and the credit number = 22 is generated.

  In this case, the S unit does not clear the data of the previous score and credit-related information and the data of the previous addition number and the previous subtraction number of the credit, and retains the data as the current score / credit-related information for these data. The data of the current addition number and the current subtraction number of points and credits are added and backed up. As a result, the pre-addition number c = 10 + 0 = 10 and the pre-subtraction number c = 3 + 3 = 6.

  After creating a response of the operation response composed of these data, the S units clear the data of the current addition number and the current subtraction number of points and credits to zero. Then, as operation responses, the S units transmit responses of SQN = n + 1, the number of credits = 22, the number of additions c = 10, and the number of subtractions c = 6 to the CU.

  Since the response of this operation response has reached the CU, the CU calculates the number of credits = 18 + 10−6 = 22, and performs processing for correcting and storing the credit number data in the number 22.

  As described above, when the previously transmitted operation response does not reach the CU, the S units do not transmit the next operation response after retransmitting the unreachable operation response, but the information that has not been reached. The information after adding up is transmitted as the next operation response. As a result, the gaming apparatus can reliably and efficiently collect information on the number of points and the number of credits. In the example of FIG. 57, the case where the operation response from the S units has not reached once has been described. However, if the operation response has not reached twice, the operation response transmitted for the third time is not included. , The total value obtained by adding the motion response information transmitted the second time is included.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58, processing when an operation instruction (addition request) from the CU has not reached S units will be described. The current number of points is 520, the number of credits is 6, the number of subtraction requests is p = 6 and the number of addition requests is c = 6 when there is an operation for debiting from the points to credits. A command including data of addition request present, SQN = n, subtraction request number p = 6 and addition request number c = 6 is transmitted to the S units.

  However, since the command does not reach the S units, the response from the S units is not returned to the CU. As a result, as described above, the CU retransmits the command with the same operation instruction. Since the retransmission command has not reached the S units, the corresponding response from the S units is not transmitted to the CU. Therefore, as described above, the CU performs the second retransmission for the command with the same operation instruction. This second retransmission command reaches S units. During the period when the operation instruction command from the CU has not yet reached, the S units add and subtract the addition / subtraction data to the current addition / subtraction number as the current point-related information without performing the above-described backup clear processing.

  Then, the S units calculate the current score number = 520−6 = 514, the credit number = 6 + 6 + 10 (current addition number) −3 (current subtraction number) = 19, and the current score data and Credit number data is set to 514 and 19, respectively, and a response of the operation response is created. Specifically, the S platform has a movement of a pseudo ball corresponding to the number of points = 6, and as an operation response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of points = 514, addition number p = 0, subtraction number p = 6 , The response of the credit number = 19, the addition number c = 16, and the subtraction number c = 3 is transmitted to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates the score number = 520−6 = 514 and the credit number = 6 + 6 + 10−3 = 22, and stores the score data in the 514 and the credit number data in the 22 after modification.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, a process when the operation response from the S units (response to the addition request) has not been reached will be described. Here, a case will be described in which an operation for using a game as a withdrawal from credits to credits is performed and a 10-point addition request c is generated with an initial score of 520 and credits = 6. In addition, here is a sequence in the case where a prize is awarded after the first game with 3BET has started on the S platform, and then 10 points are awarded after the second game with 3BET has started. Illustrate.

  First, the CU transmits, as operation instructions, commands of “addition requested”, “SQN = n”, “subtraction request number p = 10”, and “addition request number c = 10” to the S units. On the S side, the subtraction number c = 3 is generated to start the first game with 3 bets. Therefore, on the S side, the added number is used as the stored current score / credit related information. The data of p = 0, subtraction number p = 10, addition number c = 10, subtraction number c = 3, and SQN = n + 1 are back-up stored in the previous score / credit related information storage area, and the number of score = 520− 10 = 510, the number of credits = 6 + 10−3 = 13 are calculated, and the number of points = 510 and the number of credits = 13 are stored.

  Then, after creating the response of the operation response, the S units clear the stored data in the current score / credit related information storage area to 0, and as the operation response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of points = 510, addition The response of the number p = 0, the subtraction number p = 10, the credit number = 13, the addition number c = 10, and the subtraction number c = 3 is transmitted to the CU.

  However, since the response did not reach the CU, the CU retransmits the same operation instruction command to the S units. At the time of the retransmission, the SQN having the same value n as the previous time is transmitted to the S units without updating the SQN by adding “1”.

  In S units, the command is received and SQN is the same n value as the previous time, so it is detected that the transmitted response is retransmission due to not reaching the CU, and is subtracted from the received command. Although the number of requests p = 10 and the number of requests for addition c = 10 are included, the points are not added and updated based on the command. That is, the addition update according to the addition request is not executed twice.

  On the S side, a subtraction number c = 3 is generated at that stage in order to start the second game with 3 bets. Therefore, on the S side, the previous score / credit related information storage area is stored. The data stored in the current score / credit related information storage area, that is, the addition number c = 0 and the subtraction number c = 3 are added to the previously stored previous score / credit related information, and stored. Then, the number of score points = 510 + 0−0 = 510 and the number of credits = 13 + 0−3 = 10 are calculated and stored after correcting the number of score points to 510 and the credit number to 10.

  After that, the S units create a response of the operation response. Specifically, as an operation response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of points = 510, number of additions p = 0, number of subtractions p = 10, number of credits = 10, number of additions c = 10, number of subtractions c = 6 Is sent to the CU as a response.

  Since this response also did not reach the CU, the CU performs a second retransmission of the command with the same operation instruction.

  In S units, retransmission detection is performed in the same manner as described above, and the subtraction request number p = 10 and the addition request number c = 10 are received, but the addition update is not performed, and the addition update according to the addition request is executed twice. Do not do. In addition, at this stage, the addition number c = 10 is generated by winning the second game on the S platform side. Therefore, on the S platform side, similarly to the above, storage in the previous score / credit related information storage area, calculation of the score and credit, generation of response, and clearing of the current score / credit related information storage area to 0 were performed. Later, as an operation response, a response of addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, the number of points = 510, the number of additions p = 0, the number of subtractions p = 10, the number of credits = 20, the number of additions c = 10, and the number of subtractions c = 6 Send to CU. Since this response has reached the CU, the CU calculates the score = 520 + 0−10 = 510, the number of credits =, corrects the score to 549, and stores it.

  As described above, when the S units receive the command including the addition request number data transmitted from the CU, the SQN value included in the command is the same as the SQN value of the previous command. Determines that it is a re-transmission, does not determine that it is an additional addition request, does not update the points, and does not perform double execution of the addition update according to the addition request.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a process when the operation instruction (subtraction request) from the CU does not reach the S units will be described. An explanation will be given of a case where the credit adjustment button operation is generated with the initial number of points = 520 and the number of credits = 8. First, the CU transmits, to the S units, commands of subtraction request presence, SQN = n, addition request number p = 8, and subtraction request number c = 8 as operation instructions. However, since the command did not reach the S units, the response from the S units is not returned to the CU. Therefore, the CU transmits the same operation instruction command to the S units again. Since this re-send command has not reached the S units, the response from the S units is not returned to the CU. Therefore, the CU performs a second retransmission of the same operation instruction command. This second retransmission command reaches S units.

  In the S unit, during the period in which the operation instruction command from the CU has not yet reached, the current / credit score related information storage area each time the score and the credit addition number and the subtraction number are generated, as in the processing of FIG. The data is stored in For example, in FIG. 60, it is assumed that the addition number c = 10 and the subtraction number c = 0. Then, at the stage when the third operation instruction command is finally input to the S units, the score = 520−0 + 8 = 528, the number of credits = 8−8 + 10 = 10 is calculated, and the score = 528, the number of credits = 10 is stored. Then, as an operation response, a response of subtraction rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of points = 528, addition number p = 8, subtraction number p = 0, credit number = 10, addition number c = 10, subtraction number c = 8 To the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates a score = 520−10 + 0 = 510, the number of credits = 8−8 + 10 = 10, stores the score in 510, and modifies the credit in 10 and stores it.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, processing when the operation response from the S units (response to the subtraction request) has not reached the CU will be described. Here, a sequence in the case where a winning in which 10 points are awarded after the start of the 3BET game on the S side is illustrated.

  A case will be described in which the credit check button operation occurs assuming that the initial number of points is 520 and the number of credits is 8. First, the CU transmits, to the S units, commands of subtraction request, SQN = n, addition request number p = 8, and subtraction request number c = 8 as operation instructions. Therefore, on the S side, the data of the addition number c = 0, the subtraction number c = 0, and SQN = n + 1 as the current score / credit related information is backed up and stored in the previous score / credit related information storage area. At the same time, the number of points scored = 520-0 + 8 = 528 and the number of credits = 8-8 = 0 are calculated, and the number of points scored = 528 and the number of credits = 0 are stored.

  Then, after creating the response of the operation response, the S units clear the stored data in the current score / credit related information storage area to 0, and as the operation response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, the number of points = 528, addition The response of the number p = 8, the subtraction number p = 0, the credit number = 0, the addition number c = 0, and the subtraction number c = 8 is transmitted to the CU.

  However, since the response did not reach the CU, the CU retransmits the same operation instruction command to the S units. At the time of the retransmission, the SQN having the same value n as the previous time is transmitted to the S units without updating the SQN by adding “1”.

  In S units, the command is received and SQN is the same n value as the previous time, so it is detected that the transmitted response is retransmission due to not reaching the CU, and is subtracted from the received command. Although the number of requests c = 8 is included, the credit subtraction update based on the command is not performed. That is, the subtraction update corresponding to the subtraction request is not executed twice.

  In addition, since the resend of the command is detected in the S platform, the previous holding / credit related information already stored in the previous holding / credit related information storage area is held as in the process of FIG. The data stored in the point / credit related information storage area, that is, the addition number p = 8, the subtraction number p = 0, the addition number c = 0, and the subtraction number c = 8 are added and stored. The number of score points = 520 + 8 = 528 and the number of credits = 8−8 = 0 are calculated, the score is corrected to 528, and the credit number is corrected to 0 and stored.

  After that, the S units create a response of the operation response. Specifically, as an operation response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, the number of points = 528, the number of additions p = 8, the number of subtractions p = 0, the number of credits = 0, the number of additions c = 0, the number of subtractions c = 8 Are sent to the CU as a response.

  Since this response also did not reach the CU, the CU performs a second retransmission of the command with the same operation instruction.

  In the S units, retransmission detection is performed in the same manner as described above, and the subtraction request count c = 8 is received, but the subtraction update is not performed, and the subtraction update in response to the subtraction request is not performed twice. In the same manner as described above, after storing in the previous score / credit related information storage area, calculating the number of points and credits, generating a response, and clearing the current score / credit related information storage area to 0, the operation response As a result, the response of addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of points = 528, number of additions p = 8, number of subtractions p = 0, number of credits = 0, number of additions c = 0, number of subtractions = 8 is transmitted to the CU. Since this response has reached the CU, the CU calculates the score = 520−0 + 8 = 528 and the credit number = 8−8 = 0, and corrects and stores the score to 528 and the credit number to 0.

  As described above, when the S units receive the command including the addition request number data transmitted from the CU, the SQN value included in the command is the same as the SQN value of the previous command. Determines that it is a re-transmission, does not determine that it is an additional subtraction request, does not perform subtraction update of holding points, and does not perform double execution of subtraction update in response to the subtraction request.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62, a process when the S units send back an addition rejection response to the CU addition request will be described. Here, a sequence in the case where a credit conversion operation from a point has occurred on the CU side and a new game has not started after that is illustrated. Here, the initial number of points is 520 and the number of credits is 5.

  First, as an operation instruction from the CU, a command of no request, SQN = n, and C-ID is transmitted to the S units. In response to this, since there is no request for adding and subtracting points and credits on the S side, the number of points = 520 and the number of credits = 5 are calculated and the number of points, the number of credits, the number of additions p, the number of subtractions p Then, an operation response including the data of the addition number c, the subtraction number c, SQN = n + 1, and C-ID is returned to the CU. The CU calculates a score based on the motion response and corrects the score to 520 and the number of credits = 5.

  Next, the credit button 421 is pressed down, and the CU transmits, as operation instructions, commands with an addition request, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, the number of subtraction requests p = 10, and the number of addition requests c = 10 to the S units. . In the S unit, addition rejection ON for rejecting addition for some reason, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of points = 520, number of additions p = 0, number of subtractions p = 0, number of credits = 5, number of additions c = The response of the operation response including 0 and the subtraction number c = 0 is returned to the CU. In this case, the credit deduction process by the credit button operation is interrupted due to the rejection of addition. On the CU side, the score is updated to 520, and the balance remains at 1000 yen.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, a process when the S units return a clear rejection response to the CU clear instruction request will be described. A sequence in the case where 10 winnings are generated immediately after the return button is pressed is illustrated.

  When the return button 322 is pressed with the initial number of points = 520 and the number of credits = 10, as in the process of FIG. 52, the CU instructs the S units to have a prohibition request and no clear request. A command including the data is transmitted to the S units. In response to this, the S unit controls the bet number operation invalid state (game prohibition state) in which the bet number cannot be set, and returns an operation response of prohibition rejection OFF, game prohibition, and game completion OFF to the S unit. . Thereafter, a wait time of 4.1 seconds or more (for example, 10 seconds) corresponding to one game regulation time is provided. During this wait time, polling is continued between the S units and the CU. Then, when the wait time has elapsed, the S units transmit a game prohibition and game completion ON response to the CU as operation responses. As a result, the CU determines that the S units are in a game prohibited state.

  After that, the CU updates the points and credits, and then transmits a clear request presence and an operation instruction command during clear display to the S units. Receiving it, the S unit transmits a response of an operation response of clear rejection ON indicating that it cannot be cleared for some reason to the CU. The CU detects clear rejection by this response. Then, the CU transmits a command including no clear request as an operation instruction to the S units, and performs clear cancel processing. This clear canceling process is, for example, a process of displaying a message such as “Return operation is performed but canceling is not possible” on the display 312.

  Upon receiving this operation instruction, the S units determine that the clear process corresponding to the return operation has been canceled. The S units transmit an operation response including clear rejection OFF to the CU. Thereafter, normal polling of operation instructions and response is performed between the CU and the S platform.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, a process when the S units return a permission rejection response to the CU game permission request will be described. The initial number of points = 520, the number of credits = 10, and in a trouble state where some kind of game prohibition factor has occurred, an operation instruction command and an operation response response are sent to the CU and S units in a state where S games are prohibited. Suppose that the game prohibition factor is eliminated at the stage of “game elimination factor elimination” in FIG.

  At that time, the CU transmits a game permission request presence and a command of SQN = n + 2 to the S units as operation instructions. However, the S units return a command of an operation response including a permission rejection ON for rejecting a game permission request for some reason, that is, a state where the game cannot be continued, to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU repeatedly transmits a command including a game permission request to the S machines as an operation instruction until the game is permitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, a process when the S units return a prohibition rejection response to the CU game prohibition request will be described. The initial number of points is 520, the number of credits is 10, and a normal operation instruction command and a normal operation response response are transmitted and received between the CU and the S units. Assume that at the stage, a game prohibition factor occurs, for example, the return button 322 is operated. At this stage, the CU transmits a command of game prohibition request and SQN = n + 2 to the S units as operation instructions. In the S machine, the response of the operation response including the prohibition rejection ON for rejecting the game prohibition request for some reason is returned to the CU. In response to this, the CU detects a game prohibition refusal, and transmits a command including a game prohibition request to the S units as an operation instruction until the game is prohibited.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, a process when the S platform returns a front door opening rejection response to the CU front door opening request will be described. Here, a sequence in the case where a winning with 10 points is generated is illustrated.

  When the input of the opening instruction of the front door 2b is detected with the initial number of points = 520 and the number of credits = 10, although not shown in FIG. 66, as in the process of FIG. While the command for prohibition request and the request for opening the front door is transmitted to the S units, the S unit receives the command and disables the betting number operation (game prohibition state). A response including a game prohibition is transmitted to the CU. Similarly to the processing of FIG. 54, the S units provide a waiting time (for example, 10 seconds) of 4.1 seconds or more corresponding to one game regulation time. In the meantime, the number of additions = 10 occurs with the occurrence of a prize on the S platform side, and an operation response including the number of additions = 10 is transmitted from the S platform to the CU. After that, even during the wait time, a command with a prohibition request and a front door opening request is transmitted from the CU to the S units.

  However, in response to this, the S platform transmits a response to the operation response including the front door opening rejection ON which refuses to unlock and open the front door 2b for some reason.

  In response to this, the CU detects front door open refusal, sends a command including no front door open request to the S units as an operation instruction, and executes normal polling after performing front door open cancel processing. . The front door opening canceling process is, for example, a process of displaying a message such as “The front door cannot be opened” on the display 312.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power interruption occurs on the CU side after reaching an operation response related to addition / subtraction data. Here, a sequence in the case where a game is finished without winning after a new game with 3 BET has started after 10 points have been won is illustrated.

  With the initial number of points = 520, the number of credits = 1, and SQN = n, the CU transmits an operation instruction command to the S units. In response to this, on the S platform side, an addition number c = 10 is generated due to the occurrence of a prize. Therefore, as for the S platform, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, number of points = 520, addition number p = An operation response including addition / subtraction data of 0, subtraction number p = 0, credit number = 11, addition number c = 10, and subtraction number c = 0 is transmitted to the CU. When the operation response reaches the CU, the CU corrects the number of points and the number of credits to 520 and 11, respectively. If a power failure occurs in the CU at that stage, commands from the CU are no longer transmitted to the S units.

  In this case, as described with reference to FIG. 32, when the S unit has not received a command for 4 seconds or more, it determines that communication has been interrupted, makes a transition to an unconnected state, and disables a game (see “Play Stop” in the drawing). )). However, as shown in FIG. 67, the subtraction number c = 3 has already been set at the stage when the power interruption occurs, and a new game is started. In this case, the progress of the newly started game itself is not stopped. As a result, the subtraction data is stored in the current score / credit related information storage area based on the subtraction number c = 3, and accordingly, the score number = 52 + 0-0 = 520 and the credit number = 11 + 0-3 = 8 are calculated. The score = 520 and the credit = 8 are stored.

  Next, when the CU is powered off and started up, a communication control IC sequence is first performed as in the process of FIG. Next, after performing chip ID authentication between the CU and the S platform, a recovery request command and a recovery response are transmitted and received. In the response of this recovery response, the above-described recovery data stored on the S side is transmitted to the CU side.

  In the S unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, the previous addition number p = 0, the previous subtraction number p = 0, the previous subtraction number c = 0, the previous subtraction number c = 3, and the current Store the current number of points = 520, the current addition number p = 0, the current subtraction number p = 0, the credit number = 8, the current addition number = 0, the current subtraction number = 3, and send it as a recovery response to the CU. To do.

  The CU determines that the communication partner is the same, and that the SQN included in the recovery data on the S side matches the SQN stored on the CU side, and the recovery data sent in the recovery response is used as a basis. The process of correcting the backup value is performed. Specifically, the number of points is corrected to 520 (the number of points of the CU) +0 (current addition number p) −0 (current subtraction number p) = 520, the addition number p total = 0, and the subtraction number p total = 0. On the other hand, the number of credits = 11 (the number of CU credits) +0 (the current addition number c) −3 (the current subtraction number c) = 8, the addition number c cumulative + = 10, and the subtraction number c cumulative + = 3.

  In FIG. 67, an example has been described in which, after 10 points have been won, the game is ended without a win after a new 3BET game is started. However, immediately after the start of a new 3BET game, the “disconnection detection (play stop)” in FIG. 67 occurs, the bet number operation becomes impossible, and a winning may occur after that.

  In such a case, recovery data is generated including the added points due to winnings that occur after “cut detection (play stop)”. For example, if the winning is 10 points, “current number c = 10” and “current credit number = 8 + 10” for “current number” in “recovery data” in FIG.

  The recovery will be further described below. In any case, external output information (betting number setting information, reel start information, internal winning status information shown in FIG. When a change occurs in the third stop operation information, the first to third stop information, and the result confirmation information), recovery data including external output information corresponding to the change is generated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power interruption occurs on the CU side before reaching the operation instruction. Here, a sequence in the case where 10 winnings have occurred since the start of one game by 3BET is illustrated.

  S units having received the operation instruction command with the initial number of points = 520 and the number of credits = 4, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, number of points = 520, number of additions p = 0, number of subtractions p = 0, the number of credits = 1, the addition number c = 0, and the subtraction number c = 3 are transmitted to the CU. Accordingly, the CU corrects the number of points to be 520 and the number of credits = 1. Thereafter, the CU transmits a command of no request, SQN = n + 2, and C-ID to the S units as an operation instruction. If the command does not reach S units and a power failure occurs at the CU immediately thereafter, S units cannot receive commands for more than 4 seconds after sending the last response, as in the process of FIG. If it is determined that the communication has been interrupted, a transition is made to the unconnected state and the game is prohibited. However, as shown in FIG. 68, in the case where the game has already started at the stage where the power interruption occurs, the progress of the already started game is not stopped. As a result, in the example of FIG. 68, 10 points are won as a result of the already started game, and the addition number c = 10. Storage based on this added number is made in the current score / credit related information storage area, and accordingly, score = 520 + 0-0 = 520, credit = 4 + 10−3 = 11 is calculated, and the score = 520. The number of credits = 11 is stored.

  Next, when the CU is powered off and started up, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence, and the transmission and reception of the recovery request and the recovery response are performed similarly to the processing of FIG. With the stand.

  In S units, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, the previous addition number c = 0, the previous subtraction number c = 3, the current number of credits = 11, the current addition number c as the previous number of times = 10, the current subtraction number c = 0 is stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same, the operation instruction is not being transmitted, and the SQN on the CU side is advanced by one from the S side. Therefore, the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Perform processing. Specifically, the number of credits = 1 (the number of credits of the CU) +10 (current addition number c) −0 (current subtraction number c) = 11, the addition number c accumulation = 10, and the subtraction number c accumulation = 0.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before reaching an operation response related to addition / subtraction data. Here, a sequence in the case where 10 winnings have occurred since the start of one game by 3BET is illustrated.

  In FIG. 69, when the initial number of points is 520 and the number of credits is 4, the first operation instruction and the operation response are transmitted and received between the CU and the S units, and then the second operation instruction is transmitted to the S units. , SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of holding points = 520, number of additions p = 0, number of subtractions p = 0, number of credits = 1, number of additions c = 0, number of subtractions c = 0 from CU Has been sent to.

  However, the second operation response does not reach the CU, and the CU has been turned off before the CU executes the operation response process according to the operation response. In this case, the S units detect the disconnection of communication and enter the game prohibited state if no command is transmitted when 4 seconds elapse after the transmission of the second operation response.

  Next, when the CU is started after the power interruption is recovered, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence are executed, and the recovery request and the recovery response are transmitted and received, as in the process of FIG. With the stand.

  In the S unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, the previous addition number p = 0, the previous subtraction number p = 0, the previous addition number c = 0, the previous subtraction number c = 0, and the current As the number, the current number of points = 520, the current addition number p = 0, the current subtraction number p = 0, the credit number = 11, the current addition number c = 10, and the current subtraction number c = 0 are stored. Send to.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same and the SQN on the CU side is delayed by one from the S side, so that the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of points is 520 (the number of points of the CU) +0 (current addition number p) +0 (current addition number p) −0 (current subtraction number p) −0 (current subtraction number p) = 520, addition number It is corrected to p total = 0 (current addition number p) +0 (current addition number p) and subtraction number p total = 0 (current subtraction number p) +0 (current subtraction number p).

  On the other hand, the number of credits = 1 (the number of credits of the CU) +0 (the number of previous additions c) +10 (the number of current additions c) −0 (the number of previous subtractions c) −0 (the number of current subtractions c) = 11, the total of additions c == It is corrected to 0 (previous addition number c) +10 (current addition number c), subtraction c cumulative + = 0 (previous subtraction number c) +0 (current subtraction number c).

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the control contents when the communication counterparts do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 67 occurs. (A) shows a case where a CU is replaced with a new CU and becomes inconsistent, and (b) shows a case where S units are replaced with a new S unit and become inconsistent.

  For example, a power failure occurs due to a failure of a CU, and the failed CU is often replaced with a new CU. In the amusement hall, a plurality of CUs are aged by unit stockers. This aging is a standby state connected to a host server. FIG. 70 (a) shows a state in which the failed CU is replaced by the CU aged by the unit stocker, connected to the S unit, and restarted. In this case, it is determined that the connected party (S units) is different based on the device information response sent from the S units, and the recovery data of the S units is not used for correcting the points. In this case, since the S units display untransmitted data when the CU is not connected, if there is untransmitted data, the number of points on the card is manually corrected by the POS at the game hall. Specifically, the maintenance screen is displayed on the display S 51 on the S platform side so that unsent data to the CU can be confirmed. If unsent data is displayed, it is artificially performed by a game store clerk. Perform manual correction. This prevents the player from suffering a loss.

  Instead of the artificial manual correction, automatic correction may be performed under a certain condition as indicated by a broken line. A modification of this automatic correction will be described below.

  First, the CU receives a recovery response including the C-ID, and temporarily stores the C-ID. In that state, it waits for the card to be inserted, and when the card is inserted, the C-ID recorded on the card is read and sent as a recovery response with the C-ID of the inserted card. It is determined whether or not the C-ID matches, and if it matches, the following correction processing is performed.

Number of credits = 8, total number of additions c = 0, total number of subtractions c = 3
If the C-ID determination results do not match, a process of transmitting the current number of points included in the recovery response to the upper server 801 is performed. At that time, the C-ID included in the recovery data may also be transmitted to the upper server 801. Receiving it, the upper server 801 backs up the current number of points received in association with the C-ID. In the case where the determination results of the C-IDs do not match, the player is playing a game during a replacement operation in which the CU fails and is replaced with a new CU that is aged while the player is playing a game. This is a case where the continuation is given up and another player inserts a card to start the game after the replacement work is completed. In such a case, it is necessary to compensate for a loss for a player who has given up continuation of the game during the replacement work. A player who gives up the continuation of such a game causes the host server 801 to read the C-ID of the member card owned by the host server 801 and discharges it in association with the member card as a stored medal. And make it possible to exchange prizes. In addition, when a player who gave up continuation of the game leaves the game hall once and then leaves the game hall, the player who has left the game hall is present on the upper server 801 for several days so that the loss can be compensated. The number of points is backed up, and the player who has visited the store again causes the host server 801 to read the C-ID of the member card owned by the host server 801 and discharges the current number of points backed up in association with the member card. It may be possible to exchange prizes.

  The condition for automatically correcting the backup value may be that a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has not elapsed in addition to the C-ID matching determination. In other words, the work of replacing a failed CU with a new CU is completed in about 10 minutes. Therefore, after a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) in which the replacement work can be sufficiently performed, the card is inserted. Even if it is determined that the C-IDs coincide with each other after insertion, the backup data may not be automatically corrected.

  If the failed CU is a minor failure and can be communicated, the CU is returned to the unit stocker, and the number of points and C-ID together with the stocker ID are transmitted from the unit stocker to the upper server 801, and A new CU connected to the S unit transmits the score data and the like corrected based on the recovery data from the S unit to the upper server 801, and the upper server 801 collates the data such as both score points. You may control to confirm whether it corresponds. If they do not match, an abnormality determination is performed and a predetermined abnormality process such as abnormality notification is performed.

  Furthermore, instead of the CU performing data correction based on the recovery data transmitted from the S units, the recovery data may be downloaded from the upper server 801 and the CU may perform data correction. Specifically, the CU periodically transmits data such as the number of points and C-ID to the upper server 801, stores it in the upper server 801 as a backup, is replaced with a new CU, and is connected to the S units. When the C-ID included in the subsequent recovery response matches the C-ID recorded on the card inserted in the CU, the C-ID is transmitted to the upper server 801 and the C-ID Recovery data such as the number of points stored in backup corresponding to the ID may be downloaded and stored in the CU.

  FIG. 70 (b) shows a case where the S units are replaced with new ones after being powered off and connected. In that case, first, a startup process is performed, and a device information request, a device information response, an authentication request, an authentication response, a recovery request, and a recovery response are transmitted and received. Then, the CU determines that the S units of the connection partner are different based on the device information response, and does not use the recovery data of the S units for the correction of the score. The original S units of recovery data that was installed before the new S units were replaced are manually corrected by POS with the intervention of a game hall clerk.

  FIG. 71 shows the control in the case where the communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 68 occurs. Also in the control of FIG. 71, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 70 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  FIG. 72 shows the control in the case where communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 69 occurs. In the control of FIG. 72, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 70 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 73, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power interruption occurs on the CU side before the addition request is reached. Here, an example of a sequence from the start of one game by 3BET until a prize is generated and 10 points are awarded to the player is illustrated.

  Initial number of points = 0, number of credits = 3, prepaid balance is 1000 yen, normal operation instruction and normal operation response are transmitted / received between CU and S units, and addition number c = 0 generated between them The lending button 321 is pressed down when the number of credits = 0 based on the subtraction number c = 3.

  Then, the CU sets SQN = n + 2 and the number of addition requests p = 25, and transmits to S units a command including an addition request, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, and the number of addition requests p = 25 as operation instructions. If this command does not reach the S machines, the S machine detects a disconnection and puts it in a game prohibited state after 4 seconds have elapsed since the last response was sent and no command was received. For this reason, the rental request is canceled as a result without moving and detecting the pseudo ball. Even on the CU side, since the pseudo ball is not moved and detected, there is no change in the holding point.

  On the other hand, in the CU, as described with reference to FIG. 31, when there is no response from the S units when the command has not arrived, the response is transmitted after the same command is repeatedly transmitted and the second retransmission is performed. Is not returned, a communication abnormality (communication disconnection) is detected, and a reconnection sequence is started after 5 seconds.

  After the reconnection sequence is started, the CU and S units perform the execution of the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence, and the transmission and reception of the recovery request and the recovery response, as in the process of FIG.

  In the S unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, the previous addition number p = 0, the previous subtraction number p = 0, the previous addition number c = 0, the previous subtraction number c = 0, the current As the number, the current number of points = 0, the current addition number p = 0, the current subtraction number p = 0, the current credit number = 10, the current addition number c = 10, and the current subtraction number c = 0 are stored as a recovery response. Send to CU.

  In the CU, since the communication partner is the same and the SQN on the CU side is one more advanced than the SQN on the CU side, the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of points is corrected to 0 (the number of points of the CU) +0 (current number of additions) −0 (current number of subtractions) = 0, the addition number p total = 0, and the subtraction number p total = 0. On the other hand, the number of credits = 0 (the number of CU credits) +10 (current addition number c) −0 (current subtraction number c) = 10, addition number c cumulative = 10, and subtraction number c cumulative = 0.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power interruption occurs on the CU side before reaching the operation response to the addition request. Here, an example of a sequence in the case where a 10-point winning has occurred after the start of a 3BET game in the middle is shown.

  The initial number of points = 0, the number of credits = 3, and the prepaid balance = 1000 yen. After a normal operation instruction and a normal operation response are transmitted and received between the CU and the S units, the lending button 321 is pressed. Yes. Then, the CU sets SQN = n + 2, C-ID, the number of addition requests p = 25, and sends an operation request command with addition request, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, number of addition requests p = 25 to S units. Send.

  On the S side, the subtraction number c = 3 is generated in order to start the game with 3 bets. Therefore, on the S side, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, and the number of points as an operation response. = 25, addition number p = 25, subtraction number p = 0, credit number = 0, addition number c = 0, and subtraction number c = 3 are transmitted to the CU. If this response does not reach the CU and the power is cut off before the operation response process corresponding to this response is performed in the CU, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the S units thereafter. As described with reference to FIG. 32, in the case of S units, when a command cannot be received for 4 seconds or more, it is determined that communication has been interrupted, and a transition is made to an unconnected state and a game prohibited state is set. In addition, on the S side, the number of additions = 10 occurs due to the occurrence of a win during that time, the storage of the current point-related information storage area is updated, and the number of credits = 0 + 10 = 10 is calculated and the number of credits = 10 is stored. At this time, the number of points is still 25.

  Next, when the CU is started after the power interruption is recovered, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence are executed, and the recovery request and the recovery response are transmitted and received, as in the process of FIG. With the stand.

  In the S unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, the previous addition number p = 0, the previous subtraction number p = 0, the previous subtraction number c = 0, the previous subtraction number c = 3, and the current As a number, the number of current points = 25, the number of current credits = 10, the current addition number p = 25, the current subtraction number p = 0, the current addition number c = 10, and the current subtraction number c = 0 are stored as a recovery response. Send to CU.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same, and the SQN on the CU side is delayed by one from the S units, so that the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of points = 0 (the number of points of the CU) + 0 (the number of previous additions p) + 25 (the number of current additions p)-0 (the number of previous subtractions p)-0 (the number of current subtractions p) = 25, the number of additions The total p is corrected to 0 (pre-added number p) +25 (current added number p), and the subtracted number p total = 0 (pre-subtracted number p) +0 (current subtracted number p).

  On the other hand, the number of credits = 3 (the number of CU credits) +0 (the previous addition number c) +10 (the current addition number c) −3 (the previous subtraction number c) −0 (the current subtraction number c) = 10, the addition number c cumulative = It is corrected to 0 (previous addition number c) +10 (current addition number c), subtraction number c cumulative = 3 (previous subtraction number c) +0 (current subtraction number c).

  FIG. 75 shows the control in the case where the communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 73 occurs. Also in the control of FIG. 75, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 70 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  FIG. 76 is a diagram showing control in the case where the communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 74 occurs. Also in the control of FIG. 76, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 70 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 77, a description will be given of a recovery process performed when a power failure occurs on the CU side before the subtraction request is reached. Here, a sequence in the case where 10 winnings have occurred since the start of one game by 3BET is illustrated.

  Assuming that the initial number of points is 520 and the credit is 10, the normal operation instruction and the normal operation response are transmitted and received between the CU and the S units, and the credit number = corresponding to the subtraction number c = 3 generated during that time. When the subtraction request p of 300 is generated due to a wagon service request or the like at the stage of 7, the CU sets SQN = n + 2, the number of subtraction requests p = 300, and there is a subtraction request, SQN = n + 2, C-ID Then, the command of the subtraction request number p = 300 is transmitted to the S units.

  When this command does not reach the S units, the S unit detects a disconnection and puts it in a game prohibited state after 4 seconds have elapsed since the last response was transmitted and no command was received.

  On the other hand, in the CU, as described with reference to FIG. 31, when there is no response from the S units when the command has not arrived, the response is transmitted after the same command is repeatedly transmitted and the second retransmission is performed. Is not returned, a communication abnormality (communication disconnection) is detected, and a reconnection sequence is started after 5 seconds.

  After starting the reconnection sequence, the CU and the S unit perform the chip ID authentication sequence and send / receive the recovery request and the recovery response.

  After the reconnection sequence is started, the CU and the S unit perform transmission / reception of a device information request, a device information response, an authentication request, an authentication response, a recovery request, a recovery response,.

  In the S unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, the previous addition number p = 0, the previous subtraction number p = 0, the previous subtraction number c = 0, the previous subtraction number c = 3, and the current Current number of points = 520, current addition number p = 0, current subtraction number p = 0, credit number = 17, current addition number c = 10, current subtraction number c = 0 are stored, and CU is stored as a recovery response Send to.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same, and the SQN on the CU side is one more advanced than the SQN on the S unit side, so it is determined that the subtraction request has not been executed on the S unit, and has been transmitted as a recovery response A process for correcting the backup value based on the recovery data is performed. Specifically, the number of points is corrected to 520 (the number of points of the CU) +0 (current number of additions) −0 (current number of subtractions) = 520, the addition number p total = 0, and the subtraction number p total = 0.

  On the other hand, the number of credits = 7 (the number of credits of the CU) +10 (current number of additions) −0 (current number of subtractions) = 17, the number of additions c total = 10, and the number of subtractions c total = 0.

  As described above, the CU determines that the subtraction request is not executed in the S units based on the value of SQN, so that the subtraction request p of 300 is generated in the correction of the backup value accompanying the recovery process. Also, the subtraction request number p = 300 is not subtracted from the number of points.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before the operation response to the subtraction request is reached. Here, a sequence in the case where a 3 BET game is started after a winning with 10 points on the S platform side has occurred, and then a winning with 10 points is generated is illustrated.

  The initial number of points = 520 and the number of credits = 10, and normal operation instructions and normal operation responses are transmitted and received between the CU and S units, and the number of credits = 20 according to the addition number c generated during that time. At this stage, when 300 wagon service requests are generated, the CU sets SQN = n + 2 and the number of subtraction requests p = 300, and the operation instruction includes a subtraction request, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, subtraction request A command of a number p = 300 is transmitted to the S units.

  In response to this, on the S side, a subtraction number c = 3 is generated in order to start the game with 3 bets. Therefore, the S level is SQN = n + 3, C-ID, the number of points = 220, the addition number. A response of p = 0, subtraction number p = 300, credit number = 17, addition number c = 0, and subtraction number c = 3 is transmitted to the CU. However, if the response does not reach the CU and the power failure occurs before the operation response process corresponding to the response is executed in the CU, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the S units thereafter.

  As described with reference to FIG. 32, in the case of S units, when a command cannot be received for 4 seconds or more, it is determined that communication has been interrupted, and a transition is made to an unconnected state and a game prohibited state is set. In addition, 5 points have been won in the meantime, and accordingly, the data of the current score / credit related information storage area is updated, and accordingly, the number of score = 220 and the number of credits = 17 + 5 = 22 are calculated. The score = 220 and the number of credits = 22 are stored.

  Next, when the CU is started after the power interruption is recovered, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence are executed, and the recovery request and the recovery response are transmitted and received, as in the process of FIG. With the stand.

  In the S unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, the previous addition number p = 0, the previous subtraction number p = 300, the previous addition number c = 0, the previous subtraction number c = 3, and the current Current number of points = 220, current addition number p = 0, current subtraction number p = 0, current credit number = 22, current addition number c = 5, current subtraction number c = 0 are stored as a recovery response. Send to CU.

  In the CU, since the communication partner is the same and the SQN on the CU side is one delay behind the S units, it is determined that the S units have received the subtraction instruction, and the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response Based on the above, the backup value is corrected. Specifically, the number of points = 520 (the number of points of the CU) + 0 (number of previous additions p) + 0 (number of current additions p)-0 (number of previous subtractions p)-0 (number of current subtractions p) = 520, the number of additions The total p is corrected to 0 (pre-added number p) +0 (current added number p), and the subtracted number p total = 0 (pre-subtracted number p) +0 (current subtracted number p).

  On the other hand, the number of credits = 20 (the number of CU credits) +0 (the number of previous additions c) +5 (the number of current additions c) −3 (the number of previous subtractions c) −0 (the number of current subtractions c) = 22; It is corrected to 0 (previous addition number c) +5 (current addition number c), subtraction number c cumulative + = 3 (previous subtraction number c) +0 (current subtraction number c).

  Further, the CU transmits a communication start request command with a score correction ON, a score = 520, and a credit number = 22 to the S units. In response to this, the S units correct the number of points to 520 and the number of credits to 22, and store it.

  As described above, even when it is determined that the S units have received the subtraction instruction, the reason for performing the subtraction canceling process is that the S unit side that has received the subtraction instruction always performs the subtraction process in accordance with the subtraction instruction. There is a possibility that the subtraction is rejected on the S platform side. In the case where such subtraction is rejected on the S side, if the subtraction is confirmed on the CU side, there is a disadvantage that the remaining points and credits are negative. For this reason, subtraction cancellation is performed. As a result, when such a CU-side power interruption occurs, subtraction has been performed despite the fact that the remaining number on the S side is insufficient and the subtraction instruction should have been rejected. It is possible to prevent inconvenience that the points on the table side and the remaining number of credits become negative values.

  FIG. 79 shows the control in the case where the communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 77 occurs. Also in the control of FIG. 79, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 70 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  FIG. 80 shows the control in the case where communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 78 occurs. Also in the control of FIG. 80, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 70 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 81, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power interruption occurs on the CU side before the clear request is reached. Here, the sequence when the return button is pressed on the CU side and no winning has occurred is illustrated.

  In the sequence of FIG. 81, the number of points is 500 and the number of credits = 0 when the return button 322 for returning the inserted recording medium (card) is pressed. In FIG. 81, as in the process of FIG. 52, the CU transmits, to the S units, a command including data indicating that there is a prohibition request for prohibiting a game and no clear request as an operation instruction. In response to this, the S units control to a bet number operation invalid state (game prohibition state) in which a bet number cannot be set. Thereafter, a wait time of 4.1 seconds or more (for example, 10 seconds) corresponding to one game regulation time is provided. During this wait time, polling is continued between the S units and the CU. Then, when the wait time has elapsed, the S units have SQN = n + N, C-ID, the number of points = 500, the number of additions p = 0, the number of subtractions p = 0, the number of credits = 0, the number of additions as the operation response. A response of c = 0, subtraction number c = 0, game prohibition, and game completion ON is transmitted to the CU.

  Thereafter, the CU updates the number of points to 500 and the number of credits to 0, and then transmits a clear request present, clear display ON, SQN = n + N + 1, C-ID operation instruction command to the S units. However, when the command does not reach the S units, the S unit detects disconnection and enters the game prohibited state after 4 seconds have elapsed since the last response was transmitted and no command was received. .

  On the other hand, in the CU, as described with reference to FIG. 31, when there is no response from the S units when the command has not arrived, the response is transmitted after the same command is repeatedly transmitted and the second retransmission is performed. Is not returned, a communication abnormality (communication disconnection) is detected, and a reconnection sequence is started after 5 seconds.

  After the reconnection sequence is started, the CU and S units perform the execution of the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence, and the transmission and reception of the recovery request and the recovery response, as in the process of FIG.

  In the S unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + N, C-ID, the previous addition number p = 0, the previous subtraction number p = 0, the previous subtraction number c = 0, the previous subtraction number c = 0, and the current Current number of points = 500, current addition number p = 0, current subtraction number p = 0, current credit number = 0, current addition number c = 0, current subtraction number c = 0 are stored as a recovery response Send to CU.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same, and the SQN on the CU side is one more advanced than the SQN on the S side, so it is determined that the clear request has not arrived, and the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response is Based on this, the backup value is corrected. Specifically, the number of points is corrected to 500 (current number of points p) +0 (current number of additions p) −0 (current number of subtractions p) = 500, addition number p total = 0, and subtraction number p total = 0. On the other hand, the number of credits = 0 (current number of points c) +0 (current number of additions c) −0 (current number of subtractions c) = 0, addition number c total = 0, and subtraction number c total = 0.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 82, a description will be given of a recovery process in the case where a power interruption occurs on the CU side before the operation response to the clear request is reached. Here, a sequence in the case where a new game is not started on the S platform side and no winning has occurred is illustrated.

  In the sequence of FIG. 82, when the return button 322 for returning the inserted recording medium (card) is pressed, the number of points is 500 and the number of credits is 0. In FIG. 82, as in the process of FIG. 52, the CU transmits, to the S units, a command including data indicating a prohibition request with / without clear request for prohibiting a game as an operation instruction. In response to this, the S units control to a bet number operation invalid state (game prohibition state) in which a bet number cannot be set. Thereafter, a wait time of 4.1 seconds or more (for example, 10 seconds) corresponding to one game regulation time is provided. During this wait time, polling is continued between the S units and the CU. Then, when the wait time has elapsed, the S units have SQN = n + N, C-ID, the number of points = 500, the number of additions p = 0, the number of subtractions p = 0, the number of credits = 0, the number of additions as the operation response. A response of c = 0, subtraction number c = 0, game prohibition, and game completion ON is transmitted to the CU.

  Then, the CU sets SQN = n + N + 1, and sends a command including clear request, clear display ON, SQN = n + N + 1, and C-ID as operation instructions to the S units.

  In response to this operation instruction, the S platform clears the points and credits to 0 to make points = 0 and credits = 0, and clears SQN to 0 and sets SQN = 0. As the operation response, a response of SQN = 0, C-ID, the number of points = 0, the number of additions p = 0, the number of subtractions p = 0, the number of credits = 0, the number of additions c = 0, and the number of subtractions c = 0 is CU. Send to. If this response does not reach the CU and the power is cut off before the operation response processing corresponding to the response is performed in the CU, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the S units thereafter. As described with reference to FIG. 32, in the case of the S unit, when the command cannot be received for 4 seconds or more, it is determined that the communication is disconnected, and the state shifts to the unconnected state.

  Next, when the CU is started after the power interruption is recovered, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence are executed, and the recovery request and the recovery response are transmitted and received, as in the process of FIG. With the stand.

  In the S units, as recovery data, SQN = 0, the previous addition number p = 0, the previous subtraction number p = 0, the previous addition number c = 0, the previous subtraction number c = 0, and the current number, The current number of points = 0, the current addition number p = 0, the current subtraction number p = 0, the credit number = 0, the current addition number c = 0, and the current subtraction number c = 0 are stored and transmitted as a recovery response to the CU.

  Since the SQN on the S side is 0, the CU determines that the clear request has arrived on the CU side, and that the CU side has executed the clear process, and the backup value is based on the recovery data sent in the recovery response. The process which corrects is performed. Specifically, the number of points = 500 (CU backup value) + 0 (current addition number p)-0 (current subtraction number p) = 500, the addition number p total = 0 (current addition number p), the subtraction number p total = 0 (current subtraction number p). On the other hand, the number of credits = 0 (CU backup value) +0 (current addition number c) −0 (current subtraction number c) = 0, addition number c total = 0 (current addition number c), subtraction number c total = 0 ( The current subtraction number c) is corrected.

  As described above, the S units back up the data such as the addition number transmitted to the CU immediately before the communication failure state occurs even when the communication disabled state occurs. Then, the S units transmit recovery data including data transmitted to the CU immediately before the occurrence of the communication disabled state and data such as an addition number newly generated after the transmission to the CU during the recovery process. The recovery data includes the SQN of the data transmitted to the CU immediately before the occurrence of the communication disabled state. The CU compares the SQN with the SQN stored in the CU before the CU receives the data (update information transmitted immediately before) sent by the S units to the CU immediately before the communication failure occurs. It becomes possible for the CU to determine whether or not a communication disabled state has occurred.

  If the game data further changes between the communication disabled state and the game prohibited state (disconnection detection (play stop)), the S units further store the stored value based on the changed data. Update.

  FIG. 83 shows the control when the communication counterparts do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 81 occurs. In the control of FIG. 83, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 70 is performed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  FIG. 84 shows the control in the case where communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 82 occurs. Also in the control of FIG. 84, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 70 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  FIG. 85 is a diagram showing transition of screens displayed on the CU side and the S side corresponding to the control operation when the card shown in FIG. 45 is inserted. 85, the screen shown on the left side of “CU” is the screen of the display unit 312 of the CU. On the other hand, the screen shown on the right side of “S” is the screen of the S display devices 51. Referring to FIG. 85, in a state where no card is inserted, an operation instruction command without an operation request is transmitted from the CU to the S unit during standby, and a response of holding point = 0 is received as an operation response. A response is sent from the S unit to the CU.

  During transmission / reception of such commands and responses, as shown in [Normal screen (no card inserted)] in the upper left of FIG. 85, “None” in the column of “Card type” is displayed on the CU display 312. “0 points” is displayed in the title column of “Points”. In addition, as shown in [Normal screen (no card inserted)] in the upper right of FIG. 85, the S display units 51 have “0 points” in the title column of “scoring” and “card balance” title columns. “0 yen” is displayed in the credit field, and “0 points” is displayed in the credit column. Note that the display 312 and the display 51 display various data indicating the S game state at the present time. For example, in FIG. 85, the number of starts, the number of BBs, the number of RTs, and the number of highest consecutive chunks are displayed, and the number of starts between BBs is displayed as a bar graph.

  The number of start times is the number of times the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are started, that is, the number of games. The number of BBs is the number of times that a BB winning has occurred. The RT number is the number of times when RT (Replay Time) is reached. The maximum number of consecutive Changs is the maximum number of consecutive times that a BB prize is generated within a predetermined number of games after the end of BB. The number of starts between BBs is the number of games between a certain BB and the next BB.

  The display unit 312 on the CU side displays a set value amount display section (“credit point amount setting” in FIG. 85) indicating how many loan amounts are deducted from the prepaid balance in one lending operation, Amount display section (“card balance” in FIG. 85), replay score display section (“replay score” in FIG. 85), saved medal count display section (“stored medal” in FIG. 85), lending rate A display section (“rental point” in FIG. 85) is provided.

  Further, the display unit 312 on the CU side is configured by a touch panel, and display items of “device information”, “setting change”, and “order menu” are displayed on the upper left of each display screen, and one of them is selected. By touching the screen, the display screen is changed to the touch-operated display screen. In FIG. 85, a screen in a state where “device information” is selected is displayed.

  In addition, the display unit 312 on the CU side is provided with a selection operation display section of “return”, “rental”, “replay”, and “call” in the lower part of each display screen. A command can be input to the CU by selecting and touching. For example, if "Return" is touched, the inserted card is returned, and if "Lending" is touched, the points are lent out in exchange for the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted card.

  If “Replay” is touched, the player can replay using the score of the inserted card (member card) or the accumulated medal. If “call” is touched, a notification for calling a game attendant is made.

  At the time when the card is inserted, the CU transmits a command without an operation request to the S units during the card insertion process as an operation instruction. In response to this, the S unit detects that the card insertion processing has been started on the CU side. After the transmission / reception of the operation instruction command, the host server (for example, the hall management computer 1) is in an inquiry state. In this inquiring state, the CU side display 312 displays “inquiry” as shown in the second “card balance inquiry screen” from the top, and also displays on the S side. The device 51 inquires the server of the inserted card with an arrow from the server to the IC displayed at the lower left corner of the screen as shown in the second [normal screen (inquiring card balance)] from the top. Picture is displayed. “IC” in the display screen indicates a card (IC card).

  The S units that have received the operation instruction described above return a response with a score = 0 and credit = 0 to the CU while waiting as an operation response.

  In the CU, if the inserted card is verified by making an inquiry to the server and the score (= 5000) and balance (= 7000) of the inserted card are specified, the card is held as an operation instruction. Among them, the command of the addition request number = 5000 and the card balance = 7000 is transmitted to the S units. At this stage, the balance is finalized. On the other hand, the points are determined after waiting for an operation response from the S units. The S units that have received this command detect that the card balance and holding points have been specified on the CU side, and thereafter, based on the detection of the pseudo ball in the pseudo ball unit 120 for addition as described above, An operation response corresponding to the number of requests = 5000 (score = 5000, addition number = 5000) is returned to the CU, and the addition display is in progress. In this figure, the operation response corresponding to the number of addition requests = 5000 is represented by one for convenience. When the CU receives this operation response, it fixes the score = 5000, and thereafter, the addition display is in progress.

  During the addition display, on the display unit 312 of the CU, “5000 points” is displayed in the display column of the score as shown in the third “loaned screen” from the top, and an arrow points toward the gaming machine. Display is made and the player is informed that 5000 points are being transmitted to the gaming machine. On the other hand, on the S platform, as shown in the third [normal screen (lending)] from the top, the display 51 displays an arrow from the IC toward the point display section and the card balance display section. Thus, a display indicating that the credit is being added (addition is being displayed) is made. Then, “5000 points” is displayed on the holding point display portion, and “7000 yen” is displayed on the card balance display portion.

  Thereafter, a response including a score = 5000 is sent as an operation response from the S platform to the CU. In the CU, when 2 to 3 seconds have elapsed since the start of the movement display of the points indicating that the addition is being displayed, the addition display is terminated, and the “member” indicating the type of the inserted card is displayed as “ “5000 shots” is switched to a state of being displayed on the display 312. On the other hand, in the S platform, the addition display is ended after a lapse of 2-3 seconds from the start of the movement display of the holding point as the addition display is in progress, and the movement display of the holding point by the display unit 51 is ended.

  In this way, the display of the start of operation processing such as inquiries and addition display is started at the same time between the CU and S units, while the end of display of these operation processing ends from the CU to the S units. The command or the like is not transmitted and can be terminated at the unique timing on the S platform side, and is not constrained by the termination timing on the CU side. As a result, a unique display unique to the S platform can be performed.

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing a control process in the case where a player shares points by dividing and transferring points to others during a game. The flowchart shown in FIG. 86 and FIGS. 87 and 88 to be described later shows control that allows the player to share points by sharing the points with others while continuing the game. In this flowchart, the description of the process in which the S units move the pseudo balls 124 for the divided transfer in response to the divided transfer request is omitted. In addition, the sharing of the sharing points described below is performed by the same control even when the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine described later.

  Referring to FIG. 86, first, a card A as a membership card with a score of 5000 is inserted into the CU. If this membership card is inserted into the CU, the membership card will be returned to the player at the end of the game even if the gaming value of the membership card (score, saving medal and prepaid balance) is all zero. There must be.

  After the card A is inserted, the CU transmits to the S units a command including the number of addition requests = 5000 for adding “5000”, which is the score of the card A, on the S side. In response to this, the S platform updates the pseudo ball 124 to a score = 5000 upon moving, and transmits a response including the score = 5000 as an operation response to the CU. After that, a game is started in the S machine, and when the score is decreased to 4000 as the game is executed, the score sharing (1000) is performed by transferring the score for 1000 points to another person and sharing the score (1000 When a point) designation operation is performed, the CU and S units are in a state where the points are being divided.

  The card B on which the points to be divided and transferred (share points) to another person are recorded, the stock card stocked in the card stock section in the CU is taken out to the card reader / writer 327 and compensated for. Although writing and discharging from the CU, in order to discharge the card B, it is necessary to first discharge the card A that has already been inserted into the card reader / writer 327. At that time, if all points (= 4000) at the present time are written on card A (member card owned by the player) and discharged, the score becomes 0 and the game can be continued thereafter. Disappear.

  Therefore, in order to make it possible to perform score division (score sharing) while playing a game, the card A is ejected from the CU in a state of “score = 0”, and the score corresponding to the score is CU To keep it as collateral information. Instead of directly recording the card score on the card, the higher server may store the score in association with the card number of the card. In that case, the card number of the inserted card A and the score number = 0 are transmitted to the upper server, and the stored score is searched in association with the card number received by the upper server. Update the score to 0. Thereafter, the CU ejects the card A.

  After the card A (point 0) is ejected from the card reader / writer 327 of the CU, the stock card B (point 0) in the CU is taken out to the card reader / writer 327 and compensated. At that time, the points are subtracted with the continuation of the game in the S units, and the points are in the state of 3800. A command including an operation request (operation instruction) with the number of subtraction requests = 1000 is transmitted from the CU to the S units in order to write 1000, which is a point to be divided and transferred (sharing points), to the card B. In response to this, the S platform moves and detects the pseudo ball 124 by 1000 points, subtracts 1000 from the current number of points 3800 to obtain the number of points = 2800, and an action response including the number of points = 2800 is obtained. Send to CU. In response, the CU backs up and stores the data of the score = 2800.

  Next, the CU writes “held point = 1000” to the card B by the card reader / writer 327 and returns (discharges) the card B. By handing out the discharged card B to another person, the points can be divided and transferred (sharing points) to others. If the score is stored in association with the card number of the card in the host server, instead of directly recording the score of the card on the card, the card number of the card B and the divided transfer (score) 1000) which is a point to be shared) is transmitted to the upper server, the score = 1000 is stored in association with the card number received by the upper server, and the card is divided and transferred (point sharing) It is stored as a history that 1000 points are points generated by sharing points. Thereafter, the CU ejects the card B.

  After ejecting the card B, the CU waits for reinsertion of the card A, which is the player's membership card that has been ejected first, and displays on the display 312 to prompt the user to insert the card A (see FIG. 94). Then, the player who sees it inserts the card A into the CU. At that time, the score is 2750. If the card A is inserted into the CU, the CU determines whether the inserted card A is the same as the card A that has been ejected due to the point sharing process (for example, both card numbers match). If they do not match, the card A is ejected. On the other hand, if they match, the process of dividing points (sharing points) ends, and a message to that effect is displayed on the display 312 ( (See FIG. 95).

  The inserted card A is written with the score as a score when the card is returned after the game ends, and is discharged from the CU.

  FIG. 87 shows the control operation in the case where the player performs divided transfer (sharing of points) while inserting a visitor card B in which 5,000 points are recorded into the CU and playing the game. Yes. In this case, since the card B inserted first is a visitor card that does not necessarily have to be returned to the player, the score to be divided by another person is written on the visitor card B inserted earlier. The points are shared by transferring the visitor card B to another person.

  First, by inserting a visitor card B (score = 5000) into the CU, an operation request including an addition request number = 5000 for adding all 5000 scores recorded on the inserted card B as scores. Operation instruction) is transmitted from the CU to the S units.

  In response to this, the S platform stores the score = 5000 after moving and detecting the pseudo balls 124 for 5000 points, and returns an operation response including the score = 5000 to the CU. From that stage, the game can be performed with S cars, and the game is in progress.

  Then, after the score is used in the game and the score becomes 4000, the player designates the sharing of the score (1000 points) to divide and transfer the score for 1000 points to another person. From this stage, the player is in the state of dividing points. At this stage, the score is further used for the game, and the score = 3800. Then, an operation request including a subtraction request count = 1000 for subtracting 1000 points for division transfer (sharing points sharing) from the CU is transmitted from the CU to the S units. In response to this, the S platform moves and detects the 1000 balls 124 and subtracts 1000 from the current score 3800 to obtain a score = 2800, and an operation response including the score = 2800 is indicated as CU. Reply to In response to this, the CU stores the data of the score = 2800 as a backup. Then, “score = 1000” is written in the card B held by the card reader / writer 327, and the card B is returned (discharged).

  At this stage, the process of dividing and transferring the points (sharing points) ends. Even after that, if the player continues the game with the S units and the player presses the return button 322 to end the game, the process proceeds to the card return process shown in FIG. 52 and is stocked in the CU. The stock card is taken out by the card reader / writer 327, and the score data corresponding to the score at that time is recorded on the stock card and discharged.

  If the score is stored in association with the card number of the card in the host server, instead of directly recording the score of the card on the card, the card number of the card B and the divided transfer (score) 1000) which is the score to be shared) is transmitted to the upper server, the score stored in association with the card number received by the higher server is searched, and the score is corresponded to the score received from the CU. The value is updated to the value (= 1000 points), and the card is stored as a history that the card has been divided and transferred (point sharing) and that 1000 points are points generated by the point sharing.

  Thereafter, the CU ejects the card B. And also about the stock card discharged | emitted at the time of a game end, the card number and the data of the number of points at the time of card | curd discharge | emission are transmitted to a high-order server, and it is matched with the card number received in the high-order server. Along with the storage, a history that the owner of the card B is changed to the owner of the stock card is stored and stored. The CU then discharges the stock card.

  FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing another example of split transfer of points (sharing points). Differences from the control process shown in FIG. 86 will be mainly described. The flowchart shown in FIG. 88 is the same as FIG. 86 in that the card A, which is a player's membership card already inserted, is returned first when dividing and transferring points (sharing points). However, when the return is made, the remaining points are recorded as points on the card A after securing the necessary points (200 collateral points) to continue the game during the division of points. 86 is different from FIG.

  Specifically, first, the player operates display unit 312 including a touch panel to designate sharing of points to divide and transfer 1000 points. Then, the CU leaves the 1000 shared points to be split and transferred and the 200 collateral points described above, and calculates the remaining 3800 points. Specifically, the current score (5000) −collateral score (200) −shared score (1000) = 3800 is calculated. Then, in order to subtract the calculated 3800 points, the CU transmits an operation request command including the number of subtraction requests = 3800 to the S units. In response to this, the S platform subtracts 3800 from the current holding point 5000 after moving and detecting the pseudo balls 124 for 3800 points, and calculates and stores the remaining holding points 1200. Then, an operation response including the score = 1200 and the subtraction number = 3800 is returned to the CU.

  The CU receives the operation response (response), leaves the collateral point = 200 and the shared possession point = 1000 in the CU, and writes the possession point = 3800 to the card A held by the card reader / writer 327. To discharge. In this way, in order to perform split transfer (score sharing) of points while continuing the game in the S units, the return of the card A that has been inserted leaving the collateral points for play (play: 200 points) in the CU Is done.

  Thereafter, the CU takes out the stock card (card B with 0 points) stocked in the CU to the card reader / writer 327 and compensates it. In the meantime, the game is continued in the S units, and as a result, the number of additions = 10 and the number of subtractions = 60 are generated. As a result, the score = 1200 + 10 (number of additions) −60 (number of subtractions) = 1150.

  Then, in the CU, an operation request command including the number of subtraction requests = 1000 is transmitted to the S units in order to divide and transfer (share points sharing) 1000 shared points.

  In response to this, the S platform receives 1000 points and subtracts the number of subtraction requests 1000 from the current score 1150 after moving and detecting the dummy balls 124 and calculates the remaining score = 150. The response of the operation response including 150 and the subtraction number = 1000 is transmitted to the CU.

  The CU receives it, writes “scoring point = 1000” in the card B, and returns (discharges) it. The player can perform the divided transfer of points (sharing points) by giving the discharged card B to another person.

  After the card B is discharged, the CU displays on the display 312 to prompt the player to reinsert the member card A that has been discharged. The player who sees it re-inserts the previously ejected card A (score = 3800) into the CU. In the meantime, the game continues with S units, and as a result, the number of additions = 10 and the number of subtractions = 85 are generated. Therefore, the score at the time when the card A is reinserted = 150 + 10−85 = 75.

  When the card A is reinserted, the CU determines whether the inserted card A is the same as the card A that has been ejected along with the point sharing process (for example, both card numbers are the same). If they do not match, the card A is ejected. On the other hand, if they match, the CU adds the score recorded on the card A = 3800 to the S units. Therefore, an operation request command including the number of addition requests = 3800 is transmitted to the S units. In response to this, the S platform calculates the score = 75 + 3800 = 3875 on the movement / detection of the pseudo ball 124 for 3800 points, stores it as the current score, and the score = 3875 and the added number = Response of operation response including 3800 is transmitted to the CU.

  If the score is stored in association with the card number of the card in the host server, instead of directly recording the score of the card on the card, the card number of the card B and the divided transfer (score) 1000) which is a point to be shared) is transmitted to the upper server, the score = 1000 is stored in association with the card number received by the upper server, and the card is divided and transferred (point sharing) It is stored as a history that 1000 points are points generated by sharing points. Thereafter, the CU ejects the card B.

89 to 106 are screen views displayed by the display unit 312 of the CU.
First, a display screen displayed on the display 312 in the case of sharing the points shown in FIG. 86 will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 95.

  Referring to FIG. 89, the player selects and designates sharing of points from a plurality of menus displayed by touching the display item (icon) of “Menu” displayed in the upper left half of the screen. This is the display screen for sharing points shown in FIG. The sharing of points (divided transfer of points) can be either divided transfer from the player's own points or divided transfer from the stored medals. For this purpose, first, a message “Please select a point sharing source” is displayed, and a display item (icon) representing a point to be selected and a display item (icon) representing a medal are displayed.

  In the right half display screen of FIG. 89, the state of the card inserted at the present time is displayed. In FIG. 89, a membership card is inserted, and the membership card has a card balance of 0 yen, a score of 0 points, a credit of 0 points, a stored medal of 500 points, and a current score of 10,000 points. It is shown.

  Further, as the state of the CU, it is displayed that the lending unit amount when lending points from the card balance is 500 yen, and 25 points corresponding to 500 yen is the number of payouts. Further, it is shown that the player can reload the card balance of the inserted card by inserting a bill into the CU.

  The player touches either “score” or “stored medal” on the left half of the screen to select and input a point sharing source. Here, a case where “point” is selected is shown.

  When the player selects “Point”, the screen shown in FIG. 90 is displayed. A message “Please select the number of points to share” is displayed on the left half of the screen, and 100 points, 200 points, 300 points, 4000 points, 500 points, 700 points, 1000 points, Nine types of 1500 points and 2000 points are displayed. The player selects and inputs one of these nine types. Here, a case where “1000 points” is selected and input will be described.

  If the player selects and inputs “1000 points”, then the screen shown in FIG. 91 is displayed. In the screen shown in FIG. 91, a message “Your score is divided by the above details. Are you sure?” Is displayed, and the score of your card is 9000 as the details of the number of shared points. It is displayed that the number of points of a shared card to be divided and transferred (point sharing) is 1000. Then, a display item (icon) of “starting sharing of points” and a display item (icon) of “cancel” are displayed. The player touches one of these display items to select and input. If “Cancel” is selected, sharing of points is canceled. On the other hand, if “start score sharing” is selected and input, the score sharing process is started as shown in the details of the number of points shared.

  If the player selects and inputs “Start point sharing”, the screen shown in FIG. 92 is displayed. In the screen shown in FIG. 92, a message “My card will be ejected” is displayed, and a score sharing processing status image indicating the progress of the score sharing processing is displayed. There are three types of points sharing processing status images 1, 2, and 3 in the processing order. In the first processing, the player's (player) card is discharged, the second processing is discharging the shared card, The re-insertion of your card that was ejected as a process is displayed. In the “status” column, “processing” and “waiting” are displayed from the top, indicating that the first processing is currently being processed. An image in which the user's card is ejected by a broken line from the first process is shown.

  In the right half screen of FIG. 92, 10,000 points that are points in the S units at the present time are displayed blinking.

  Next, the screen shown in FIG. 93 is displayed at the stage where the card has been ejected. In FIG. 93, the “status” column indicates that the discharge of the card as the first process is “completed” and the discharge of the shared card as the second process is being processed next. . A state in which the shared card is ejected from the second process is indicated by an arrow. Next, the screen shown in FIG. 94 is displayed when the shared card is completely discharged.

  In the screen shown in FIG. 94, the user's card has been ejected as the first process, and the shared card has been ejected as the second process. It is shown that there is. An image for inserting one's own card with an arrow is displayed at the third processing location.

  When the player reinserts his / her card into the CU, the screen shown in FIG. 95 is then displayed. In FIG. 95, a message “Point sharing has been completed” is displayed, and the point sharing processing status indicates that all of the first process, the second process, and the third process have been completed. Then, since the sharing of the points for 1000 points is completed, it is displayed that the points in the S units at the present time are 10000-1000 = 9000, which is 9000 points.

  Next, FIGS. 96 to 102 are diagrams of display screens by the display 312 when the control processing of the wagon service shown in FIG. 49 is executed.

  First, referring to FIG. 96, the display screen of FIG. 96 shows a state in which the player touches and selects and inputs the display item (icon) of “Wagon Service” displayed in the upper part of the left half of the screen. First of all, the message “Please select the type you want to order” is displayed, and as the wagon menu, “5 classic menu items”, “30 drinks”, “10 food items”, “sweets 20” 4 types of menus are displayed, and an “order status confirmation” icon is displayed.

  The right half of the screen in FIG. 96 displays 1000 points as the current number of points on the S units. The player selects a wagon menu that can be ordered within the range of 1000 points while considering that the current number of points is 1000 points. For example, when the player selects “30 drinks”, the screen shown in FIG. 97 is displayed. In FIG. 97, a message “Please select a product to order” is displayed, and six types of menus included in the drinks are shown. The number of points required for ordering each menu is shown. It is displayed. The player touches and selects and inputs an item to be ordered from the displayed menu while considering that the current number of points is 1000 points. An equilateral triangle icon and an inverted triangle icon are displayed on the right side where various menus on the left screen are displayed. When the player touches the equilateral triangle icon, the screen is scrolled down and the upper part of the screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the player touches the inverted triangle icon shown in FIG. 97, the screen is scrolled up and the lower portion of the screen is displayed.

  In FIG. 97, the player selects the coffee menu that requires 25 points, and then touches the “add product” icon displayed in the title column of “order product details” in FIG. Returning to the wagon menu display screen of FIG. 96, selecting the “food items 10” menu in FIG. 96 and displaying the food menu, the “hamburger” that requires 100 points from that menu. The menu is selected, and further, the “add product” icon displayed in the title column of “order product details” in FIG. 98 is touched to return to the display screen of the wagon menu in FIG. 96 again. A case will be described in which the icon “20 sweets” is selected and input, and the player selects “ice” that requires 50 points from the sweets display screen.

  In that case, the screen shown in FIG. 98 is displayed next, and the details of the ordered product selected and input so far are displayed. In the order details, the name of the ordered product, the number of points consumed, and the quantity of the ordered product are displayed. In the case of FIG. 98, it is shown that one hamburger with a consumption score of 25 is ordered, one coffee with a consumption score of 15 is ordered, and one ice with a consumption score of 10 is ordered. And it is displayed that the total consumption points are 50 points. In addition, an “add” icon is displayed in the quantity column of the order item details. When the player touches and inputs this additional icon, the quantity is incremented by “1” each time it is touched. The A “delete” icon is displayed on the right side of the quantity corresponding to each ordered prize. When the player touches this icon, the order for the corresponding product can be deleted. For example, touching “Delete” at the top deletes the hamburger order, touching the second “Delete” deletes the coffee order, and touching “Delete” the third “Ice” Orders are deleted.

  Furthermore, an “add product” icon is displayed below the order product details, and when the player touches this, the player returns to the wagon menu display screen of FIG. It is possible to select an order item and place an additional order.

  In addition, a “cancel” icon is shown below the order product details in FIG. 98, and by touching this icon, the player can cancel all the order products that have been ordered so far.

  Furthermore, an “order” icon is shown below the order item details, and when the player touches this, the order processing of the wagon service as shown in the order item details is executed. Become.

  When the player touches the “delete” icon corresponding to the “ice” order on the display screen of FIG. 98, the screen shown in FIG. 99 is displayed. FIG. 99 shows a state in which the order for “ice” has been canceled.

  On the other hand, when the player touches the “order” icon in FIG. 98, the screen shown in FIG. 100 is displayed. In the display screen of FIG. 100, an image being inquired about the ordered product is displayed. An arrow is displayed indicating that transmission / reception is being performed between 50 points, which is the total number of points consumed, and 1000 points on the S units at the current time, indicating that communication is in progress. Specifically, referring to FIG. 101, an arrow indicating that communication is in progress is first displayed in the direction from the point of consumption “50” to the “1000” of S units. The text “Inquiry” is displayed.

  After this display is made, an arrow is displayed in the direction from the “1000” points of the S units to the “50” points for consumption points, and the characters “inquiry” are displayed. Both of these displays are repeated a plurality of times. After the display, the screen of FIG. 102 is displayed next. In the screen shown in Fig. 102, the message "Order item received has been received. The number of consumption points above has been deducted from the point." And a total consumption score of “50” are displayed. In the right half of the screen, it is displayed that, as a result of the consumption of 50 points, the current score on S units is “950”.

  103 and 104 are display screens during addition display in the card insertion process shown in FIG. 45, and are the third display screen from the top of the display screens of the CU side display 312 shown in FIG. Another example is shown.

  Referring to FIG. 103, the left half of the screen shows game table information showing the same contents as the display screen on the CU side in FIG. 85, although the screen configuration is different.

  On the right side of the screen in FIG. 103, a display is displayed in which the 1000 points that are points of the card inserted into the CU are all moving to the S side from the CU to the S level.

  Then, at the stage where the point movement is completed, the screen is switched to the display screen shown in FIG. 104, a message “Pointer movement complete!” Is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the point column is zero. 1000 points are displayed as points in the S platform, and “1000” is displayed blinking.

  FIGS. 105 and 106 are display screens showing a clear display in the card return process shown in FIG. First, referring to FIG. 105, in the right half of the screen, it is displayed that the current number of points in S units is 1000, and “1000” is flashed. Then, the state in which the point is moved from the S platform is displayed in the point display column, and the characters “moving the point” are displayed.

  Then, when the movement of the holding points is completed, the screen is switched to the display screen shown in FIG. 106, and the state where the holding points on the S platform side are 0 points is displayed, and 1000 points are displayed as the holding points. Then, “1000” is displayed blinking.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the number of points is managed on the CU side, there is no need to provide the management function on the S platform side, and the cost of the S platform is reduced as much as possible. Can be suppressed. In particular, the S platform has a short replacement cycle at the game hall in order to be able to provide a more interesting game as soon as possible, and tends to be replaced early in units of several months if it is one year or early. . In addition, as new stands are being developed one after another, which quickly incorporates rapidly changing player preferences, there is also a tendency for the base exchange cycle in the amusement hall to be accelerated.

  On the other hand, CUs are rarely replaced from the viewpoint of preference, and in general, equipment replacement is performed in response to a failure. It is what is used. If no failure occurs, replacement is not performed for several years.

  For this reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game arcade where the S units are introduced can be reduced by providing the management function of the holding points not on the S units side but on the CU side to suppress the cost of the S units.

  FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an overall system for distributing authentication information including an authentication key and a unique ID (also referred to as SID) for ensuring security. Key management server 800 and host server 801, host server 801 and main control unit 323, main control unit 323 and CU communication control unit 80, CU communication control unit 80 and S-unit communication control unit 82, payout control unit 31 and main control board 116, and the main control board 116 and the key management server 803 mutually authenticate using the authentication information, and determine whether or not the counterpart devices are appropriate. Then, communication is performed with each other on the condition that an authentication result that is appropriate is obtained. Distribution of authentication information used for mutual authentication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 will be described below with reference to FIG.

  The SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit 80 are transmitted from the key management server 800 in FIG. 107 to the main control unit 323 of the card unit 3 and stored in the EEPROM 808. Specifically, referring to FIG. 107, key management server 800 stores the SID and authentication key of CU communication control unit 80 in association with each SID of main control unit 323. The card unit manufacturer stores the SID of the main control unit 323 in the EEPROM 808 as described above in the manufacturing stage of the card unit 3, and the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 corresponding to the SID of the main control unit 323, that is, already stored in the ROM 809. The SID of the CU communication control unit 80 and the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 are transmitted to the key management server 800 together with the SID of the main control unit 323 stored in the EEPROM 808. Then, the key management server 800 receives it and stores the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit 80 transmitted in association with the transmitted SID of the main control unit 323. In this way, the key management server 800 constructs a database of authentication information for a pair consisting of the SID of the main control unit 323, the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 corresponding to the SID, and the authentication key that is a common key.

  Thus, the SID of the main control unit 323 is authentication information itself, but is transmitted to the key management server 800 and identifies the SID and authentication key of the corresponding CU communication control unit 80 in the key management server 800. It is also used as authentication information specifying information for this purpose.

  When the power of the card unit 3 is turned on for the first time after the card unit 3 is installed in the amusement hall, the main control unit 323 sets the SID of the main control unit 323 stored in the EEPROM 808 as a key via the host server 801. It transmits to the management server 800. The key management server 800 searches for the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit 80 stored in association with the received SID of the main control unit 323, and searches for the SID and authentication of the searched CU communication control unit 80. The key is returned to the main control unit 323 via the host server 801. The main control unit 323 receives this, and stores the received SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit 80 in the EEPROM 808. As a result, the same (pair) SID as the SID of the CU communication control unit 808 stored in the ROM 809 of the CU communication control unit 80 is stored in the EEPROM 808 and the same (pair) as the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813. An authentication key is stored in EEPROM 808.

  Whether the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 stored in the ROM 809 is correct between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 using the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 stored in the EEPROM 808 The CU communication control unit 80 determines whether or not the CU communication control unit 80 is appropriate, and performs serial ID authentication, and also uses the SID of the main control unit 323 stored in the EEPROM 813 for the EEPROM 808. BB serial ID authentication is performed to determine whether or not the SID of the main control unit 323 stored in is correct and determine whether or not the main control unit 323 is correct. Further, whether or not a common authentication key is stored between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 is determined by using an authentication key stored in the EEPROM 808 and an authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813. Device authentication is performed by using and determining.

  Next, the reason why the key management server 800 is used as the distribution source for distributing the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit 80, which is a part of the authentication information, to the main control unit 323 will be described.

  For example, referring to FIG. 7 described above, the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 is stored in the ROM 804 in the main control unit 323 as well as the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 is stored in the ROM 809 during chip manufacture. When stored, the memory chip storing the SID of the same CU communication control unit 80 must be mounted on both the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, and in the memory chip mounting process, A pair of memory chips must be mounted, and the mounting process becomes inconvenient.

  Therefore, for example, one of the pair authentication information, that is, the SID of the CU communication control unit 80, the SID of the main control unit 323, and the authentication key are stored in the CU communication control unit 80, and the card unit 3 is manufactured. At the time of installation or when the power is turned on for the first time after being installed in the amusement hall, one authentication information stored in the CU communication control unit 80 is transmitted to the main control unit 323. A method of storing the transmitted authentication information, that is, the SID of the main control unit 323, the SID of the CU communication control unit 80, and the authentication key by the EEPROM 808 can be considered.

  However, in the case of this method, the authentication information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, so that there is a risk of leakage of the authentication information during that time, resulting in a security problem. In particular, between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, as described above, the communication interface specification is disclosed, and the authentication information is transmitted according to the disclosed communication interface specification. Accordingly, there is a disadvantage that the risk of leakage of authentication information increases. Moreover, the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 are devices located in a local area as compared with, for example, the upper server 801 and the key management server 800, and the number thereof is also higher than that of the upper server 801 and the key management server 800. For this reason, there is a possibility that a person who attempts fraud easily allows an unauthorized person to intercept and eavesdrop on authentication information.

  Further, when the authentication information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, the following inconvenience occurs. For example, the CU communication control unit 80 is replaced with an illegally manufactured CU communication control unit 80, and then the authentication information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, and the main control unit 323 stores the authentication information. In the case where an illegal act is performed, in the mutual authentication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, it is not determined that there is any abnormality, and the CU communication control unit 80 is illegal. Can not be found. In other words, in the case of a system in which authentication information is supplied from one side that performs mutual authentication to the other side that performs mutual authentication, one side that performs mutual authentication is replaced with an unauthorized one, and then the fraudulent act is performed by supplying authentication information. This creates a security hole that allows you to forgive.

  In order to prevent the above inconveniences, a download method is adopted in which the authentication information stored in the upper server 801 is downloaded and stored in the main control unit 323.

  Specifically, although not shown, in the ROM chip manufacturing stage of the payout control unit 17, the SID of the payout control unit 17 is stored in the ROM, and the main control board is used by a ROM writer or the like when the pachinko machine is manufactured. And the authentication key are written in the EEPROM of the payout control unit 17, and the SID of the main control board is written in the EEPROM of the main control board 16 by a ROM writer or the like when the pachinko machine is manufactured.

  In this state, the SID of the main control board stored in the EEPROM of the main control board 116 is obtained from the I / O port of the main control board 116 when the power is first turned on after the S unit 2S is installed in the game hall. Transmit to the key management server 803. The key management server 803 stores the SID and authentication key of the payout control unit in association with the SID of each main control board in the plurality of S units. The key management server 803 searches for the SID and authentication key of the payout control unit corresponding to the SID of the main control board transmitted from the main control board 116, and uses the searched SID and authentication key of the payout control unit. It returns to the main control board 116. The main control board 116 stores the returned SID and authentication key of the payout control unit in the EEPROM.

  Further, in the authentication information used for mutual authentication between the main control board 16 and the payout control unit 31 in the P platform described later, the authentication information stored in the key management server 803 is stored in the same manner as described above. A download method of downloading and storing in the main control board 16 is adopted.

  Specifically, although not shown, in the ROM chip manufacturing stage of the payout control unit 31, the SID of the payout control unit 31 is stored in the ROM, and the main control board is read by a ROM writer or the like when manufacturing the P units. The SID and the authentication key are written in the EEPROM of the payout control unit 31, and the SID of the main control board is written in the EEPROM of the main control board by a ROM writer or the like when the slot machine is manufactured.

  In this state, the SID of the main control board stored in the EEPROM of the main control board is transferred from the I / O port of the main control board to the key management server when the power is turned on for the first time after the P units are installed in the game hall. To 803. The key management server 803 stores the SID and authentication key of the payout control unit in association with the SID of each main control board in the plurality of P units. The key management server 803 searches for the SID and authentication key of the payout control unit corresponding to the SID of the main control board transmitted from the main control board, and searches for the SID and authentication key of the searched payout control unit. Return to the control board. In the main control board, the returned SID of the payout control unit and the authentication key are stored in the EEPROM.

  Next, a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 46 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a modification of the control mode for storing the game history data on the CU side and the S platform side shown in FIG. Here, differences from FIG. 15 will be mainly described.

  In the case of FIG. 15, the game history data is cleared by operating the RAM clear switch 293 provided on the S platform 2S. However, in the modification shown in FIG. The game history data is cleared on the basis of a clear command transmitted from CU3 to CU3. Clearing of the game history data needs to be performed for each gaming machine installed in the game hall before the game hall starts business. Therefore, it is more convenient to clear the game history data by simultaneous delivery of the clear command signal from the hall management computer 1 to each CU 3 rather than the operation of the RAM clear switch installed for each S unit.

  When a hall attendant operates the hall management computer 1 or the clock function built in the hall management computer 1 reaches a predetermined time before the game hall opening time, the hall management computer 1 A clear command signal is simultaneously distributed to each CU3. The CU 3 that has received the clear command signal erases the storage in the S game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392 by the action of the clear processing unit provided in the game history data management unit 391. As a result, the display of the S game history data on the display 312 is erased (cleared). Further, a clear command signal is transmitted to the game history data management unit 291 of the S units 2S by the operation of the clear processing unit.

  The game history data management unit 291 that has received the clear command signal erases the data stored in the backup data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292 by the operation of the clear processing unit, and the S game game history data. Of the storage data for 10 days in the storage unit, the oldest storage data is erased, and the remaining 9 days of storage data is shifted and stored one by one in the storage area of the old day. As a result, the newest storage area (current day storage area) becomes an empty area. Today's game history data is stored in this empty area (current day storage area).

  In the modification shown in FIG. 108, after the player leaves the seat, the identity of the player who has left the seat and the player who will play the next game is determined on the CU3 side. The C-ID, which is the player identification information of the player who has left the seat, is stored in the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. Then, when the player inserts a card into the CU 3 to play again in the S stand 2S that has left the seat, the information of the inserted card is read and the C-ID included in the inserted card information and the current player The C-ID of the player who has left the seat stored in the game history data storage unit is compared to determine whether or not they match. When it is determined that the two match, the same command is transmitted from the game history data management unit 391 of the CU3 to the game history data management unit 291 of the S unit 2S, whereas when it is determined that they do not match The difference command is sent.

  The game history data management unit 291 that has received the same / difference command receives the C-ID and the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit in the current player game history data storage unit if they are the same command. Control to restore and store. On the other hand, when a difference command is received, control is performed to erase backup data stored in the backup data storage unit.

  In addition, when the S player 2S receives a card return notification from the game history data management unit 291 of the CU 3, A as a C-ID stored in the current player game history data storage unit and the game history data a Is stored in the backup data storage unit, and the C-ID and the game history data in the current player game history data storage unit are erased, so that the stored data in the current player game history data storage unit is stored in the backup data storage unit. Control to shift and store.

  FIG. 108 also confirms the identity of the player and stores it in the current player game history data only when the C-ID of the membership card is read instead of the visitor card, as in FIG. And take over the game history. FIG. 108 can also be applied to a case where the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine (P units) described later.

  FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing control of insertion time processing in the modification shown in FIG. The control in FIG. 109 is obtained by changing a part of the control shown in FIG. 46. The same control steps are given the same step numbers, and the differences will be mainly described here. Also in FIG. 109, the solid line arrows indicate the flow of control, and the two-point difference line arrows indicate the flow of information to be transmitted. In FIG. 109, each step of S31, S32, S34 to S37, S50, and S51 is executed by the CU, and S52, S40, S42, S43, and S45 are executed by the S platform.

  If it is determined in S31 that it is not interrupted, the control advances to S50, and the C-IDs of the card inserted this time and the card inserted last time are compared to determine whether or not they match. Next, in S51, control based on the determination result is transmitted to the S units. Specifically, the same command is transmitted to the S units in the case of a determination result that matches, and the different command is transmitted in the case of a determination result that does not match.

  In S units, whether or not the transmitted command is a coincidence command is determined in S52, and the game history data in the backup area (backup data storage unit) is stored in the current area (on the condition that they coincide with each other). Control is returned to the current player game history data storage unit) and the update of game history data is resumed (S52).

  In the modification shown in FIG. 109, the control in S44 shown in FIG. 46 is not executed.

  In this modification, instead of transmitting the same command as described above, the game history data a stored in the current area (current player game history data storage unit) of the data storage unit 392 is transferred to the gaming machine (S 2S). You may send it. In the gaming machine (S 2S) that has received the game history data a, the received game history data a is stored in the current area (current player game history data storage unit), and the game history data a is taken over to create a new game. Update history data. In this case, a backup area (backup data storage unit) is not required in the gaming machine (S 2S). FIG. 109 is also applicable to a case where the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine (P units) to be described next.

  Next, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as another example of the gaming machine. Referring to FIG. 110, the pachinko machine 2 to which the card unit 3 is electrically connected encloses a pachinko ball as an example of a game medium, and when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, It is configured such that a ball can be played by driving a ball hitting motor 28 (see FIG. 111) and driving the encapsulated balls into the game area 27 on the front surface of the game board 26 one by one. The card unit 3 has the same function as the card unit 3 shown in FIG. 1, and the same reference numerals are given to the same or corresponding parts in the figure. Also, here, in order to describe a pachinko machine as an example of a gaming machine instead of a slot machine, “score” is described as “game ball”, and “stored medal” is described as “stored ball”. . Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine is also referred to as P units.

  In the P platform, similarly to the S platform, a game can be played with credits drawn from the game balls (points), and when the credit reaches 0, the balls are controlled so as not to be fired. As in the case of the S units, the game balls (scoring points) are acquired by inserting a card into the CU and then operating the lending button, so that a part of the “balance” recorded on the card is withdrawn. The For example, a “balance” equivalent to 500 yen is withdrawn by one lending operation, and converted into 125 “game balls”.

  "Game balls" cannot be used directly in games, but can be used when seeking a wagon service. Further, by operating the credit button, a part of the score is withdrawn and converted to “credit”. For example, 125 “scoring points” are withdrawn by one credit operation and converted into “credits” of the same score.

  The player can fire balls within the "credit" range. Since 125 credits are given by one operation of the credit button, 125 bullets can be played. When a winning occurs, a credit corresponding to the type of the winning is added. Further, when a foul ball that does not reach the game area is generated during the game, one credit is added.

  “Credit” cannot be used for wagon service. For this reason, there is no situation where the “credit” that can be used for the game is lost by requesting the wagon service.

  At the end of the game, the “credit” is converted back into points by operating the credit check button. In this embodiment, one credit point is converted into one point. However, a predetermined number of “credits” may be deducted as a fee during reverse conversion.

  In this embodiment, there is no upper limit for credits, and until the player operates the credit check button, credits are cumulatively added according to the occurrence of winnings and the conversion from points to credits. The However, an upper limit value may be set for the credit in order to prevent a credit that is too high from being held. For example, it is conceivable that the upper limit number is the maximum number of credits obtained by the player when the stop setting is made with S cars.

  At the end of the game, further, by operating the card return button, the acquired points are written in an identifiable manner with the card. In this case, the score may be recorded directly on the card, or the score may be managed by the hall management computer using the card ID.

  When the returned card is inserted again into the card unit (which may be the same as or different from the CU at the end of the game), the “score” recorded on the card is read and read. “Point” is displayed on the CU. If the “scoring point” read at this time is greater than or equal to the “credit” deduction minimum score (for example, 125 points), the “scoring point” can be obtained without performing a lending operation for deducting the “balance” from the card. The credits necessary for the game can be secured by performing the withdrawal operation (credit button ON).

  However, “scoring points” are valid only on the day when they are acquired in the game, and on the next day, the “scoring points” are managed as “save balls” in the game hall. Therefore, even if the player visits the amusement hall on the day following the day when “score” is acquired and inserts the card into the card unit 3, the score is displayed as 0. In the case of playing a game using “storing balls”, first, a storing ball replay operation (replay button ON) is required. When the replay button is operated, a part of the “pool” is converted into points. For example, by one re-ball operation, “stored balls” corresponding to 125 points are withdrawn and converted to “points” of 25 points.

  Similarly to the S platform, the P platform is displayed on the P platform and the display unit of the CU when the conditions for updating the game ball (scoring points) are met, subject to the movement / detection of the pseudo ball. The game ball (points) is updated and displayed. Similarly to the S platform, when the conditions for updating the number of credits are satisfied, the P platform can use the credits displayed on the display units of the P platform and the CU without using the movement / detection of the pseudo ball as a condition. Update display.

  The pachinko machine 2 shown in FIG. 110 is a so-called first type pachinko machine, which is not shown in the figure, but a start opening (1) and a start opening through which a pachinko ball driven into the game area 27 can win a prize. (2) is provided, and a variable display device is provided for variably displaying based on the detection signal of the start winning ball won in each of the start ports, and the display result of the variable display device is determined in advance. A variable winning ball apparatus (also referred to as a grand prize opening) that is opened when the combination of the identification information (for example, a glance) is provided. The start port (2) is composed of an electric tulip that can be changed to a first state (for example, an open state) advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) unfavorable to the player.

  When the variable winning ball apparatus is opened, a big hit state is achieved. In addition, since the display result of the variable display device is a combination of predetermined special identification information (for example, a combination of probability variation symbols such as 777) out of a combination of jackpot symbols (grooves), the probability variation big hit state is A probability variation state (probability variation state) in which the occurrence probability of the jackpot is improved after the occurrence of the jackpot state is generated. There are two large winning openings, a large winning opening (1) and a large winning opening (2). For example, when a big win is generated based on a winning at the starting port (1), the big winning port (1) is in the first state, and when a big hit is generated based on a winning at the starting port (2), the big winning port (2) is the first state. Furthermore, the game area 2 is provided with four normal winning holes (1) to (4).

  When a prize is awarded to the big prize opening (1) or the big prize opening (2), 15 points are added to the number of game balls. When a winning at the starting port (1) or the starting port (2) occurs, the number of game balls is increased by 10 points. When a winning to any of the normal winning openings (1) to (4) occurs, three game balls are added.

  Pachinko balls that have been struck into the game area 27 are won at any of the winning openings or are collected at the out opening 145 (see FIG. 111) without winning. The pachinko balls won in the winning opening and the pachinko balls collected in the out mouth 145 are returned again to the hitting ball launch position through the collection path in the pachinko machine 2. Then, when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the pachinko ball at the hitting position is again shot into the game area 27.

  A display 54, a chance button 56, and a jog dial 57 are provided below the game area 27 in the pachinko machine 2. The display device 54 is configured by a liquid crystal display device, and displays various display screens to the player in the same manner as the display device of the slot machine 2S. The jog dial 57 selects and designates various display items (icons) and the like on the display screen displayed on the display unit 54 when the player rotates. Then, when the player rotates the jog dial 57, various display items on the display screen displayed on the display 54 are sequentially moved and displayed, and the jog dial 57 is operated by rotating the jog dial 57. When the player presses the chance button 56 after designating the display item that the player wants to select, the selected display item is designated and the player's selection is confirmed. Two vertically long transparent windows W0 and W1 are formed below the display unit 54. A part of the pseudo ball unit 120 for addition is provided inside the one transparent window W0 so as to be visible. A part of the subtraction ball unit 121 for subtraction is provided inside the transparent window so as to be visible.

  FIG. 111 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 2, and here, the circulation path of the enclosed circulation pachinko balls will be mainly described.

  The game board holding frame 95 of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with a rotation lever 100 for attaching the game board. By rotating the rotation lever 100, the game board 26 can be attached and detached. The game board 26 is formed with the already-explained large winning openings (1) and (2), the starting openings (1) and (2), and the normal winning openings (1) to (4), corresponding to the respective winning openings. Thus, a winning ball detector (not shown) for detecting the winning ball is provided. The detection signal of the winning ball detector is transmitted to the main control board 16 described later. All winning balls detected by the winning ball detector are collected by the winning ball collecting cover member 144 and flow down the winning ball flow path 147. On the other hand, the out ball that has entered the out port 45 merges with the winning ball that flows down the winning ball flow-down path 147 and flows down the merge passing path 702. The joining passage path 702 is provided with a joining path detection switch 232, and a ball flowing down the joining passage path 702 is detected.

  On the other hand, the foul balls that have been fired toward the game area but have not reached the game area are discharged from the foul ball return port 150 and then detected by the foul ball detection switch 233. When a foul ball is generated, the game ball subtracted by the ball firing is returned to the player (added by 1). Thereafter, the foul balls enter the merging passage 702. The pachinko balls that have flowed down the merge passage path 702 are guided to the ball collection basket 189.

  The pachinko balls guided to the ball collection basket 89 are lifted by the lifting device 190. The lifting device 190 has a built-in lifting screw that is rotated by the lifting motor 40, and the pachinko ball is lifted by the rotation of the lifting screw. The back of the lifting device 190 is provided with polishing members 200a and 200b (200b is not visible in the drawing) for polishing the pachinko balls by contacting with the pachinko balls being transported. While being done, the surface is polished.

  A ball raising switch (lower) 41b is provided on the ball inlet side (lower side) of the lifting device 190, and a ball raising switch (upper) 41a is provided on the ball discharge side (upper side). A pachinko ball to be transported is detected by the ball raising switch (upper) 41a and the ball raising switch (lower) 41b. The pachinko balls that have been lifted by the lifting device 190 and detected by the ball raising switch (upper) 41a are guided to the firing ball guiding path 153 and supplied from the driving ball outlet 49 to the ball feeding device (not shown). The ball feeding device has a function of feeding the next pachinko ball to the hitting ball launching position every time the player operates the hitting ball operating handle 25 to hit one pachinko ball. A pachinko ball fed by the ball feeding device is detected by a launch detection switch (not shown), and the launch detection signal is input to the payout controller 17 as will be described later. Each time a pachinko ball is detected by the firing detection switch, the number of game balls is decremented by one.

  Further, game ball excess / deficiency detection switches 42a and 42b are provided in the middle of the pachinko ball circulation path (see FIG. 113) to detect whether or not the number of pachinko balls in the circulation path is a predetermined number (for example, 50). .

  Next, referring to FIG. 112, the pachinko machine 2 is provided with a front frame (also referred to as a cell) 205 and a glass door 206 so that the frame-shaped outer frame 204 can be opened and closed with its left side edge as a swing center. It has been.

  A pair of upper and lower engaging protrusions 206a and 206b are provided near the edge of the front frame 205 opposite to the center of swinging. The engagement protrusions 206a and 206b are pressed downward by a spring (not shown). On the other hand, engagement receiving pieces 207a and 207b are provided at positions facing the engagement protrusions 206a and 206b of the outer frame 204. When the front frame 205 in the opened state is pressed against the outer frame 204, the engagement protrusions 206a and 206b get over the engagement receiving pieces 207a and 207b, and the engagement protrusions 206a and 206b are moved downward by the biasing force of the spring in the state of getting over. Move and become locked.

  A front frame opening solenoid 211 is provided on the back surface side of the front frame 205. When the front frame opening solenoid 211 is excited, a pair of upper and lower engaging protrusions 206a and 206b against the biasing force of the spring. Is pushed upward, and as a result, the engagement projections 206a and 206b are disengaged from the engagement receiving pieces 207a and 207b to be unlocked, and the front frame 5 is released.

  Further, the front frame 205 is also provided with an engaging projection 208 for the glass door 206, and an engaging hole 209 is provided in the glass door 206 portion facing the engaging projection 208. The engagement protrusion 208 is pressed downward by a spring (not shown), and the engagement protrusion 208 is pushed up by the lower edge portion of the engagement hole 209 by pressing the opened glass door 206 against the front frame 205. By getting on and over, the engagement protrusion 208 is pushed down by the biasing force of the spring, and the engagement protrusion 208 and the engagement hole 209 are engaged to be in a locked state. In this state, by energizing the glass door opening solenoid 210 provided on the back surface of the front frame 205, the engagement protrusion 208 is pulled up against the biasing force of the spring, and the engagement protrusion 208 and the engagement hole 209 are pulled up. Is released and the glass door 206 is opened.

  A front frame closing detector 213 is provided at a position in contact with the front frame 205 in an upper portion of the outer frame 204, and it is detected that the front frame 205 is pressed against the outer frame 204 and is locked. Further, a glass door closing detector 212 is provided in a contact portion with the glass door 206 in an upper portion of the front frame 205, and the glass door is in a locked state by being pressed against the front frame 205. Detected by the closure detector 212.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the outline of the control circuit of the card unit 3 and the pachinko machine 2 will be described.

  The card unit 3 is provided with a main control unit 323 composed of a microcomputer or the like. The main control unit 323 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices. The main control unit 323 is provided with an external communication unit 324 for communicating with the hall management computer 1 and the like, and a CU communication control unit 80 for communicating with the payout control unit 17 of the pachinko machine 2. Is provided.

  The card unit 3 is provided with a connection part 330 to the pachinko machine 2 side, and the pachinko machine 2 is provided with a connection part 420 to the card unit 3 side. These connection parts 330 and 420 are comprised by the connector etc., for example. The CU communication control unit 80 and the payout control unit 17 are communicably connected via the connectors 330 and 420 and connection wiring.

  When the CPU 805 of the main control unit 323 detects an unconnected error such as a disconnection between the external communication unit 324 and the hall management computer 1, it transmits an error display command to the display control unit 797 and displays an error on the display 312. And a control to turn on or blink an abnormality notification lamp (not shown). Further, when the main control unit 323 detects an unconnected error such as a disconnection between the CU communication control unit 80 and the P-unit communication control unit 81, the main control unit 323 transmits an error display command to the display control unit 797 to cause an error to the display 312. Control is performed so that an abnormality notification lamp (not shown) is turned on or blinked, and a notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer 1.

  The above-described money discriminator 344 identifies the authenticity and type of the bill, and the discrimination result signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the IR photosensitive unit 320 receives infrared rays emitted from a remote controller owned by a game attendant, the received light signal is input to the main control unit 323. The card reader / writer 327 reads the information recorded on the inserted card, and the read information is input to the main control unit 323 and written to the card reader / writer 327 from the main control unit 323. When data is transmitted, the card reader / writer 327 writes the data to the inserted card.

  The CPU 805 of the main control unit 323 determines the suitability of the card based on the read information from the card reader / writer 327. When the CPU 805 determines that the card is an improper card (forged card or the like), an error display command is displayed to the display control unit 797. To display the error on the display 312 and turn on or blink an abnormality notification lamp (not shown) and transmit a notification signal to the hall management computer 1 that an error has occurred. .

  A display control unit 797 is connected to the main control unit 323, and display data such as a balance or the number of game balls is output from the main control unit 323 to the display control unit 797. The display control unit 797 receives the output display data and controls the display 312 to display the display data. Further, when the player operates the touch panel provided on the surface of the display 312, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323 via the display control unit 797.

  When the player operates the lending button 321, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the replay button 319, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the return button 322, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the call button 798, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the credit button 421, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the credit check button 422, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323.

  The pachinko machine 2 includes a main control board 16 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 2, a payout control section 17, a launch control board 31, a game ball control section 34, a launch section 39, and an effect section 50. Is provided.

  A CU communication control unit 80 is further connected to the main control unit 323, and the CU communication control unit 80 and the P unit communication control unit 81 provided in the pachinko machine 2 are connected via a connector 330 and a connector 420. Electrically connected. The P-unit communication control unit 81 and the payout control unit 17 are configured by a one-chip LSI 799. Various commands are transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the P unit communication control unit 81, and the various commands are transmitted from the P unit communication control unit 81 to the payout control unit 17.

  The commands include addition requests p and c, subtraction requests p and c, game permission / inhibition requests, addition request numbers p and c, and subtraction request numbers p and c. These commands are the addition requests p and c, the subtraction requests p and c, the game permission / prohibition requests, the addition request numbers p and c, and the subtraction request numbers p and c of the commands in the S embodiments described above. It is a command corresponding to each.

  From the payout control unit 17 to the CU communication control unit 80 via the P unit communication control unit 81, the number of game balls, the addition number p, c, the subtraction number p, c, the start opening winning information, the number of symbols determined, the jackpot information, Various responses of error information are sent.

  A game control microcomputer is mounted on the main control board 16. A microcomputer for gaming machine control includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) that stores programs and control data for operating the CPU, and a RAM (RAM that functions as a work area for the CPU). Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

  The payout control unit 17 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer. The payout control microcomputer includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices. Note that the game control microcomputer mounted on the main control board 16 and the P-unit communication control unit 81 and the payout control unit 17 of the LSI 799 may be integrated into one chip.

  Further, for the payout control unit 17, the above-described pseudo ball unit for addition 120, pseudo ball unit for subtraction 121, merge path detection switch 232, foul ball detection switch 233, glass door opening solenoid 210, front frame opening solenoid 211, glass The door closing detector 212 and the front frame closing detector 213 are provided in an electrically connected state.

  The configuration of the adding pseudo ball unit 120 and the subtracting pseudo ball unit 121 is as described with reference to FIG. However, the artificial ball unit 120 for addition and the artificial ball 124 in the subtraction ball unit 121 applied to the pachinko gaming machine imitate the pachinko ball. For this reason, it can be confirmed that the pachinko balls move from top to bottom from the two vertically long transparent windows W0, W1 provided on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine. Instead of a pachinko ball, a game medal-like object similar to that shown in FIG. 8 may be used.

  The main control board 16 transmits a connection confirmation signal, a winning detection signal, start opening winning information, error information, symbol determination times, jackpot information, and manufacturer-specific jackpot information to the payout control unit 17.

  The connection confirmation signal is a signal for confirming that the main control board 16 and the payout controller 17 are connected, and a signal of a predetermined voltage is constantly supplied from the main control board 16 to the payout controller 17. The payout control unit 17 controls the operation on the condition that the payout control unit 17 receives the predetermined voltage signal.

  The winning detection signal is a detection signal of a pachinko ball that has won a winning opening other than the starting opening. The start opening prize information is information indicating that a pachinko ball has won a prize at either the start opening (1) or the start opening (2). The main control board 16 has a winning ball detector (not shown) corresponding to each of the big winning holes (1), (2), the starting holes (1), (2), and the normal winning holes (1)-(4). A detection signal is input from. The main control board 16 stores the number of balls to be given according to the occurrence of a prize for each prize opening. For example, in the grand prize opening (1) (2), 15 for one prize, 5 for one prize in the start opening (1) (2), and 10 for one prize in the normal prize opening (1) to (4). Prize balls are supported. The main control board 16 specifies the number of balls to be given based on the stored and input detection signal, and a winning detection signal that can specify the specified number of balls or a winning entry to the start port (1) (2). In this case, the start opening winning information is transmitted to the payout control unit 17. Upon receiving this winning detection signal or start opening winning information, the payout control unit 17 performs control to add the number of balls to be given to one winning ball to the “credit number” and the “addition number c”. . Here, the “credit number” is a value of a “credit number counter” described later, and the “addition number c” is a value of a “credit addition number counter” described later.

  The error information is information for notifying the payout control unit 17 when an error occurs while the main control board 16 is performing game control. Specific examples of the error include, for example, a timing sensor error that causes the game area 27 to bring the magnet close to the game area and guide the game ball to the winning opening, a radio wave sensor error that illegally turns on the winning ball detection switch by transmitting an illegal radio wave, a variable prize There is an illegal winning error in which a detection signal is output from a 10 count switch that detects a winning ball of a variable winning ball device when the ball device (attacker) is closed. When the CPU of the main control board 16 detects such an error or non-connection due to a connection confirmation signal, the CPU controls lighting or blinking of the calling lamp provided on the curtain plate and the I / O port of the main control board 16 An abnormality notification signal for notifying that the abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer 1 is output from a not-shown (not shown).

  The symbol determination number of times is information on a symbol determined as a display result of the variable display device with respect to winning at the start port (1) or the start port (2).

  The jackpot information is information indicating that a jackpot has occurred. The breakdown includes common jackpot information indicating a jackpot common to each manufacturer and manufacturer-specific jackpot information indicating a manufacturer-specific jackpot. The common jackpot information is a jackpot commonly used by each gaming machine manufacturer, such as 15 round jackpots, and includes probability variation information when a probability change occurs with the jackpot. When the time-short state (control state for shortening the variable display time of the variable display device) occurs, the time-shortage information is included. The manufacturer-specific big hit is a big hit state that is adopted only by a certain gaming machine manufacturer, such as sudden probability change (surprise).

  A health check command and a winning ball number acceptance command are transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the main control board 16. The health check command is a command for checking whether or not the main control board 16 is operating normally. The award ball number acceptance command is a command indicating that the addition number has been accepted.

  An out ball detection signal is input from the merge path detection switch 232 to the payout control unit 17. The payout control unit 17 to which the foul ball detection signal is input from the foul ball detection switch 233 adds and updates the number of credits.

  When the dispensing control unit 17 performs excitation control of the glass door opening solenoid 210, the glass door 206 is unlocked and can be opened as described with reference to FIG. When the dispensing control unit 17 controls the excitation of the front frame opening solenoid 211, the front frame 205 is unlocked and opened as described with reference to FIG.

  As described with reference to FIG. 112, when the glass door 206 is pressed against the front frame 205 and closed, a glass door closing detection signal is output from the glass door closing detector 212 and input to the dispensing control unit 17. As described with reference to FIG. 112, the front frame 205 is pressed against the outer frame 204 and closed to output a front frame closing detection signal from the front frame closing detector 213 and input to the dispensing control unit 17.

  The CU communication control unit 80 of the card unit 3 and the P unit control unit 81 of the pachinko machine 2 are electrically connected, and the addition is performed from the CU communication control unit 80 to the payout control unit 17 via the P unit control unit 81. Various commands such as request p, c, subtraction request p, c, game permission / prohibition request, addition request number p, c, subtraction request number p, c are transmitted.

  The addition request p (game ball) command is transmitted to the payout control unit 17 when the game ball is rented out or replayed out from the prepaid balance, and the payout control unit 17 receives it and adds the pseudo ball unit for addition. 120 is driven, and the number of game balls and the addition number p (game balls) are added and updated. The subtraction request p (game ball) command is transmitted to the payout control unit 17 when a game ball is divided and transferred (ball sharing process) or a wagon service is performed. The unit 121 is driven, the number of game balls is subtracted and updated, and the subtraction number p (game balls) is added and updated. The payout control unit 17 updates the score display on the display 51 based on the updated number of game balls, and transmits the updated addition number p (game ball) and subtraction number p (game ball) to the CU. To do. The CU waits for the reception of this data and updates the display of the number of game balls. As a result, the display update of the number of game balls on the CU side as well as the P platform side is based on the detection of the pseudo ball.

  The addition request c (credit) command is transmitted to the payout control unit 31 when the credit from the game ball is deducted, and the payout control unit 31 receives and updates the number of credits. The subtraction request c (credit) command is transmitted to the payout control unit 31 when the credit settlement is performed, and the payout control unit 31 receiving it subtracts and updates the number of credits.

  The game permission / prohibition request command is a command requesting the payout control unit 17 to permit the game or a command requesting prohibition of the game.

  From the payout control unit 17 to the CU communication control unit 80 via the P-unit control unit 81, the number of game balls, the number of credits, the number of additions (game balls, credits), the number of subtractions (game balls, credits), start opening prize information, Various responses of symbol determination number, jackpot information, and error information are transmitted. The number of game balls is calculated by the payout control unit 17 based on various signals such as a winning detection signal, start opening winning information, out ball detection signal, and foul ball detection signal transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17. This is the total number of game balls currently played.

  The number of additions p (game balls) is the number of balls to be added to the number of game balls on the CU side. The number of additions (credits) is a number that should be added to the number of credits on the CU side. From the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17, a winning detection signal, a start opening winning information, and a foul ball detection signal are input. When the condition for adding credits is established based on the detection of the start winning or other winnings, the current credit number is added and updated.

  The value of the addition number counter is transmitted to the CU as an operation response command as in the case of S units as the addition number p. The CU receives the addition number p and adds the number of game balls.

  The subtraction number p (game balls) is the number of balls to be subtracted from the number of game balls on the CU side. The subtraction number c (credit) is a number to be subtracted from the credit number on the CU side. A launch detection signal is input from the game ball control unit 34 to the payout control unit 17. The payout control unit 17 adds the subtraction number c (credit) without driving the pseudo ball unit 121 for subtraction when the subtraction condition for subtracting the credit number based on the firing detection signal is satisfied. On the other hand, when the subtraction request number p is transmitted from the CU side due to a request from the wagon service or the like, the subtraction condition for subtracting the number of game balls is satisfied. And the subtraction number p (game ball) is added based on the detection of the pseudo ball.

  The subtraction number (game balls, credits) is transmitted to the CU as an operation response command as in the case of S units. The CU receives the subtraction number (game balls, credits) and subtracts the number of game balls or credits.

  Each response of the start opening prize information, the number of symbol determinations, the jackpot information, and the error information is a response that designates the information transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17 described above.

  The launch unit 38 of the game ball control unit is provided with a launch motor 28, a touch ring 35, a single launch switch 36, and a launch motor origin sensor 37. The touch ring 35 is for detecting that the player is touching the hitting operation handle 25 and outputting the signal (touch ring input signal). When the touch ring input signal is input, the firing control board 31 emits a firing motor excitation output and drives the firing motor 28. The single shot switch 36 is used for a player to perform an operation (single shot operation) for driving a pachinko ball into the game area 27 one by one. When the single shot operation is performed, the single shot switch 36 is used. A single fire switch signal is output. The firing motor origin sensor 37 detects the origin position of the firing motor 28 and outputs a detection signal thereof. The origin is detected and output every time the firing motor 28 rotates once.

  A touch ring signal and a single shot switch detection signal are input from the launch unit 38 to the launch control board 31. Further, a launch detection signal indicating that the pachinko ball has been launched and a detection signal of the launch motor origin sensor are input from the launch unit 38 to the payout control unit 17. Upon receiving the firing detection signal, the payout control unit 17 updates the subtraction number c (credit) by 1 and updates the number of game balls by 1 for the detection of the number of fired balls. In the case of launch detection, the pseudo ball units 120 and 121 are not driven.

  A firing control signal and a firing permission signal are output from the dispensing control unit 17 to the firing control board 31. Upon receiving this, the launch control board 31 outputs a signal for exciting the launch motor 28. Thereby, the pachinko ball is in a state where it is bullet-launched into the game area 27.

  As described with reference to FIG. 111, the lifting unit 39 provided in the game ball control unit 34 includes the lifting motor 40, the doffing switch (upper) 41a, and the doffing switch (lower) 41b. ing. Further, the transport unit 39 is provided with a game ball excess / deficiency detection switch 1 (42a) and a game ball excess / deficiency detection switch 2 (42b). The gaming ball excess / deficiency detection switches 1 and 2 are switches for detecting whether or not the total number (for example, 50) of the pachinko balls enclosed in the pachinko machine 2 is excessive or insufficient.

  A lifting motor excitation output signal for exciting the lifting motor 40 is transmitted from the dispensing control unit 17 to the lifting unit 39. On the other hand, a signal for detection of lifting (passing / full tank) based on detection signals of the doffing switch (upper) 41a and the doffing switch (lower) 41b is transmitted from the lifting unit 39 to the payout control unit 17. , 50 replenishment detection signals are input as detection signals of the gaming ball excess / deficiency detection switch 1 (42a) and gaming ball excess / deficiency detection switch 2 (42b).

  The effect section 50 includes a display effect control board 53, a display power supply board 51, a display power supply relay board 52, a display 54, a display ROM board 55, a chance button 56, and a jog dial 57. Is provided. The display effect control board 53 includes a CPU, a RAM, and a VDP. Control is performed to read image data by inputting a data read signal to the ROM mounted on the ROM board 55 for the display device, to transmit the display data to the display device 54, and to display the display screen on the display device 54. To do. The button input signal of the chance button 56 and the dial input signal of the jog dial 57 are input to the display effect control board 53, and the display effect control board 53 sends the chance button input signal and the jog dial input signal to the display 54. A display screen reflecting the operation of the jog dial 57 and the operation of the chance button 56 is displayed on the display 54.

  Electric power of a predetermined voltage from the display power supply board 51 is supplied to the display effect control board 53 via the display power supply relay board 52.

  A display control command is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53. This display control command includes a gaming machine information command, a card unit operation command, and a test command. The gaming machine information command is a command indicating a gaming state by the pachinko machine 2 such as the number of jackpot occurrences and the probability variation number, and the card unit operation command is a command when the player operates the card unit 3. The test command is a command for testing the effect display operation of the effect unit 50.

  As the command from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53, the next command is transmitted every 300 ms after the transmission of the previous command. Then, the display effect control board 53 detects a line disconnection and performs a time-over detection process (error process) when the next command is not received despite a lapse of a fixed time exceeding 300 ms after the command is received. Specifically, if the next command has not been transmitted even though 300 ms has been received since the previous command was received, the error count is incremented by 1, and when the error count is counted 10 times continuously, The effect control board 53 detects the time-over, initializes the communication state, and controls the display 54 to display the lighting of the calling lamp and the error animation.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 114, main data of various data stored on each of the CU side and the P base side and its transmission / reception mode will be described. However, various data stored on the CU side and the P base side and the transmission / reception mode thereof are the same as those on the CU side and the S base side described above.

  In the present embodiment, the CU side calculates the number of game balls and credits on the P platform side, and manages the current number of game balls and credits. The P game side also calculates and stores the current number of game balls and credits, but when the number of credits reaches 0 on the P machine side, the P machine itself quickly stops hitting the ball. It is a secondary item used only for controlling. Since the main management of the number of game balls and the number of credits is performed on the CU side, it is not necessary to provide a function for strictly managing the number of game balls and the number of credits on the P platform side, and the cost of P units is reduced accordingly. It can be suppressed as much as possible.

  In particular, compared with the CU, the P units have a short replacement cycle at the game hall and are replaced early. In view of this, the running cost of the game hall where the enclosed game machine is introduced is reduced by providing the CU side with a main management function regarding the number of game balls and credits on the P platform side, thereby reducing the cost on the P platform side. There is an advantage that you can.

  In FIG. 114, stored data in the RAM provided in the main control unit 323 on the CU side and stored data in the RAM installed in the payout control unit 17 on the P table side are illustrated. First, when the power is turned on with the P units (pachinko machine 2) and the CU (card unit 3) being electrically connected for the first time after being installed in the amusement hall, the payout control unit 17 on the P unit side The main chip ID is transmitted from the main control board 16, the main chip ID is transmitted to the CU side, and the payout chip ID stored in the payout control unit 17 is transmitted to the CU side.

  On the CU side, the transmitted main chip ID and payout chip ID are stored. Next, the connection time, that is, the data of the time when the CU side and the P base side are connected and the communication is started is transmitted from the CU side to the P base side, and the P connection side stores the transmitted connection time. .

  In this state, three pieces of information of the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time identified on the CU side are stored on the CU side and the P base side. When the power is turned on thereafter, the three pieces of information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data are transmitted from the P platform side to the CU side.

  On the CU side, the transmitted data and the already stored data are collated, and it is determined whether or not the same P units as in the previous time are connected. The connection time data includes new connection time data transmitted from the CU side to the P base side when communication between the CU side and the P base side is started each time the power is turned on. Is stored on the P platform side.

  Each time an operation instruction and an operation response are transmitted between the CU side and the P base side, the sequence number (SQN) is incremented by "1" and the sequence number is stored on the CU side and the P base side. The The SQN is a communication number for checking whether or not communication is properly performed by updating the number every time data is transmitted / received between the CU and the P platform. SQN is a number updated at the end of the communication number to be updated.

  Current ball related information (counting ball related information) and current credit number related information (counting credit number related information) are transmitted from the P platform side to the CU side. Hereinafter, the current ball related information and the current credit number related information are collectively referred to as current ball / credit related information. This current ball related information is stored in the current ball related information storage area of the RAM.

  Specifically, when the pachinko ball that has been struck into the game area 27 wins and the addition number information is transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17, the addition number c ( (Credit) is counted, and the value of the credit credit addition number counter (addition number c (credit)) is transmitted from the P side to the CU side. If a pachinko ball is fired into the game area 27 and the fired ball is detected by the fired ball detection switch, the credit subtraction number counter counts the number of fired balls as a subtraction number c (credit) based on the detection signal. The value of the credit subtraction counter (subtraction number c) is transmitted from the P platform side to the CU side.

  Further, the pachinko ball has won the start opening (1) or the start opening (2), and the start opening (1) winning signal or the starting opening (2) winning signal has been transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control section 17. In this case, the payout control unit 17 counts the number of winnings with the starting port 1 winning number counter or the starting port 2 winning number counter, and transmits the count value from the P base side to the CU side. The payout control unit 17 counts the number of game balls at the present time with the game ball number counter based on the game ball addition counter and the game ball subtraction counter, and the count value of the game ball counter and the game ball addition counter And the count value of the game ball subtraction number counter are transmitted from the P platform side to the CU side.

  In addition, the payout control unit 17 counts the current credit number with the credit number counter based on the credit addition number counter and the credit subtraction number counter, and the count value of the credit number counter and the count value of the credit addition number counter The count value of the credit subtraction number counter is transmitted from the P platform side to the CU side.

  The game ball addition number counter is counted up according to the addition request number p (game ball) even when the addition request number p (game ball) is input from the CU side. Similarly, the game ball subtraction number counter is also counted up according to the subtraction request number p (game ball) when the subtraction request number p (game ball) is input from the CU side. The credit addition counter is counted up according to the addition request number c (credit) even when the addition request number c (credit) is input from the CU side. Similarly, the credit subtraction number counter is also counted up according to the subtraction request number c (credit) when the subtraction request number c (credit) is input from the CU side.

  After the CU has transmitted the addition request number (game balls, credits) or the subtraction request number (game balls, credits), the game ball addition number counter, game ball subtraction number counter, credit addition number counter, credit subtraction from the S side After waiting for the update result of the number counter to be transmitted, the request for adding or subtracting the number of game balls and the number of credits is finalized.

  On the P side, a game ball addition counter, a game ball subtraction counter, a credit addition counter, a credit subtraction counter, a starting port (1) winning counter, a starting port (2) winning counter, a gaming ball counter and credits Each time the number counter value is transmitted to the CU side, the count value is stored (rewritten) as backup data in the previous ball / credit related information storage area, and then the game ball added number counter as the current ball / credit related information, The values of the game ball subtraction number counter, credit addition number counter, credit subtraction number counter, starting port 1 winning number counter and starting port 2 winning number counter are cleared to zero. In the present embodiment, “clear” has the same meaning as “initialization”.

  As a result, in the storage area of the previous ball / credit related information (current ball / credit related information transmitted immediately before), the addition number (game ball, credit) which is the current ball / credit related information transmitted to the CU side immediately before. The data of the subtraction number (game balls, credits), the starting opening 1 winning number, and the starting opening 2 winning number are stored as backup data. This backup data includes not only the current counter value but also the previous counter value that was not transmitted during the next transmission when the current ball / credit information is not transmitted from the P platform to the CU side. It is intended to be able to transmit even.

  On the CU side, in the accumulated data storage area in the RAM, the total addition number p (game balls, addition number accumulation), the total subtraction number p (game balls, subtraction number accumulation), the total addition number c (credit, addition number accumulation) ), Total subtraction number c (credit, subtraction number cumulative), starting port (1) total winning number (starting port (1) total number of times), starting port (2) total winning number (starting port (2) total number of times), The number of game balls and credits are stored.

  The total addition number p, c, the number of game balls, and the number of credits are updated based on the addition number p, c transmitted from the P platform side. Also, the total subtraction number p, c, the number of game balls, and the credit number are updated based on the subtraction number p, c transmitted from the P platform side. Further, the starting port (1) total winning number is updated based on the value of the starting port 1 winning number counter transmitted from the P unit, and the value of the starting port 2 winning number counter transmitted from the P unit side is updated. Based on the starting opening (2), the total number of winnings is updated. In this way, the CU can manage the latest number of game balls by updating the number of game balls and the number of credits according to the current ball / credit related information transmitted one by one from the P units. Similarly, the CU updates the total addition number p, c, the total subtraction number p, c, the start opening (1), (2) the total winning number with the current ball / credit-related information transmitted one by one from the P units. It becomes possible to manage the latest information.

  In addition to the values of the game ball addition counter, the game ball subtraction counter, the credit addition counter, and the credit subtraction counter from the P side, the CU counts the game ball counter and the credit counter (the number of game balls) (Also called credit number or game ball / credit total number information), but the number of game balls stored by itself is updated based on the value of the game ball addition counter and game ball subtraction counter, The credit number is updated based on the value of the credit addition number counter and the credit subtraction number counter, and the count values of the game ball number counter and the credit number counter sent from the P platform side are not used. For this reason, even if the number of game balls and credits sent from the P platform side does not match the number of game balls and credits managed on the CU side, the number of game balls and credits on the CU side is It is not updated with the number of game balls and credits sent from the P side.

  As shown in FIG. 114, the CU further includes a storage area for storing the stored balls and a storage area for storing the card balance of the accepted (inserted) card. The main control unit 323 (see FIG. 113) of the CU responds to an input requesting the use of the storage ball (for example, a press input of a replay button (also referred to as a replay button) 319 (see FIG. 113) provided on the CU)). Then, a predetermined number of stored balls is subtracted from the storage area for storing stored balls. In addition, the main control unit 323 (see FIG. 113) of the CU subtracts a predetermined value from a storage area that stores the card balance in response to an input requesting use of the card balance (for example, pressing input of the lending button 321).

  Further, when the player performs an operation of deducting the value from the game value (for example, prepaid balance or the number of balls) owned by the player and using it for the game, the number of balls to be deducted is the game ball. An addition request number p (game ball) to be added to the number counter is transmitted from the CU side to the P base side. On the P side, in response to this, the pseudo ball 124 is moved, and on the condition of the detection, the game ball counter and the game ball counter are added and updated. The value of the game ball addition number counter after the addition update is transmitted to the CU. The CU waits for reception of the data and finalizes the addition request.

  On the other hand, when an operation for performing a so-called wagon service order in which a player-owned game value (here, the number of game balls) is withdrawn and exchanged for a drink, etc., is executed, the player-owned game value The subtraction request number p (game balls) is transmitted from the CU side to the P platform side. On the P side, in response to this, the pseudo ball 124 is moved, and on the condition of the detection, the game ball number counter is subtracted and updated, and the game ball subtraction number counter is added and updated. The value of the game ball subtraction counter after the addition update is transmitted to the CU. The CU waits for the reception of the data and finalizes the subtraction request.

  FIG. 115 is a block diagram showing portions related to addition and subtraction of the number of game balls in the card unit 3 and the pachinko machine 2. In FIG. 115, the card unit 3 is provided with a display 312 and a main control unit 323, and the pachinko machine 2 is provided with a display 54, a payout control unit 17, a pseudo ball unit 120 for addition, a pseudo ball unit 121 for subtraction, and A main control board 16 is provided. The configuration of the pseudo ball units 120 and 121 is as described with reference to FIGS. However, as the simulated ball 124, a ball imitating a pachinko ball is used.

  When the player withdraws the remaining amount, inserts a card in which a game ball is recorded (has a game ball), replays a stored ball, or pays out a credit, the main control unit 323 sends a game ball to the payout control unit 31. An addition request is sent. Further, when a player makes a wagon service request or a request to divide and transfer a game ball by a touch panel operation on the screen, a withdrawal from a game ball to a credit, etc., a game ball is sent from the main control unit 323 to the payout control unit 31. Subtraction request is sent.

  On the other hand, on the pachinko gaming machine 2 side, when a winning (including a start winning) is detected, this is transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 31. When there is an addition request p from the main control unit 323, an addition condition for adding the number of game balls is established. In this case, the pseudo ball unit 120 for addition is driven, and the number of game balls is updated on condition that the pseudo ball is moved and detected. When there is a subtraction request p from the main control unit 323, a subtraction condition for subtracting the number of game balls is generated. However, in this case, the pseudo ball unit 121 for subtraction is driven, and the number of game balls is updated on condition that the pseudo ball is moved and detected.

  When the game ball addition condition is satisfied, the payout control unit 31 sets an addition target value according to the cause. The addition target value is the number of detected pseudo balls 124. In the present embodiment, the number of game balls to be updated and the target addition value correspond one-to-one as in the case of S units.

  When the condition for adding the number of game balls is satisfied, the payout control unit 17 sets an addition target value corresponding to the points to be added according to the established addition condition, and rotates the pseudo ball unit 120 for addition. Each time the body 123 is rotated and the pseudo ball 124 is detected, the game ball counter and the game ball addition counter are incremented (+1). When the same number of pseudo balls 124 as the target addition value are detected, the game ball counter and After the game ball addition number counter is incremented, the rotation of the rotating body 123 is stopped.

  Further, when the subtraction condition for the number of game balls is satisfied, the payout control unit 31 sets a subtraction target value corresponding to the point to be subtracted according to the established subtraction condition, and the pseudo ball unit 121 for subtraction. Each time the rotating body 123 is rotated and the pseudo ball 124 is detected, the game ball subtraction counter is incremented and the game ball counter is decremented. When the same number of pseudo balls 124 as the subtraction target value is detected, the game ball subtraction is performed. After the number counter is incremented and the game ball number counter is decremented, the rotation of the rotating body 123 is stopped.

  The count value of the game ball counter is displayed on P display units 54. As a result, the display of the points on the P display units 54 is updated based on the detection of the same number of pseudo ball movements as the planned game ball update number.

  The payout control unit 31 adds and updates the credit number counter by the addition amount of the credit addition number counter when the credit addition number counter is added and updated, and sets the credit number counter when the credit addition number counter is added and updated. The subtraction is updated by the addition of. The count value of the credit counter is displayed on P display units 54.

  The count values of the P game ball addition number counters and the game ball subtraction number counters are the addition number p and the subtraction number p, and the count values of the credit addition number counter and the credit subtraction number counter are the addition number c and the subtraction number c. Are transmitted to the main control unit 323 of the CU at regular time intervals. The main control unit 323 calculates and stores the total number of game balls at the current stage, and displays the total number of game balls at the current stage on the display unit 312 of the CU. As a result, the display of the number of game balls on the display unit 312 on the CU side is also updated based on the detection of the same number of pseudo ball movements as the planned number of game balls to be updated. Similarly, the number of credits at the current stage is displayed on the CU display 312.

  Next, the addition operation of the payout control unit 17 will be described in more detail. First, since the operation of the payout control unit 31 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 2 is turned on is the same as the operation described with reference to FIG. 9, the description thereof will not be repeated here.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the addition process of the payout control unit 17 when the game ball addition condition is satisfied will be described. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the addition process of the payout control unit 17 when the game ball addition condition is satisfied. In FIG. 116, the payout control unit 17 waits until the game ball addition condition is satisfied in step S60. If the game ball addition condition is satisfied, the payout control unit 17 sets an addition target value in step S61 and the inside of the pseudo ball unit 120. A driving pattern for rotating the rotating body 123 (see FIG. 8) is set.

  In addition, the game ball addition condition is that, when a card in which the number of game balls is recorded is inserted into the CU, a balance withdrawal operation is detected by the CU, a storage ball replay operation is detected by the CU, This is established when an operation for converting a credit into a game ball (credit settlement operation) is detected.

  Whether or not the game ball addition condition of S60 is satisfied is detected based on the addition request p (game ball) transmitted from the main control unit. The payout control unit 17 specifies the number of game balls to be added based on the addition request p (game ball).

  The addition target value is set based on the contents of an addition request (deduction from the card balance, insertion of a card in which game balls are recorded, replay of stored balls, credit settlement).

  Further, the drive pattern of the adding pseudo ball unit 120 differs depending on the type of addition condition for adding the number of game balls. The payout control unit 31 stores drive pattern data for each addition condition. For example, when a balance is deducted based on a lending operation, the rotating body 123 is rotated at a constant speed until a predetermined unit number (for example, 125) of pseudo ball movement is detected, and then temporarily stopped. Then, drive pattern data is selected that repeats rotating the rotating body 123 until the predetermined number of pseudo balls 124 move again after a predetermined period until the target value for addition (125) is reached.

  Next, the payout control unit 17 supplies the driving pulse φP to the adding pseudo ball unit 120 at a predetermined period based on the set driving pattern, and rotates the rotating body 123. In step S <b> 63, the payout control unit 17 determines whether or not the pseudo ball 124 is detected based on the output signal φS <b> 1 of the optical sensor 131. If the pseudo ball 124 is not detected in step S63, the process returns to step S62. If the pseudo ball 124 is detected, it is determined in step S64 whether or not it is the second or later detection.

  If it is determined in step S64 that the detection is for the second time or later, it is determined in step S65 whether the time from the previous detection to the current detection is within a specified range. If it is determined in step S65 that the time from the previous detection to the current detection is not within the specified range, there is a possibility that the adding pseudo ball unit 120 has failed or an illegal act has been performed. Perform processing. As error processing, game stop, display of occurrence of abnormality, notification of occurrence of abnormality, etc. are performed.

  If it is determined in step S65 that the time from the previous detection to the current detection is within the specified range, the game ball addition counter and the game ball counter are incremented (+1) in step S67.

  Next, in step S671, it is determined whether or not the game ball addition condition determined to be established in S60 is credit settlement. If it is not credit settlement, the process proceeds to step S68. In the case of credit settlement, in order to subtract the credit in conjunction with the addition of the game ball, in step S672, the credit subtraction number counter is incremented (+1) and the credit number counter is decremented (−1).

  If it is determined in step S64 that it is not the second or later detection, since it is the first detection, step S65 is not executed, and in step S67, the game ball addition number counter and the game ball number counter are incremented (+1).

  In step S68, it is determined whether or not the addition target value has been detected, that is, whether or not the count value of the game ball addition number counter has reached the addition target value. If the addition target value has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S62. Returning, if the addition target value is detected, the output of the drive pulse φP is stopped in step S69, and the rotation of the rotating body 123 of the adding pseudo ball unit 120 is stopped.

FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the subtraction process of the payout control unit 17.
The subtraction process of the payout control unit 17 is the same as the subtraction process described with reference to FIG. That is, referring to FIG. 11, the subtraction condition of S20 is satisfied when the subtraction request number p is transmitted from the CU based on a wagon service request or a game ball number sharing request. However, the point subtraction counter and the point counter in FIG. 11 are a game ball subtraction counter and a game ball counter, respectively. As already described, when a game ball is fired, the credit subtraction number counter is incremented without driving the pseudo ball unit 121 for subtraction.

  The values of the game ball addition counter, the game ball subtraction counter, the credit addition counter, and the credit subtraction counter updated by the processing shown in FIG. 116 and FIG. 117 or the processing similar to FIG. 10 and FIG. It is included in the response and sent to the CU. In response, the CU updates the number of game balls and credits and updates the display of game balls and credits. On the other hand, the P units display the number of game balls and the number of credits based on the game ball counter and the credit number counter updated by the processes shown in FIGS. 116 and 117, or the processes similar to FIGS. Update.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 118 and FIG. 119, a specific example of the drive pattern in the pseudo ball units 120 and 121 will be described.

  FIG. 118 (a) is a time chart showing the waveform of the output signal φS1 of the optical sensor 131 of the pseudo ball unit 121 for subtraction during the withdrawal operation from the game ball to the credit, and FIG. 118 (b) is a request for the wagon service. 6 is a time chart showing a waveform of a signal φS1 in FIG. In FIG. 118 (a), when a player performs a withdrawal operation from a game ball to a credit, a driving pulse φP is supplied from the payout control unit 17 to the adding pseudo ball unit 120, and the rotating body 123 is rotated. The When the tip of the pseudo ball 124 reaches the front of the optical sensor 131, the signal φS1 is raised from the “L” level to the “H” level, and when the rear end of the pseudo ball 124 passes the front of the optical sensor 131, the signal φS1 is “ It is lowered from the “H” level to the “L” level. The payout control unit 31 determines that one pseudo ball 124 has passed when the rising edge and the falling edge of the signal φS1 are detected.

  The driving pattern corresponding to the debiting operation from the game ball to the credit is to temporarily stop the rotating body 123 after rotating the rotating body 123 at a constant speed until a predetermined unit number A (for example, 5) of pseudo ball movement is detected. The driving pattern is such that the rotation of the rotating body 123 is repeated until the number of credits reaches 125 until the predetermined number A of pseudo balls 124 moves again after a predetermined period T1.

  Referring to FIG. 118 (a), payout controller 17 circulates and moves pseudo ball 124 at a predetermined speed according to addition request c (credit), and counts the number of positive pulses appearing in output signal φS1 of optical sensor 131. Then, when the count number of positive pulses reaches A, the circulating movement of the pseudo ball 124 is temporarily stopped and waits for a predetermined time T1. Thereafter, the operation of circulating and moving the pseudo ball 124 is repeated again until the count reaches A. In the present embodiment, since the number of credits given in one lending operation is 125, the above operation is repeated 25 times in total.

  FIG. 118B shows a case where a request for a wagon service is detected. The payout control unit 17 sets the addition target value to B (where B is a positive integer) according to the type of request for the wagon service. Thereafter, the payout control unit 31 circulates the pseudo ball 124 at a rotational speed different from that at the time of the withdrawal operation from the game ball to the credit in FIG. 118A, and the number of positive pulses appearing in the output signal φS1 of the optical sensor 131. When the count number of positive pulses reaches B, the circular movement of the pseudo ball 124 is stopped.

  Note that the number of game balls subtracted at the time of a deduction operation from one game ball to credit is 125 in the case of P units. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 118 (a) and 118 (b), the rotational speed of the rotating body 123 at the time of request for the wagon service is made faster than that at the time of the withdrawal operation from the game ball to the credit. In this case, the pulse width of the positive pulse of the output signal φS1 of the optical sensor 131 in the request for the wagon service is smaller than that during the withdrawal operation from the game ball to the credit. Further, when one positive pulse is detected, a predetermined number of game balls of 2 or more may be subtracted.

  In this way, by changing the movement mode of the pseudo ball 124 when subtracting the game ball depending on whether the game ball is based on a credit debit operation or on the occurrence of a wagon service request, the pseudo ball 124 is changed. The factor that the number of game balls is updated can be specified only by visually recognizing the movement mode. Here, two cases are illustrated as comparative examples of the addition conditions, but it is desirable to perform control so that the movement mode of the pseudo ball 124 is different for each of the other subtraction conditions.

  Further, it is desirable to perform control so that the movement mode of the pseudo ball 124 in the adding pseudo ball unit 120 is different for each addition condition. Thereby, for example, it is desirable to similarly control the addition conditions such as the storage ball replay setting only by looking at the movement of the pseudo ball 124 in the adding pseudo ball unit 120. It is possible to specify whether or not the number of game balls is added based on the stored ball replay setting.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 119, a description will be given of desirable control when other game ball update conditions are satisfied while the game ball update condition is satisfied and the pseudo ball 124 is moving.

  For example, if a withdrawal operation from a game ball to a credit is performed while moving the pseudo ball 124 based on the generation of a request for the wagon service, as shown in FIG. Continue to move and detect the pseudo ball corresponding to point B based on the request. When all of them are completed, after waiting for a predetermined time T2, the pseudo ball movement / detection subtraction process based on the withdrawal operation from the game ball to the credit is performed by the method shown in FIG. 118 (a). That is, the process based on the wagon service request is prioritized over the process based on the debit operation from the game ball to the credit. This priority order may be reversed. In other words, if the pseudo ball movement based on the generation of the wagon service request is not completed at the time when the deduction operation from the game ball to the credit is detected, the wagon service request is performed after the subtraction process based on the ball lending operation. The movement of the pseudo ball 124 based on the occurrence of this may be continued.

  Further, when a wagon service is requested during the withdrawal from the game ball to the credit, as shown in FIG. 119 (b), the subtraction process based on the operation of the withdrawal from the game ball to the credit is immediately interrupted, and only for a predetermined time T2. After waiting, the B point is subtracted based on the wagon service request. When the B point subtraction process is completed, after waiting for a predetermined time T2, the subtraction process for the withdrawal from the suspended game ball to the credit is resumed. Thereby, the process based on the request of the wagon service is prioritized over the process based on the withdrawal operation from the game ball to the credit. In FIG. 119 (b), a state where the Aa point is subtracted at the time of the deduction operation from the first game ball to the credit, and the point a is subtracted at the time of the deduction operation from the game ball to the credit after restarting. It is shown. However, a is a positive integer smaller than A.

  In any case, in the present embodiment, when both of the two subtraction conditions are satisfied, the processing based on the satisfaction of one subtraction condition is executed or the processing based on the satisfaction of the other subtraction condition is performed. There is one feature in that it is possible to distinguish between the two. In other words, in the example of FIGS. 119 (a) and 119 (b), a pause period T2 is provided when switching between the pseudo ball movement based on the withdrawal operation from the game ball to the credit and the pseudo ball movement based on the generation of the wagon service request. Thus, it is possible to distinguish that each is a pseudo ball movement based on the establishment of another subtraction condition.

In addition, here, as a comparative example of the subtraction condition, a case where it is based on a debit operation from a game ball to a credit and a case where a request for a wagon service is generated is illustrated, but one condition is similarly applied to other subtraction conditions. It is desirable to provide a pause period from the end of the pseudo ball movement based on the establishment to the start of the pseudo ball movement based on the establishment of the other condition. In addition, it is desirable to control not only the subtraction condition but also the addition condition such as storage ball replay.
<When a pseudo ball unit is provided on both the CU and S units>
FIG. 120 is an example in which the pseudo ball units 120 and 121 are provided on both the CU and the P base. In such a configuration, when a factor for updating the number of game balls occurs on the CU side, the pseudo ball unit 120, 121 on the CU side moves the pseudo ball 124, while the factor for updating the number of game balls If this occurs on the P platform side, it is conceivable that the pseudo ball 124 is moved by the P ball side pseudo ball units 120 and 121.

In that case, as compared with the case where the pseudo ball units 120 and 121 are provided only on the P platform side as shown in FIG. 115, when the balance is withdrawn, the replay of the stored ball, the insertion of the card in which the game ball is recorded, and the credit settlement The pseudo ball unit 120 for addition on the CU side operates, and the pseudo ball unit 121 for subtraction on the CU side operates during the wagon service, the game ball split transfer, and the credit button operation. Then, in these cases, the CU side can update the game ball number display in accordance with the detection of the pseudo ball on the local side without waiting for an operation response indicating the update of the game ball number from the P units. Communication control for updating the number of balls can be simplified. On the other hand, in the case of the P platform, the CU side is used for the balance deduction, the replay of the stored ball, the insertion of the card on which the score is recorded, the credit check, the wagon service and the split of the score, and the credit button operation. The display of the number of game balls is updated after receiving the addition request and subtraction request transmitted from the CU side based on the ball detection. In the case of the configuration shown in FIG. 120, when an update factor for the number of game balls occurs on the CU side, the number of game balls is updated on condition that the pseudo ball 124 is detected by the CU side pseudo ball units 120 and 121. On the other hand, when a factor for updating the number of game balls is generated on the P platform side, the number of game balls is updated on the condition that the pseudo ball 124 is detected by the pseudo ball units 120 and 121 on the P platform side. Similar to the configuration of FIG. 115, the number of game balls is displayed based on the detection of a pseudo ball.
<When a pseudo ball unit is installed only in the CU>
Alternatively, the pseudo ball unit for addition 120 and the pseudo ball unit for subtraction 121 may be provided only on the CU side and not on the P base side. When configured in this way, the CU has an update factor for the number of game balls on the CU side, that is, a lending operation for deducting the card balance, a replay operation for storing balls, and a card insertion in which the number of game balls is recorded. When an operation for requesting a wagon service, a credit button operation, or a credit checkout occurs, the pseudo ball unit for addition 120 or the pseudo ball unit for subtraction 121 is operated according to the type of addition or subtraction. Subsequently, the CU updates the game ball number display on the display 312 by updating the memory of the game ball number according to the detection / movement of the pseudo ball 124. Further, an operation instruction command for an addition request or subtraction request is transmitted to the P units.

  The P machines that have received the operation instruction command add and update the game ball counter in response to the addition request, and subtract and update the game ball counter in response to the subtraction request. Further, the display of the number of game balls on the display 51 is updated according to the value of the updated game ball counter. However, the game ball addition number counter and the game ball subtraction number counter are not updated. This is because the number of game balls is already updated on the CU side when the addition request and the subtraction request are transmitted.

  By controlling as described above, even if the pseudo ball units 120 and 121 are provided only on the CU side, both the CU and the P stand are subject to the movement / detection of the pseudo ball 124. The display can be updated.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, when a card balance or a game ball converted from a card balance or a stored medal (a stored ball) as an example of a game value is consumed and converted into a credit, Since the display of the score and the number of game balls is subtracted and updated on the condition that the movement of the pseudo ball 124 is detected, an operation corresponding to the collection of the value object is performed in a pseudo manner like a game which is not a point system. As a result, the points and game balls can be subtracted and updated.

  Or, conversely, when credits are converted into points or game balls according to the credit settlement operation, the display of the number of points and game balls is added and updated on the condition that the movement of the pseudo ball 124 is detected. Therefore, it is possible to update the points and the number of game balls by performing an operation corresponding to the collection of the value object like a game that is not a point type.

  In particular, in this embodiment, the player can visually recognize the movement of the pseudo ball 124, and the movement of the pseudo ball 124 and the update of the game ball are completely linked. It is possible to prevent a player from feeling uncomfortable because no wrinkles occur between the movement and the updated display of the points.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the pseudo ball 124 is repeatedly rotated by rotating the rotating body 123 on which the predetermined number of pseudo balls 124 are arranged, and the predetermined number of pseudo balls 124 are repeatedly used. Therefore, cost reduction can be achieved.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the time interval at which the pseudo ball 124 is detected is out of the reference range, a predetermined error process is executed. For example, the pseudo ball 124 in the pseudo ball unit 120, 121 is Regardless of the movement, by inputting a signal similar to the detection signal output from the pseudo ball unit to the gaming machine or CU, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as illegally adding and updating the points.

  In this embodiment, when the power is turned on, the rotating body 123 in the pseudo ball units 120 and 121 is moved to a predetermined initial position, and when the condition for moving the pseudo ball 124 is satisfied, the rotating body is moved from that position. 123 is started, the time until the movement of the pseudo ball 124 is detected after the power is turned on can be made constant.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the driving pattern for rotationally driving the rotating body 123 differs depending on each of the plurality of types of factors that cause the pseudo ball 124 to move. It is possible to specify whether or not the pseudo ball 124 is moving based on such factors (such as a conversion operation from a point to credit, a replay operation, a point sharing operation, a wagon service request, a credit button operation, a credit checkout operation, etc.) .

  Furthermore, even when two factors out of a plurality of types of factors that cause the pseudo ball 124 to move overlap, a predetermined pause period is provided between the end of one process and the start of the other process. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish between the control corresponding to one process and the control corresponding to the other process.

Next, modifications, feature points, and the like in the embodiment described above will be described below.
(1) The rotating body 123 of the pseudo ball units 120 and 121 may be a single disk member having an arrangement portion for arranging predetermined objects such as balls at predetermined intervals on the outer periphery. Further, the predetermined object may be detachably attached to the rotating body, or may be integrally formed with the rotating body.

  (2) In the present embodiment, the movement of the pseudo ball is made visible to the player. Thereby, it is possible to show the player how the actual movement of the pseudo ball is reflected in the display of the subtraction update or addition update of the score, the update of the score and the movement of the pseudo ball No wrinkles occur between them.

  However, a window such as a slit provided on the front surface of the gaming machine in this embodiment may not be provided so that the movement of the pseudo ball is not visible to the player. Or it is good also as providing a shutter in a window part and being able to switch to the state which can be visually recognized, and the state which cannot be visually recognized. Further, the switching operation can be performed by the game hall manager and not by the player, so that a switching operation unit is provided inside the gaming machine, or the shutter is received by a command signal from a management device carried by the manager. It is good also as what opens and closes.

  (3) In addition to providing two units for addition and subtraction, a plurality of pseudo ball units may be provided for each point update condition. For example, a pseudo ball unit may be provided for each of deduction from the balance, display of card points, wagon service, credit button operation, and credit checkout operation.

  (4) The pseudo ball unit is not limited to a structure that moves a predetermined object by the rotation of the rotating body 123. For example, a circulation path for circulating and moving a predetermined object in the pseudo ball unit is formed, and a sensor for detecting the predetermined object is provided at a predetermined position of the circulation path. A predetermined number of predetermined objects are enclosed in such a pseudoball unit. In this case, it may be possible to realize the movement of the predetermined object by dropping the predetermined object downward from the upper side and then feeding the predetermined object again upward by a lifting mechanism such as a screw. Alternatively, it is also conceivable to provide a feed mechanism that feeds a predetermined object in one direction to a predetermined position of the circulation path in a state where the predetermined object is enclosed in a row in the circulation path.

  (5) The pseudo ball may be moved only in one of addition and subtraction. In other words, only one of the pseudo ball unit 120 for addition and the pseudo ball unit 121 for subtraction in the present embodiment may be provided.

  (6) In the present embodiment, the credit update display does not require movement / detection of the pseudo ball. However, the credit update display may also be made conditional on the movement / detection of the pseudo ball. In this case, a pseudo ball unit for credits different from that for points (game balls) may be provided in the gaming machine.

  (7) Further, the circulation path may be provided in the gaming machine as in the circulation path for P shot balls instead of being provided in a unit called a pseudo ball unit. Alternatively, in the case of P units, a contact part that communicates with the circulation path for the pseudo ball is provided in a part of the circulation path for the fire ball, and the connection part is opened and closed to capture the fire ball as a pseudo ball. You may do it. For example, a pseudo ball full tank sensor for detecting whether or not the pseudo ball in the circulation path for the pseudo ball is full is provided, and the communication unit is opened until full tank is detected. At this stage, the payout control unit 17 or the main control board may execute control for closing the communication unit.

  (8) Moreover, you may provide the discharge | emission and injection | throwing-in part which can discharge | emit / inject a pseudo ball as needed in the predetermined location of the circulation path.

  (9) When the point addition condition is established, the gaming machine adds a number of pseudo balls corresponding to the number of points to be added from a plurality of pseudo balls in the circulation path from a predetermined first location in the circulation path. While moving to the second location, considering the relationship with the number of credits, the stored score is added and updated, and a response command for adding the score is transmitted to the CU. The CU may add and update the stored number of points.

  (10) When the point subtraction condition is satisfied, the gaming machine may select the number of pseudo balls corresponding to the number of points to be subtracted from the plurality of pseudo balls in the circulation path. To the first location, taking into consideration the relationship with the number of credits, subtracting and updating the stored score, and transmitting a response command for subtracting the score to the CU. The CU may update the stored number of points by subtraction.

  (11) When the subtraction condition is satisfied, the pseudo ball may be moved from the first location to the second location in the same manner as when the addition condition is satisfied. Alternatively, the pseudo ball may be moved only when the addition condition is satisfied, or the pseudo ball may be moved only when the subtraction condition is satisfied.

  (12) Furthermore, if a plurality of movement paths for moving a predetermined object are provided between the first location and the second location, the update is performed when one addition condition or subtraction condition is satisfied. When the number of points to be updated is large (for example, when the number of subtractions based on the conversion from points to credit is large or the bet number is a MAX value), a pseudo ball corresponding to the number of points updated is selected. It can be moved quickly. As a result, it is possible to prevent an uncomfortable operation such that the movement of the pseudo ball continues endlessly even though the update display of the points is finished.

  (13) Further, if the first location and the second location are arranged so as to be in the relationship between the upper part and the lower part in the vertical direction, the predetermined object is moved from the first place to the second place. It can be dropped naturally by its own weight, and the moving mechanism of the artificial ball can be simplified. In this case, the pseudo ball is allowed to flow down from the first location to the first location in both the addition update and the subtraction update of the points. Alternatively, the pseudo ball may be allowed to flow down from the first location to the first location only in one of the addition update of the score and the subtraction update of the score. Alternatively, it is also possible to provide a flow-down path for addition update of the holding point and a flow-down path for update of the subtraction of the holding point separately, and provide a perspective window for addition update visual recognition and a perspective window for subtraction update visual recognition, respectively. Good.

  (14) In particular, when a game ball is used as the predetermined object, the shape of the game ball is spherical, so that the circulation of the predetermined object can be performed more smoothly than when a medal is used as the predetermined object. As the game ball, it is conceivable to adopt a pachinko ball that is normally used in a game store. In this case, for example, when the number of gaming machines is S, the number of points is updated if five pachinko balls correspond to the value of one medal of the slot machine (the value of points = 1). In such a case, a pachinko ball that is five times the number of updated points is moved between the first location and the second location. A pachinko ball visually recognized through a see-through window provided between the first location and the second location is a “show ball” exclusively used to indicate to the player that the points have been updated. Will function as.

  (15) In the above example, it has been described that a slot machine that updates the holding point in conjunction with moving a predetermined object in a predetermined direction while adopting the holding point method is described. Instead of a predetermined object such as a medal or game ball, a dedicated object (for example, a spherical object made of a material different from that of a general pachinko ball) may be used to update the holding points in conjunction with the movement. Good.

  (16) The pseudo ball unit is not divided into two for addition and subtraction, but may be an addition / subtraction unit that serves both. In this case, it is sufficient to provide a pseudo ball unit on either the CU or the gaming machine. Of course, only one of the CU and the gaming machine has an addition / subtraction unit, the other has no pseudo ball unit, the other has an addition / subtraction unit, and the other has addition and subtraction. Any of the configurations in which two pseudo ball units are provided may be adopted.

  (17) When a dual-purpose addition / subtraction unit is employed as the pseudo ball unit, the movement direction of the pseudo ball may be different depending on whether the points are added or subtracted. Thereby, by checking the moving direction of the pseudo ball, it is possible to specify whether it is a point addition or a point subtraction. Alternatively, the moving directions of the pseudo balls may be the same, and the moving speed may be varied.

  (18) When a dual-purpose addition / subtraction unit is employed as the pseudo-ball unit, there is a problem in the control method when both the holding point addition condition and the subtraction condition are satisfied. In such a case, for example, it can be considered that one is processed first and the other is processed thereafter. In that case, it is desirable to provide a certain pause period between the end of one process and the start of the other process, so that one process can be distinguished from the other process.

  (19) If both the holding point addition condition and the subtraction condition are satisfied, the difference between the addition point when the addition condition is satisfied and the subtraction point when the subtraction condition is satisfied is calculated, and the pseudo ball is moved by the pseudo ball unit by the calculated point. You may make it make it. In this case, in the case where the pseudo ball unit for addition and the pseudo ball unit for subtraction are provided, it is sufficient to operate only one of them. On the other hand, when a dual-purpose addition / subtraction unit is employed, the number of movements of pseudo balls can be reduced.

  (20) In this embodiment, one pseudo ball is moved with respect to one point, but a plurality of pseudo balls may be moved with respect to one point. Alternatively, one pseudo ball may be moved with respect to a plurality of points, or a plurality of pseudo balls may be moved n2 (n1 ≠ n2) with respect to the plurality of points n1.

  (21) Among the conditions for operating the dummy ball unit, the conditions that occur on the CU side include the withdrawal of the remaining amount, the insertion of a card with a recorded score, the replay operation of the stored ball, the request for the wagon service, and the score For example, a split request. In the above embodiment, when these conditions are satisfied, an operation instruction command is transmitted from the CU side. However, all the operation signals relating to the establishment of these conditions may be input to the payout control unit on the gaming machine side provided with the pseudo ball unit. In that case, an addition request or a subtraction request transmitted from the CU to the gaming machine. Can be made unnecessary.

  (22) In this embodiment, when the score is updated by a predetermined point, the display of the score is displayed on the condition that the movement of the pseudo ball corresponding to the predetermined point is detected by the pseudo ball unit. Only fixed points were updated. However, instead of this, in order to update the score by a predetermined point, the display of the score may be updated by a predetermined point as soon as the first pseudo ball is detected by the pseudo ball unit. .

  (23) Further, in this embodiment, every time the movement of the pseudo ball is detected by the pseudo ball unit, the score counter and the point addition / subtraction counter are updated, and the pseudo ball unit is still in operation. However, at the stage when the operation response can be returned, the value of the point addition / subtraction counter updated so far is transmitted to the CU as the operation response. Then, once the value of the point addition / subtraction number counter is cleared to 0, the value of the point addition / subtraction number counter is updated again based on the pseudo ball detected by the operation of the pseudo ball unit. The counter values are transmitted at the transmission timing of the operation response. As a result, the point update display is performed gradually (every time the operation response arrives at the CU). However, instead of such control, the value of the point addition / subtraction counter is continuously updated without clearing the value until the movement of all the pseudo balls scheduled in the pseudo ball unit is completed, and the value is updated. Aside from being transmitted as an operation response, an operation response reflecting the value of the point addition / subtraction number counter may be transmitted to the CU when the movement of all the pseudo balls is completed.

  (24) The operation instruction command transmitted from the CU side to the gaming machine side includes bit data indicating the type of addition request and subtraction request. However, instead of including such bit data in the operation instruction command, a detection signal for conversion operation from a score to a credit, a detection signal for a replay operation, or a card on which a score is recorded is inserted. In addition, a signal indicating that there has been an operation for dividing and sharing the points may be input from the CU to the gaming machine. Alternatively, these operation signals may be simply relayed by the CU and directly input to the gaming machine.

  (25) Each unit is controlled so that the rotation direction of the pseudo ball of the addition pseudo ball unit and the rotation direction of the pseudo ball of the subtraction ball unit are opposite to each other. You may make it easy to understand that it is.

  (26) Cumulative storage means (counter) for accumulating and storing the number of detected movements of the pseudo ball may be provided in the CU or the gaming machine. Further, the CU or the gaming machine may be provided with a comparison determination means for comparing and determining the number of points calculated based on the storage of the cumulative storage means and the actual number of points. Furthermore, a notification unit that notifies the determination result of the comparison determination unit (display on a display or generation of a notification sound) may be provided in the CU or the gaming machine. By providing such a comparison / determination means, it may be possible to detect the presence / absence of fraud in which the score is illegally added and updated without the movement of the pseudo ball. In addition, you may make it provide each above means in the management apparatus (Hall management computer etc.) connected so that communication with CU or a game machine is possible.

  (27) In the next game in which replay has occurred on the S units, the bet number is automatically set. However, with respect to this bet number, an operation is not accepted even if a cancel operation or an operation to decrease the BET number is performed. May be. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the player from being given a profit different from the regame by performing a cancel operation or the like when the replay occurs.

  (28) A subtraction request is sent from the CU when split points are transferred (sharing points are shared). In this case as well, a pseudo ball is detected by moving a pseudo ball with a subtraction ball unit for subtraction. The score may be subtracted on condition that this is done.

  (29) In the embodiment, each time the cancel button is operated once, the currently set bet number is decreased by one, while the cancel button is pressed and held for a predetermined time or longer. All of the bets currently set by will be canceled. However, instead of this, by operating the cancel button, all of the currently set bets are canceled, while 3 BET is reduced to 1 BET by pressing one BET switch in the 3 BET state You may do it. Alternatively, in addition to a cancel button for canceling all the currently set bets, a bet number reducing button for decreasing the set bet number by one may be provided.

  (30) In the present embodiment, when the gaming value is converted into points, the movement unit starts to move the predetermined object, and the movement detection unit performs the predetermined number of times corresponding to the point conversion amount. Movement control means for stopping movement of the predetermined object by the moving means when movement of the predetermined object is detected is included.

(31) The above-described embodiment discloses an invention having the following configuration.
A gaming system comprising a slot machine (slot machine 2S) in which a game is played by a player, and a gaming device (card unit 3) connected so as to be communicable with the slot machine,
The slot machine is
First control means (main control board 116) for controlling the slot machine;
Second control means (LSI 117) communicatively connected to the first control means,
The first control means includes
Error determination means (CPU of the main control board 116) for determining an error that occurs during the control of the slot machine;
Abnormality notification control means (CPU of main control board 116, I / O port) for performing control to notify abnormality when the occurrence of an error is determined by the error determination means,
The second control means includes
Communicatively connected to the gaming device (connected by connectors 330, 220),
Including an abnormality determination means (authentication sequence of FIG. 35) for determining an abnormality of the first control means;
Output means for outputting abnormality notification information for notifying that an abnormality has occurred when the abnormality determining means determines that an abnormality has occurred in the first control means (detecting an abnormality in the main control board 116) The payout control unit 31 notifies the CU communication control unit 80 from the S-unit communication control unit 82),
The gaming system according to claim 1, wherein the gaming device performs control for notifying abnormality when the abnormality notification information is received.

  According to such a configuration, the first control means itself having a control function for notifying an abnormality when an error occurs during the control of the slot machine is determined by the second control means, and the first control means The first control having an abnormality notification control function when an abnormality occurs in order to perform control for notifying the abnormality in the gaming apparatus that the abnormality of the control means itself has occurred is output from the first control means to the gaming apparatus. Even when an abnormality exists in the means itself, the abnormality notification control can be performed satisfactorily.

  (32) In the above embodiment, the CU communication control unit 80 and the S unit communication control unit 82 receive the information sent from the main control unit 323 and the payout control unit 31 and use the information as it is as the S unit or Although it transmits to CU, the received information may be processed (protocol conversion, serial / parallel conversion, etc.), and the processed information may be transmitted.

  (33) The authentication sequence and the business message sequence in FIGS. 34 to 42 are controls of the main control unit 323 and the communication control unit 80. However, the control of the authentication sequence and the business message sequence in FIGS. It may be performed by the payout control unit 31 and the S-unit communication control unit 82 of the slot machine 2S, and further, other gaming machines installed in the game hall (card issuing device, clearing device, hall management device, prize exchange) Apparatus).

  42 may be performed between an island computer connected to the hall management computer 1 and a slot machine computer, and includes a main control unit and a communication control unit. In the Z counter, the communication control unit is connected to the prize management device, and may be performed between the main control unit and the communication control unit. Further, for example, a communication control unit connected to the medal saving device may be provided in the card unit, and the business message sequence shown in FIG. 42 may be executed between the communication control unit and the main control unit of the card unit. .

  (34) The BB serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. 37 is authentication using two types of SIDs, that is, the SID of the main control unit and the SID of the CU communication control unit, but one type of SID (for example, a CU SID). ) May be used to authenticate the main control unit and the CU communication control unit. In this case, authentication that the same SID is stored is performed.

  (35) In the above-described embodiment, the score is displayed on the display 312 provided on the CU side, and the score is displayed on the S-side display 51. When displaying the number of points with the CU-side display, there is an advantage that the number of points can be displayed on the S units having no display unit by applying the CU in the present embodiment. On the other hand, when the score display section is provided on the S platform side, the display control may be performed on the CU side.

  (36) Alternatively, the display control may be performed on the S platform side. When the display control is performed on the S platform side, the number of points managed by the CU can be displayed on the score display unit by receiving information on the number of points to be displayed from the CU side. It becomes possible. Further, when the display control is performed on the S platform side as described above, there is an advantage that it is possible to display a score with a high decorative (production) value. When the display control is performed on the S platform side, the display of the score count is not performed based on the value of the score counter stored in the S platform itself, instead of receiving information on the number of scores to be displayed from the CU side. It is good also as what controls.

  (37) In the above-described embodiment, a command is transmitted from the CU to the S units and the S units respond to the response to the CU. Conversely, a command is transmitted from the S unit to the CU. Then, the communication form in which the CU returns a response to the S units in response thereto may be used.

  Specifically, the command (operation instruction) generated by the payout control unit 31 is transmitted to the S unit communication control unit 82, and the command (operation instruction) is transmitted from the S unit communication control unit 82 to the CU. A response (operation response) corresponding to the command (operation instruction) is returned from the CU to the S unit communication control unit 82, and the S unit communication control unit 82 transmits the response (operation response) to the payout control unit 31.

  In this case, the payout control unit 31 executes retransmission of the command shown in FIG. That is, the payout control unit 31 retransmits the command to the S unit communication control unit 82 when the response cannot be received from the S unit communication control unit 82 for one second after the command is transmitted. Furthermore, the payout control unit 31 also executes the transmission of the communication status request and the communication status confirmation retry shown in FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b). That is, the payout control unit 31 transmits an operation instruction to the S-unit communication control unit 82 and then transmits a communication state request, and confirms the communication state based on the communication state response returned from the S-unit communication control unit 82. . When it is determined that the confirmation result is abnormal, an operation instruction is transmitted again, a communication state request is transmitted, and a communication state confirmation retry is executed.

  (38) Further, in the above-described embodiment, communication is performed between the CU and the S units periodically (for example, 200 ms), but instead, when the necessity of communication occurs, the CU Alternatively, communication may be performed by transmitting data from one of the S units to the other.

  (39) In the above-described embodiment, an operation response including a rejection signal that does not comply with a request such as addition rejection ON, subtraction rejection ON, clear rejection ON, etc. is returned from the S units to the CU. Thus, it is determined that the request is rejected based on the rejection ON. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of the S units returning the response of the rejection ON operation, the operation response including the addition / subtraction number and the score data not complying with the request from the CU is returned to the CU, Thus, it may be determined whether the returned data (addition / subtraction number, score, etc.) is in accordance with the request, and thereby determine whether the request has been rejected.

  (40) In the above-described embodiment, a case where a play stop state is detected when a power failure at the CU or a communication break between the CU and the S unit is detected has been described. It may be controlled so that the game can be continued on the S platform side. In that case, the addition subtraction number data generated along with the game continued from the occurrence of the communication interruption until the recovery from those abnormalities is started and stored on the S side, These data and point data may be transmitted to the CU to correct the backup value of the data on the CU side.

  (41) In the above-described embodiment, the S units determine that communication has been interrupted by the processing of FIG. 32 when a command from the CU has not been transmitted for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds). However, the communication interruption may be determined by the following method.

  The slot machine 2S is provided with a connection detector that detects whether or not the slot machine 2S and the card unit 3 are electrically connected. Referring to FIG. 4, CU communication control unit 80 and payout control unit 31 are connected by a signal line as described above. In addition to the signal line, a predetermined voltage (for example, 5 V) from card unit 3 is applied. A connection detection signal line to be input to the slot machine 2S side is provided. The connection detection signal line and the signal line between the CU communication control unit 80 and the payout control unit 31 are formed of the same cable, and the cable unit is disconnected or the connectors 330 and 220 are detached. Since the voltage of the connection detection signal line becomes 0 V when the power is turned off, the connection detector detects this, and the detection signal is input to the payout control unit 31. The payout control unit 31 determines that the disconnection of the cable, the disconnection of the connectors 330 and 220, and the power supply of the card unit 3 have been cut off due to the input of the detection signal.

  (42) In the process of FIG. 43, the S units are programmed so that when the communication start request (correction request) including correction ON is received, the S unit cannot reject the correction request. However, there is a case where a serious error that cannot correct the holding point or the like has occurred in the S units even though the communication start request (correction request) including correction ON is received. In consideration of such a severe error state, after transmitting a communication start request (correction request) including correction ON on the CU side, the content of the operation response transmitted from the S unit is checked, and the S side It is possible to determine whether or not the score of the mark has been corrected correctly, and when it has not been corrected, control for shifting to an error state may be performed.

  That is, the CU determines in advance when it has determined that a slot machine (for example, S units) cannot still add points after receiving a communication start request (correction request) including correction ON in FIG. Error control means for performing control to shift to a specified error state.

  As control for shifting to the error state, for example, a severe error notification is performed by the display 312 and a notification that a serious error has occurred is given to the hall management computer 1 to notify the error by the hall management computer 1. It may be possible to promote artificial responses by staff.

(43) On the S platform side, the number of additions may be counted as follows.
Counters A and B are provided as counters for counting the number of additions on the S side. First, the number of additions is counted by the counter A. When the transmission timing of the addition number is reached, the count value of the counter A is transmitted to the CU. Thereafter, the value of the counter A is maintained, and thereafter, the number of addition is counted by the counter B. When the transmission timing of the addition number is reached, the count value of the counter B is transmitted to the CU. Thereafter, the value of the counter B is maintained, while the count value of the counter A is cleared to 0, and thereafter, the counter A counts the addition number. Thereafter, the above counting by the counters A and B is repeated.

  The above counting method may be used for counting the number of subtractions on the S platform side. Alternatively, it may be used for counting external output information.

  (44) The S units may transmit one piece of information after addition / subtraction of the addition number and the subtraction number to the CU, instead of sending the two information of the addition number and the subtraction number to the CU. That is, such information also constitutes “update information that can specify the change amount”.

  (45) The communication method is not limited to the command-response method described above. The S units may transmit points related information such as points to the CU at predetermined time intervals without waiting for a command from the CU. Alternatively, the S platform may transmit the score related information to the CU every time a predetermined amount of information is obtained, instead of transmitting the score related information at predetermined time intervals. For example, in the case of addition, it is conceivable that the addition number is transmitted to the CU every time one or two or more predetermined addition numbers are generated.

  (46) In this embodiment, two counters, an addition number counter and a subtraction number count, are provided on the S side. However, instead of these two counters, a single addition / subtraction counter may be used which adds by increasing the score (occurrence of winnings, etc.) and subtracts by decreasing the score (setting the number of bets, etc.). In this case, the value of this one addition / subtraction counter is transmitted from the S units to the CU.

(47) This embodiment includes the following configuration.
After the gaming device transmits a command for instructing subtraction of points to the slot machine and before receiving a response to the command, a process for reestablishing a communication connection with the slot machine In the process of re-establishing the communication connection, it is determined whether or not the command for instructing the subtraction of the point has reached the slot machine based on the data transmitted from the slot machine side. The command transmission means for canceling the instruction for subtracting the point by the command when the arrival determination means determines that the command for instructing the subtraction of the point has arrived. Is sent to the slot machine, and the secondary holding point update means is a command for instructing the subtraction of the holding point. When a command to cancel the point subtraction instruction is received, if the point has already been subtracted based on the command to instruct the point subtraction, or the point has been subtracted due to a shortage of points. In any case, the score corresponding to the cancellation amount of the subtraction instruction is added to the score stored in the secondary score storage means.

  (48) In the present embodiment, a signal requesting the end of the game is input to the CU by operating the return button 322. However, the CU may be configured to be able to input a signal requesting the end of the game from a management computer or the like.

(49) The CU and the S platform may be connected so as to be communicable wirelessly instead of wired connection.
(50) By providing the function of the payout control unit 31 on the main control board 116, the payout control unit 31 may not be provided in the slot machine 2S.

  (51) The payout control unit 31 performs control to stop the game when the score counter stored on the slot machine 2S side becomes zero. However, the payout control unit 31 may execute the control when the score counter reaches a predetermined value other than zero. For example, the predetermined value can be designated and input in advance by the player using a predetermined operation switch of the slot machine. The payout control unit 31 sets the game prohibition state when the score counter reaches a predetermined value designated by the player. As a result, the player can automatically stop the game when the remaining number of points has reached a predetermined number.

  (52) In the above-described embodiment, the presentation unit 50 is provided on the slot machine 2S side and various displays are performed by the display 51. However, in the slot machine 2S that does not include the presentation unit 50, There may be. In that case, even if a command including an operation instruction such as ON during card insertion processing, ON during addition display, ON during calculation display, ON during clear display is transmitted to the S unit 2S, Display control according to the command is not performed, and only the display on the CU side is displayed.

  (53) In the saved medal sharing process shown in FIGS. 86 to 88, the card B that is ejected to divide and transfer (share medal sharing) to another person is used as a stock card. Instead, the card B to be transferred to another person is inserted into the card insertion / discharge slot 309 from the outside of the CU, and the divided medals for divided transfer (shared medal) are recorded and discharged to the inserted card B. You may make it do. In that case, on the display screen of the shared processing status shown in FIGS. 92 to 95, the sharing is performed between the first process of discharging the own card and the second process of discharging the shared card. Card insertion processing will be added.

  (54) In the saving medal sharing process shown in FIG. 87, the visitor card B is first inserted and the game is started. Instead, the player inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 302 of the CU. A game may be started. In that case, the transfer card B used for sharing the stored medals is taken out from the card stock part in the CU and discharged in association with the shared points, and the player is associated with the number of points at the end of the game. The card to be returned may be taken out from the card stock unit in the CU and discharged. In addition, after the game is started by inserting bills, the score taken at the time may be associated with the card taken out from the card stock portion when the score is generated by the occurrence of a prize. In that case, when the score changes with the game, the score associated with the card is similarly changed. Then, when a shared medal operation was performed, the number of points associated with the card was changed to the number of points for sharing, the card was ejected as a transfer card, and removed from the card stock section again You may make it match | combine the remainder which subtracted the shared score from the said score.

  (55) In the above-described embodiment, when the CU resumes the connection sequence, it is determined that the connection sequence is resumed in a state other than waiting (see FIG. 44), and the communication is disconnected by transmitting a communication disconnection request. 43, instead of FIG. 33, when it is determined that the connection sequence is restarted after that, or when it is determined that the SQN backed up by the CU and the SQN transmitted from the S units do not match. Run the connection sequence. However, in addition to them or in place of them, a signal (for example, recovery data) indicating that the communication connection has been disconnected from the S unit during the game (when not in standby) with the resumption of the connection sequence Etc.) may be transmitted to the CU, and the CU may execute the connection sequence at the time of reconnection in FIG. 43 based on the signal.

  (56) In the process of split transfer (share medal sharing) of points shown in FIGS. 86 to 88, the split transfer is performed on the condition that it is determined that the current point is more than a predetermined number of points to be split and transferred. (Shared medal sharing) may be allowed. In the case of FIGS. 86 and 87, for example, split transfer (shared medal sharing) is permitted on the condition that it is determined that the current point is 200 points or more than the points to be split and transferred. In the case of FIG. 88, the divided transfer (shared medal) is performed on the condition that it is determined that the value obtained by subtracting the collateral point (= 200) from the current point is 100 points or more than the point to be divided and transferred. Is acceptable.

  (57) In the process of split transfer of points (share medal sharing) shown in FIGS. 86 and 88, the number of points in the game is changed to card B after the card A is discharged and the card B is discharged. When the number of stored medals to be transferred is less than the number of points, the sharing of the points is canceled and the card B is not discharged.

  (58) In the above-described embodiment, the same units for the medal and the points are shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the units may be different. For example, if the score “1” is converted into a stored medal, it may be “10”.

  (59) In FIG. 87, when a return operation at the end of the game is performed, the card stocked in the card stock section (stock card) is taken out and the stock card is associated with the score and discharged. However, instead, the game attendant may bring a new card, insert the card into the card insertion / discharge slot 309, associate the number of points, and discharge the card. .

  (60) In the above embodiment, two types of cards, a membership card and a visitor card, are shown, but the type of card is not limited to this, and for example, only one type of visitor card may be used.

  (61) Instead of manually clearing RAM by the RAM clear switch 293 shown in FIG. 7, a clock function may be provided so that a RAM clear signal is automatically output when the game hall business start time comes. As described above, the game history data is cleared by the automatically output RAM clear signal.

  (62) In the embodiment described above, in the game history data recovery process, control is performed to match the data on the CU side. However, since these game history data are information managed by the S units, Control may be performed so that the game history data on the CU side is updated on the basis of the game history data held on the S platform side regardless of whether or not the match is basically made. However, the total number of points, addition accumulation and subtraction accumulation data can be matched with the stored data on the CU side.

  (63) In the embodiment described above, the transition to the test hit mode is performed by inserting a test card into the CU. Instead of or in addition to that, a transition command from the upper server 801 or a game room Control may be performed so as to shift to the test hit mode by a remote control operation by a store clerk. The transition to the trial hit mode by such remote control operation can be shifted to the trial hit mode by remote control operation while waiting for a customer. Then, two types of test hit modes may be provided: a first test hit mode used as a non-business customer event in the game hall, and a second test hit mode for operation confirmation by an attendant or the like.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, when there are no more points (or points) in the trial hit mode, a point addition command (or points addition command) is sent from the CU side to S units (or S units). The game is possible by adding the points (or adding the number of points) according to the above, but in the S units (or S units) without sending the point addition command (or point number addition command) from the CU side You may control so that a game can be continued even if there are no points (or points).

  (64) The C-ID described above is composed of fixed code data that does not change, but instead, the C-ID read from the card changes dynamically according to the reading time. An ID code may be used. When the card is inserted into the CU and the CU reads the C-ID, the CU stores the C-ID together with the reading time, and the player is based on both the reading time and the C-ID data. You may comprise so that can be specified. For example, when the CU reads the C-ID, the current time T is input to the card, the C-ID is encrypted ET (C-ID) in the card, and the ET (C-ID) and T And in pairs. The CU decodes the ET (C-ID) with T and DT (ET (C-ID)) to extract the C-ID.

  (65) In the above-described embodiment, a player is specified based on the C-ID and it is determined whether or not the same player is playing a game. The biometric information reading means for reading the biometric information such as the fingerprints and veins of the player is provided on the CU or S table, and the identity of the player is determined based on the biometric information reading means read by the biometric information reading means. Biometric authentication may be employed.

  (66) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, the data stored in the current player game history data storage unit is shifted to the backup data storage unit and stored as the card is returned. Instead, the current player game history data storage unit is switched to the backup data storage unit and the backup data storage unit is switched to the current player game history data storage unit when the card is returned. You may control as follows. In that case, the storage data of the switched current player game history data storage unit is displayed on the display 51.

  (67) In the above-described embodiment, the C-ID match determination is performed on the S platform side. However, the match determination may be performed on the CU side. In that case, the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit of the S unit 2S is transmitted to the CU side, and the C-ID recorded on the inserted card is received on the CU side that received the C-ID. , And the coincidence between the read C-ID and the C-ID transmitted from the S platform is determined. When the CU 3 determines that the C-IDs do not match, it transmits a clear command to the S unit 2S. The S unit 2S that has received the clear command erases the data stored in the backup data storage unit.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in CU3 that the C-IDs match, the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit is returned to the current player game history data storage unit for the S unit 2S Command information for taking over the game history data and adding and updating new game history data is transmitted from the CU 3 to the S unit 2S. The command information may be code data such as takeover command information or the like, but backup game history data to be taken over, that is, game history data stored in the backup data storage unit of the S unit 2S is stored on the CU side. In addition, the backed up game history data may be transmitted to the S unit 2S as takeover command information. In that case, the backup data storage unit in the S units is not necessary.

  (68) In the above-described embodiment, the C-ID identity determination is performed on the CU side. However, the identity determination may be performed on the S platform side. In other words, a slot machine having the following configuration may be used.

It is possible to play with points and has a communication unit that communicates with a gaming device that launches game media into the game area and adds points using the game value owned by the player. A slot machine where points are added according to the occurrence of
A specific means for identifying the amount of change in points according to the use in games and the occurrence of winnings,
A score storage means for storing the score;
A score update means for updating the score stored in the score storage means according to the amount of change;
Information transmission control means for performing control to transmit the update information capable of specifying the amount of change and the score stored in the score storage means from the communication unit to the gaming device;
Player specifying information storage means for storing player specifying information for specifying a player performing a game;
When communication is started by connecting to the gaming device, the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means is the same as the player identification information stored in the player identification information storage means The same determination means for determining whether or not a player is identified,
A slot machine comprising: identical determination result transmission control means for performing control for transmitting a determination result by the same determination means from the communication unit to the gaming device.

  (69) In the above-described embodiment, the C-ID is included in the operation instruction and the operation response for transmission / reception. When different C-IDs are transmitted from the S units to the CU during the transmission / reception, it may be determined as an error, and control may be performed so that the addition number and the subtraction number are not updated on the CU side. When controlled in this way, there is a risk that the C-ID may be temporarily distorted due to noise during transmission and reception of commands and responses. In this case, for example, if the C-ID included in the operation response received on the CU side is different from the C-ID transmitted as a command, the CU side determines that there is an error and transmits the error. The addition / subtraction update control is not executed based on the addition number or subtraction number included in the operation response. As a result, when a C-ID that is not distorted by noise is transmitted from the S side in the next command and response transmission / reception, the operation response is determined even though it is determined that the C-ID matches and is normal. The number of points (total score) included in the CU and the total score stored by the CU are different from each other. In the above-described embodiment, in such a case, the number of points stored by the CU. The command for correcting to S is transmitted to the S units, and the number of points stored in the S units is rewritten to the stored number on the CU side. As a result, the score of S units will be rewritten to the previous old score that was updated based on the previous response where the C-ID goes wrong due to noise, and the correct score will be rewritten to the wrong score. The case will occur.

  In order to eliminate such an inconvenience, even if the C-ID included in the response is different from the C-ID on the CU side, it is not determined by only one response, but several times (for example, twice) It is desirable to control so as to determine that there is an abnormality only when the C-ID in the response subsequently goes wrong with the C-ID on the CU side. The following two methods are conceivable as specific methods for realizing this.

  First, as a first method, when the C-ID included in the first response is different from the C-ID on the CU side, the SQN is not added and updated at the time of transmission of the next command. Send. Then, as described with reference to FIG. 57, in the S units, it is determined that the response has not reached the CU, and the previous transmission data is added to the addition number, and the added addition number is changed to the next time. Control to transmit to the CU as a response is performed. In the CU, when the C-ID included in the next response matches the C-ID on the CU side, the CU determines that the C-ID is appropriate, and based on the addition number added with the previous transmission data. Update control of the number. As a result, it is possible to update to the correct number of points. On the other hand, if the C-ID included in the next response is also different from the C-ID on the CU side, the C-ID is determined to be abnormal because the C-ID is different twice in succession. Instead of updating the number of points based on the number of additions or subtractions included in the response, predetermined error processing control may be performed thereafter.

  The second method is to separately add and update on the CU side during C-ID mismatch, and when the correct C-ID is received, the separately added and updated data is converted into the total number of points, etc. Batch addition update.

The configuration of the modified example described above is summarized as follows.
The gaming device
A score storage means for storing the score;
Game device side identification information storage means for recording predetermined identification information;
Game device side identification information transmission control means for performing control to periodically transmit the identification information stored in the game device side identification information storage means to the slot machine,
The slot machine is
A specific means for identifying the amount of change in points according to the use in games and the occurrence of winnings,
Information transmitting means for transmitting update information capable of specifying the amount of change to the gaming device;
Slot machine side identification information storage means for storing identification information transmitted under the control of the gaming apparatus side identification information transmission control means;
Slot machine side identification information transmission control means for performing control to periodically transmit the identification information stored in the slot machine side identification information storage means to the gaming device,
The gaming device is:
Information receiving means for receiving the update information;
A score update means for updating the score stored in the main score storage means based on the update information;
Consistency to determine whether or not the identification information transmitted under the control of the slot machine side identification information transmission control means and the identification information stored in the gaming apparatus side identification information storage means are matched. A determination means;
An abnormality determination unit that performs an abnormality determination when it is determined that the alignment result is not continuously matched a predetermined number of times.
The point update means includes:
When the abnormality determination by the abnormality determination means is performed, the score is updated corresponding to the total amount of change of the score in the slot machine during the period determined as inconsistent by the alignment determination means. Don't do it,
When it is determined that the consistency determination unit is normal based on the identification information transmitted before the abnormality determination by the abnormality determination unit is performed, the alignment determination unit determines that there is a mismatch. The score is updated based on the total amount of change of the score in the slot machine during the period.

  According to such a configuration, even if identification information that is temporarily distorted due to noise or the like is received despite proper identification information being transmitted, it is erroneously determined as abnormal in the gaming device, and updated information is obtained. It is possible to prevent inconvenience caused by not updating the score based.

  (70) In the above-described embodiment, the game history data is re-totaled in the trial hit mode when the operation button icon such as the re-total button displayed on the display 312 is touch-operated. Instead of or in addition, it may be controlled to re-total the game history data in the trial hit mode by detecting the opening of the front door 2b.

  (71) The contents of the foregoing embodiment can be applied not only to slot machines but also to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines.

  Here, a pachinko gaming machine type game machine accepts a recording medium (card) and has a player's valuable value (prepaid balance or number of stored balls) specified by the recording information recorded on the recording medium. This is a gaming machine that includes a communication unit that communicates with a gaming device (card unit 3) that can be used for gaming, and that launches gaming media into the gaming area.

  In other words, with a pachinko machine type game machine, it is possible to play with points, the game medium is launched into the game area, and the game value owned by the player is increased. It is a gaming machine that includes a communication unit that communicates with a gaming device that uses and adds points, and that points are added according to the occurrence of a prize.

  (72) In the above-described embodiment, the CU determines whether or not the number of points stored in the CU matches the number of points sent from the S units. Although a correction command for matching the number of points to the number of points on the CU side is transmitted, a C-ID match / mismatch may be further added as a criterion for command transmission. For example, even if the number of points stored in the CU does not match the number of points sent from the S units, the correction command is not transmitted by itself, and the C-ID sent from the S unit is not changed. When the CU determines that it does not match the C-ID stored in the CU, a correction command is transmitted. As a result, when an abnormality such as noise that causes the C-ID data to go wrong occurs, a correction command can be transmitted to correct the number of points on the S platform to a correct value.

  Further, when the CU determines that the C-ID sent from the S platform matches the C-ID stored in the CU, a correction command may be transmitted. As a result, when an abnormality occurs in which the number of points on the S-side is out of order without the player being replaced, a correction command can be transmitted to correct the number of points on the S-side to the correct value. .

  (73) In the embodiment described above, the switch operation of the RAM clear switch 293 deletes the oldest stored data from the stored data for 10 days in the S game history data storage unit, and the remaining 9 days. One minute of stored data is shifted and stored one by one in the storage area of the old day. As a condition for executing the shift control of such S game history data, it is the time zone before the opening of the game hall. It may be added. That is, the shift control of the S game history data is executed on the condition that the switch operation of the RAM clear switch 293 is performed in a predetermined time zone before the game hall is opened.

  (74) In the above-described embodiment, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. In addition, the S LSIs 117 and the main control board are used. 116 may be executed between the payout control unit 31 and the S unit communication control unit 82.

  (75) In the modification described with reference to FIG. 108, the clear command transmitted from the hall management computer 1 is input to the CU 3, but instead or in addition, a clear switch is provided to the CU 3. It is also possible to perform the process of clearing the game history data described above by operating the clear switch. Further, the game history data may be cleared by a remote control operation. Specifically, when the attendant of the game hall performs a clear operation by pointing the remote control at the IR photosensitive unit 320 of the CU3, the IR photosensitive unit 320 receives the operation signal (infrared ray) and clears the game history data. Do.

  (76) The command transmission interval of the CU may be changeable. For example, it is conceivable that the command transmission interval can be finely changed and set by operating a transmission interval switching switch provided in the CU. In this case, the CU is provided with a table storing a plurality of types of transmission interval data in advance, and the transmission interval corresponding to the switch operation is selected from the table. Alternatively, the CU may be able to switch the transmission interval in response to a switching command from the management computer. The transmission interval may be switched at the time of mutual authentication when communication is started between the CU and the S units, for example.

  (77) In the present embodiment, “the game value can be started by setting the number of bets for one game using the game value and displayed on a variable display device that variably displays a plurality of types of symbols. A slot machine in which one game is completed by deriving a result, and a winning can be generated according to a combination of symbols derived and displayed on a predetermined winning line as a display result of the variable display device, Predetermining means for deciding whether or not to allow the derivation of the winning symbol combination that generates the winnings on the winning line before the display result is derived to the variable display device; and the variable display device Derivation operation receiving means for receiving an operation for deriving a display result, and the variable display device according to the determination result of the prior determination means and the operation received by the derivation operation reception means Derivation control means for performing control for deriving a display result, and a predetermined amount when a combination of award-winning symbols with game value is derived on the winning line among a combination of winning symbols for generating a winning A slot machine including a game value providing means for providing a player with a game value of “.”

  (78) In the slot machine, the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination is determined in advance, and the winning does not occur continuously in a short period of time unlike a pachinko gaming machine. Occur. Also, the number of bets is set to any one of 1 to 3, for example. For this reason, as long as an operation response is transmitted at a time interval of 200 ms, normally, the data of the addition number included in the operation response matches the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination. Similarly, the subtraction data included in the motion response matches any of the betting numbers. For example, if the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination is 3, 5, 10, or 15, the added number included in the action response is any one of them. Similarly, if the number of bets that can be set is any one of 1, 2, and 3, the subtraction data included in the action response is any one of 1 to 3.

  Therefore, when the addition number and the subtraction number included in the operation response notified to the CU are other than predetermined values, the CU determines that an error has occurred and notifies the error, or A command instructing prohibition of the game may be sent to the S units.

  Furthermore, since the subtraction number data is generated by setting the bet amount when starting one game and the addition number data is generated by winning when one game is completed, normally, unless a retry or the like occurs, One of the addition number and the subtraction number included in one operation response is zero.

  Therefore, if either the addition number or the subtraction number included in the operation response notified to the CU is not 0, the CU determines that an error has occurred if the operation response is not retry data or the like. Then, an error notification or a command for instructing prohibition of the game may be sent to the S units.

  Furthermore, in the slot machine 2S, one game regulation time is set as the minimum time required to digest one game. In the present embodiment, for example, it is 4.1 seconds. For this reason, normally, a plurality of operation responses including addition numbers or subtraction numbers exceeding 0 are not transmitted to the CU. In addition, normally, an operation response including a subtraction number exceeding 0 is transmitted to the CU during one game regulation period after an operation response including a subtraction number exceeding 0 is transmitted to the CU. Absent. Similarly, normally, after an action response including an addition number exceeding 0 is transmitted to the CU, an operation response including an addition number exceeding 0 is further transmitted to the CU during one game regulation period. There is no. Therefore, when these events occur, the CU determines that an error has occurred and sends an error notification or a command to prohibit the game to the S units. Good.

  (79) In this embodiment, when a winning occurs, the data of the addition number is generated and transmitted to the CU as an operation response. However, when the replay winning is generated, the number of points increased is 0, and in the next game, the same bet number as the game in which the previous replay winning has occurred is automatically set without reducing the points. . Therefore, the operation response at the time of replay winning is “(a) The number of additions at the time of replay winning is 0, and the number of subtractions associated with the setting of the betting amount in the next game where the replay winning has occurred is also 0”, “( b) The number added at the time of replay winning is the betting number of the game that generated the replay winning, and the subtraction number associated with the setting of the betting amount in the next game where the replay winning has occurred is also the same as the betting number. There are two possible patterns. In any case, the replay winning may be one of the external output information. That is, a replay winning may be added as one of a plurality of types of external output information so that the total number of replay winning times can be stored in the CU. In addition to the replay winning combination, all winning combinations are targeted for external output information, and whenever a winning combination by any winning combination occurs, the counter corresponding to the winning combination is updated on the S units and includes the data. The operation response may be transmitted to the CU.

  (80) Once the variable display device starts rotating, the slot machine cannot finish one game unless the rotation is stopped. For this reason, it is impossible to interrupt the game at an arbitrary timing of the game stop transmitted from the CU side. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for example, when a prohibition request (see FIG. 52) for returning a game card is generated while the variable display device is rotating, the final score is obtained after the game is finished. We decided to accept the return of the game card after it was confirmed.

  However, in such a configuration, the game card cannot be returned unless the player performs a stop operation. Therefore, when a game card return operation is detected while the reel is rotating, it is conceivable that a message prompting a stop operation is displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like on the liquid crystal display device or the CU on the display 312 or the like. Alternatively, when a prohibition request for returning a gaming card occurs while the variable display device is rotating, a card return during the game is made by returning a response indicating that the prohibition request is rejected from the S units to the CU. May not be accepted. Alternatively, the CU may determine whether or not the game is being executed at the stage where the card return operation is detected, and may not accept the card return operation when the game is being executed. Whether or not the game is being executed can be determined based on “reel rotation start” and “reel rotation stop” which are external output information transmitted from the S units.

  (81) In the slot machine 2S, for example, a lottery effect as to whether or not to shift to a certain service-like gaming state such as AT is performed on the liquid crystal display device during the game, and after the game ends, You may display the result of a lottery effect after performing the lottery effect for a predetermined period. However, when such a lottery effect is performed, a card return operation may be performed after the end of one game and before the result of the lottery effect is displayed. In such a case, the lottery effect may be interrupted to determine the current score and return the card.

  (82) In the present embodiment, the number of points held = 0 is detected on the S side and controlled to the bet number operation invalid state. However, the remaining number of points to be detected = 0 is an example. For example, in the gaming state where only the bet number = 3 is valid, the S units detect that the number of points has become less than 3, and control the bet number operation invalid state. Similarly, in the gaming state where only the bet number = 2 is valid, the S units detect that the number of points has become less than 2 and control the bet number operation invalid state. In short, the S units compare the minimum required bet number and the number of points in the current gaming state, and if the former is less than the latter, control is made to the bet number operation invalid state.

  When such control is performed, in addition to the case where the remaining number of points is 0, for example, when the remaining number is a fraction such as 1 or 2, the bet number operation may be invalidated. When a player performs an operation to finish a game, it is necessary to return a game card with a fraction recorded so as not to be valuable. In particular, if a player does not play a game using a card in the first place, and has played a game by putting cash into the CU exclusively, he / she has to bother to issue a new valueless game card, It is uneconomical. Therefore, when a game using cash is performed and the player has a score less than a predetermined value when the player returns the card, the CU prints a fraction instead of a normal game card. The paper may be printed out.

  (83) The slot machine 2S according to the present embodiment wins by winning the internal lottery in advance and stopping the winning symbol by so-called pressing. However, instead of such a slot machine, a slot machine in which the result according to the internal lottery is always displayed in a stop on the variable display device may be used. In this case, it may be a slot machine in which each reel automatically stops one after another after a predetermined time without performing a stop operation, or at any timing while a stop operation button is provided for each reel. A slot machine that always stops and displays the result according to the internal lottery even when the stop operation is performed may be used.

  In this way, when a slot machine that always stops and displays the result according to the internal lottery is adopted, the number of points to be added is determined based on the presence / absence of a win and the win when the internal lottery is executed. . Therefore, for example, when the internal lottery is executed when a reel start operation is detected, the number of points subtracted by the bet number setting at the time of the start operation and the number of points added according to the winning are calculated. It will be confirmed. In such a case, the S units may send an addition number corresponding to the winning combination when transmitting the subtraction number associated with the betting number setting as the operation response. That is, the data of the addition number may be transmitted at an earlier stage than the actual winning timing.

  Furthermore, the CU may discharge a predetermined ticket or token that can specify the points, instead of discharging (returning) the card in accordance with the game end operation.

(84) The variable display device may be constituted by a liquid crystal display device instead of a rotating cylinder.
(85) In the present embodiment, the number of points is displayed on both the indicator 312 provided on the CU side and the indicator 51 provided on the S platform side, but only on one of them. May be. When displaying the number of points with the CU-side display, there is an advantage that the number of points can be displayed on the S units having no display unit by applying the CU in the present embodiment. On the other hand, when displaying the number of points on the S platform side, the display control may be performed on the CU side.

  (86) Alternatively, the display control may be performed on the S platform side. When the display control is performed on the S platform side, the display unit 51 can display the number of points managed by the CU by receiving information on the number of points to be displayed from the CU side. It becomes. Further, when the display control is performed on the S platform side as described above, there is an advantage that it is possible to display a score with a high decorative (production) value. When the display control is performed on the S platform side, the display of the score count is not performed based on the value of the score counter stored in the S platform itself, instead of receiving information on the number of scores to be displayed from the CU side. It is good also as what controls.

  (87) In the above-described embodiment, a command is transmitted from the CU to the S units and the S units respond to the response to the CU. Conversely, a command is transmitted from the S unit to the CU. Then, the communication form in which the CU returns a response to the S units in response thereto may be used.

  (88) In this embodiment, the CU resends the command at most twice if the response is not received within 1 second after the command is transmitted, and if there is still no response, the CU determines that the communication is abnormal, and 5 seconds The connection sequence is resumed later (see FIG. 31). For this reason, if there is no response within 3 seconds from the transmission of the first command, the connection sequence is resumed. However, instead of this, a longer time until the CU determines that the communication is abnormal from the first command transmission, for example, a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds, 20 seconds) in which a plurality of games can proceed on the S side. 30 seconds). In this case, for example, taking FIG. 56 as an example, after receiving the operation response from the S units, the CU does not retransmit the command twice, but three times before the predetermined time elapses. If there is, it will be repeated. In this case, the command retransmission interval may be 200 ms or a longer time interval, or the command retransmission may be performed after a certain time has elapsed since the start of retransmission. The interval may be changed (for example, the retransmission interval may be lengthened in the second half of the former). Then, when the retransmission command finally reaches the S units before the predetermined time elapses, an operation response indicating the amount of change in the points for a plurality of games that has progressed until then is transmitted from the S units to the CU. Become.

  (89) In the above-described embodiment, the display area 51a is provided on the slot machine 2S side. Thus, the display area 51a displays information related to points, but the display to display information related to points, etc. The slot machine 2S may not include the area 51a. In that case, even if a command including operation instructions such as ON during card insertion processing, ON during addition display, ON during calculation display, ON during clear display is transmitted to the slot machine 2S, the slot machine 2S Display control according to the command is not performed, and only the display on the CU side is displayed.

  (90) In the process of split transfer of points (sharing points) shown in FIGS. 86 to 88, the split transfer is performed on the condition that it is determined that the current points are more than a predetermined number of points to be split and transferred. (Share point sharing) may be allowed. In the case of FIG. 86 and FIG. 87, for example, divisional transfer (point sharing) is permitted on the condition that it is determined that the current point is 200 or more than the points to be divided and transferred. In the case of FIG. 88, divisional transfer (point sharing) is performed on the condition that the value obtained by subtracting the collateral point (= 200) from the current point is 100 points or more than the point to be divided and transferred. Is acceptable.

  (91) When there is a game interruption or card return operation, S does not wait for the wait time to elapse, but on the condition that all the spinning reels stop and the display result and the number of points are fixed. A game completion ON response may be returned from the stand to the CU.

  (92) The S units further transmit various information of the “gaming table state” shown in FIG. 25 as external output information, and the CU accumulates and stores them in the same manner as other external output information. You may do it.

  (93) In the test hit mode, any game state may be selected. For example, the S units store in advance the “big bonus state”, “regular bonus state”, “RT state”, “AT state”, and other “normal gaming state” as the gaming state in the test hit mode. In addition, based on the selection operation of the clerk in the trial hit mode, control is performed to switch to any gaming state.

  (94) The S player does not erase the game history in the test hit mode at the end of the test hit mode, but stores the game history in the test hit mode in the storage area for the test hit mode (memory mounted in the S player). You may make it leave.

  (95) In the above embodiment, even if the player leaves the seat once during the game, the C-ID of the member card inserted into the CU 3 before leaving and the member card inserted into the CU 3 after that. The player's game history data is restored by checking the C-ID. Such restoration of game history data is permitted only when the card inserted before leaving the seat is a membership card, and is not allowed when the card inserted before leaving is a visitor card. May be. Or conversely, even in the case of a visitor card, the game history data may be restored based on the C-ID.

  (96) In the above-described embodiment, the slot machine in which the reel continues to rotate unless the stop operation is detected when the reel starts to rotate and the reel does not automatically stop has been described as an example. However, a slot machine that automatically stops the rotation of the reel when a stop operation is not detected even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the rotation of the reel may be adopted. In this case, when the reels are rotating at the stage of receiving the prohibition request command from the CU, the S unit detects that the reels are stopped after the time until the reels automatically stop or that the reels are stopped. After the detection, a game completion ON response is transmitted to the CU as an operation response.

  (97) The S units may adopt a configuration in which setting information is transmitted from the S units to the CU. In this case, the CU may adopt a configuration in which the received setting information is transmitted to an external management apparatus such as the hall management computer 1. As a result, the setting information of each S units can be managed in the management apparatus.

  As setting information, the setting value of the winning probability set by operating S setting parts can be illustrated, for example. The S payout rate changes according to the winning probability corresponding to the set value when the internal lottery is performed. The set value has, for example, six stages 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate and the payout rates being lower in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. In other words, when 6 is set as the set value, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantages decrease stepwise in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. In the set values 1 to 6, the winning probability of each winning combination is determined.

  Alternatively, as the setting information, effect information can be exemplified. The effect information is, for example, the type of character displayed on the display screen. More specifically, the type of character that appears on the display screen during AT.

  The S units include this type of setting information in one of the multiple types of responses described in the above embodiment, and transmit it to the CU. For example, when it is included in the recovery response, the setting information is transmitted from the S units to the CU every time recovery occurs. Alternatively, when it is included in the operation response, repeated setting information is transmitted from the S units to the CU during the game.

  Or you may further provide the command which requests | requires transmission of setting information, and the message | telegram of the response which responds to this. In this case, when the S machine receives a command requesting transmission of setting information, the S machine transmits a response including the setting information to the CU. Further, the CU may be configured to transmit a command for requesting transmission of setting information to the S units when receiving a setting information transmission request from an external management device (for example, the hall management computer 1). . As a command at this time, a dedicated command for requesting setting information may be adopted, but an operation instruction command or the like may be used. For example, when an operation instruction command is used, data indicating whether or not setting information is requested may be added to the operation instruction command.

  (98) You may comprise so that the card unit 3 may be integrated in S base 2S or P base inside. In this case, there are S or P units with card units.

  In the following, effects obtained from various means included in the present embodiment and combinations of various means are listed.

(1-1) A slot machine (slot machine 2S) in which a game with points can be made and points are added according to the occurrence of a prize, and a game value (prepaid balance, number of possessions, or A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) connected to the slot machine so as to be communicable (connecting wiring with connectors 330 and 220),
The slot machine is
Specific means (a microcomputer for slot machine control, an addition number counter, a subtraction number counter) for identifying the amount of change (addition number, subtraction number) in accordance with the use of the game and the occurrence of winnings,
Information transmission means (payout control unit 31) for transmitting update information (operation response including addition number and subtraction number) that can specify the amount of change to the gaming device;
The gaming device is:
Main point storage means for storing points (RAM for storing “number of points”);
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving the update information;
A score update unit (main control unit 323) that updates the score stored in the main score storage unit based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the slot machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the slot machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, slot machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For this reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the slot machine is introduced can be reduced by providing the point management function not on the slot machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the slot machine. is there.

(1-2) The gaming device
A point display unit (display 312) for displaying the points stored by the main point storage means;
Instruction information transmitting means (CU communication control unit 80) for transmitting information (operation instruction) for instructing transmission of the update information to the slot machine,
The slot machine is
Including instruction information receiving means (payout control unit 31) for receiving information for instructing transmission of the update information;
Each time the information transmission means receives information for instructing transmission of the update information, the information transmission means indicates the amount of change (current holding point related information) from the previous reception of the information to the current reception. Update information is transmitted (values of the addition number counter and the subtraction number counter in FIG. 6, FIG. 50).

  According to such a configuration, in accordance with an instruction from the gaming device, update information indicating the amount of change based on the previous transmission time of the update information is transmitted from the slot machine to the gaming device one by one. . Therefore, the gaming device can manage the latest score by updating the score with the update information transmitted one by one.

(1-3) The information transmitting means transmits the score (value of the score counter) stored in the auxiliary score storage means to the gaming device (value of the score counter in FIG. 50),
The gaming device is:
Determination means for determining the consistency between the score stored in the main score storage means and the score stored in the sub-point storage means (FIG. 6; determining the match of the number of scores);
When it is determined by the determination means that there is a mismatch, predetermined mismatch processing (error notification and recovery processing are performed by the display 312 and data correction request Bit2 is “1” (point correction ON) And the communication start request including the score data stored in the CU is transmitted to the S units, and the storage of the score number of the S units is corrected to match the score of the CU).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to detect an abnormality in which the points stored on the slot machine side do not match the points stored on the gaming device side. Furthermore, when such an abnormality occurs, it is possible to deal with the processing when an inconsistency occurs.

(1-4) The instruction information transmission means has the holding points stored in the main holding point storage means when the determination means determines that the inconsistency is inconsistent. Send correction information (communication start request including the point correction ON and the number of points) to the point to the slot machine,
The instruction information transmission means transmits the correction information to the slot machine (transmission of a communication start request including the point correction ON and the number of points to S units),
The slot machine corrects the score stored in the auxiliary score storage unit based on the correction information (a payout control unit 31; corrects the score according to the score correction ON and the score) )including.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored on the gaming machine side and the slot machine side are caused by an abnormality in the size of the points stored on the slot machine side due to fraud and other causes. Even when the stored score does not match, the score stored on the slot machine side can be corrected to the score stored on the gaming device side.

  (1-5) The slot machine determines the remaining number of points necessary for continuing the game based on the remaining points stored in the sub-point storage unit (payout control). Part 31, FIG. 51).

  According to such a configuration, since the transmission of update information is not in time at the time of determination, the points stored on the gaming device side and the actual points (the number of points stored on the slot machine side) Even if there is a gap between them, the determination based on the actual score can be made.

(1-6) The instruction information transmitting means transmits information for instructing game prohibition to the slot machine (operation instruction in FIG. 54 (with prohibition request)),
When the slot machine receives the information for instructing the prohibition of the game, the game prohibiting means for prohibiting the game by the points (the payout control unit 31 prohibits the BET (betting number setting)). including.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to control the prohibition of gaming by the slot machine on the gaming device side.

(1-7) The instruction information transmission unit transmits information for instructing to set the value of the score stored in the auxiliary score storage unit to an initial value to the slot machine (FIG. 52, 82 (operation instruction (with clear request)),
In the slot machine, the auxiliary holding point storage means stores the information based on the fact that the instruction to set the value of the holding point stored in the auxiliary holding point storage means to the initial value is received. 52, FIG. 82 (the payout control unit 31 initializes the value of the score counter to 0) for initializing the score value.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored in the slot machine can be instructed to be initialized on the gaming device side.

(1-8) Provided with a connection part (connector 330) for connecting to a slot machine (slot machine 2S) that can be played with points and that is awarded in accordance with the occurrence of winnings, A gaming device (card unit 3) for adding points using a player's own gaming value (prepaid balance, number of possessions, or number of savings),
A score storage means for storing the score (RAM for storing the “number of score”);
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving update information from the slot machine that can specify the amount of change in points according to the use of the game and the occurrence of winnings;
A score update unit (main control unit 323) for updating the score stored in the score storage unit based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the slot machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the slot machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, slot machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For this reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the slot machine is introduced can be reduced by providing the point management function not on the slot machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the slot machine. is there.

  (1-9) When a signal for requesting the end of the game (an operation signal for the return button 322) is input, the score that is determined by the score stored in the score storage means as the score at the end of the game The confirmation means (main control unit 323; FIG. 52) is included.

  According to such a configuration, since the points at the end of the game are fixed on the gaming device side, there is no need to provide a point fixing function on the slot machine side, and the cost of the slot machine is reduced as much as possible. Can be suppressed.

(1-10) When a score updated on the slot machine side is received from the slot machine in response to use in a game and occurrence of a prize, the received score and the score storage means A determination means for determining consistency with the stored score (FIG. 5; determination of matching score);
When it is determined by the determination means that there is a mismatch, predetermined mismatch processing (error notification and recovery processing are performed by the display 312 and data correction request Bit2 is “1” (point correction ON) And the communication start request including the score data stored in the CU is transmitted to the S units, and the storage of the score number of the S units is corrected to match the score of the CU).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to detect an abnormality in which the points stored on the slot machine side do not match the points stored on the gaming device side. Furthermore, when such an abnormality occurs, it is possible to deal with the processing when an inconsistency occurs.

  (1-11) The correction information for correcting the score stored in the slot machine to the score stored in the score storage means when the determination means determines that there is an inconsistency. Correction information transmitting means for transmitting to the slot machine (transmitting of the point correction ON and the number of points) is included.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored on the gaming machine side and the slot machine side are caused by an abnormality in the size of the points stored on the slot machine side due to fraud and other causes. Even when the stored score does not match, the score stored on the slot machine side can be corrected to the score stored on the gaming device side.

(2-1) A connecting portion (connector 220) for communicably connecting to a gaming device (card unit 3) that adds points using the gaming value (prepaid balance, number of medals) owned by the player And a variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and one game can be started by setting the number of bets by the number of points and the display result is displayed on the variable display device. Is a slot machine (slot machine 2S) in which one game is completed and points are added according to the winnings generated by the display result of the variable display device,
Specific means (game control microcomputer, payout control microcomputer, addition number counter, subtraction number counter) for specifying the amount of change (addition number, subtraction number) according to the setting of the bet number and the occurrence of winnings; ,
Information transmission means (LSI 117) for transmitting update information (operation response including addition number and subtraction number) that can identify the amount of change to the gaming device;
A score storage means (score counter) for storing the score;
Information for instructing subtraction of points (operation instruction including subtraction request in FIG. 49), and use of the gaming value for the points stored on the gaming device side by the gaming device In conjunction with the addition of the remaining points, information for instructing addition of the points transmitted from the gaming device side (operation instruction including the presence of addition request in FIGS. 47 and 48) is received. Instruction information receiving means (LSI 117);
A score update unit (LSI 117, FIG. 6) for updating the score stored in the score storage unit according to the amount of change and adding and updating according to information for instructing addition of the score ,
When receiving information for instructing subtraction of a score, the score determination means for determining whether or not a score having a magnitude indicated by the information is stored in the score storage means (FIG. 49). LSI117),
The information transmitting means accepts a score subtraction acceptance response when the score determining means determines that the score having the magnitude indicated by the information to be subtracted is stored in the score storage means (FIG. 49; Subtraction of the points instructed to be subtracted by the information from the points stored on the gaming device side by transmitting a response to the gaming device including the subtraction rejection OFF) to the gaming device. (FIG. 49; the subtraction of the score is determined after waiting for the motion response).

  According to such a configuration, since the amount of change in the score is transmitted from the slot machine, the score management can be performed on the gaming device side. As a result, it is not necessary to provide a point management function on the slot machine side, and the cost of the slot machine can be suppressed as much as possible.

  In particular, slot machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For this reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the slot machine is introduced can be reduced by providing the point management function not on the slot machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the slot machine. is there.

  In addition, the point addition on the slot machine side is promptly performed in response to a request for adding points using gaming value. On the other hand, if a request for subtracting points occurs, it depends on the game situation immediately after that. Since there is a possibility that the score is insufficient for the subtraction request, the score is subtracted on the gaming device side on the condition that a consent response is returned. As a result, when a request for adding points or a request for subtracting points based on the game value is generated, it is possible to quickly and reliably perform processing according to those requests.

  (2-2) When the score update means receives the information for canceling the score subtraction instruction (FIG. 78; communication start request), the score update means corrects the score stored in the score storage means (FIG. 78).

  According to such a configuration, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the subtraction instruction arrives at the slot machine side, there are cases where the points stored on the slot machine side are less than the subtraction instruction due to game progress. At this time, if it is unknown on the gaming device side whether or not the slot machine has refused the subtraction instruction due to communication failure or the like, if the subtraction is confirmed, the score on the slot machine side will be negative Inconvenience arises. However, at this time, the slot machine corrects the score stored in the score storage means by receiving information for canceling the score subtraction instruction. Can prevent inconvenience.

  (2-3) Includes game control means for performing game control based on the score stored in the score storage means (FIG. 51; control the bet number operation invalid state when the credit number counter becomes 0).

  According to such a configuration, since the game control in the slot machine is performed based on the points stored in the slot machine itself, it is compared with the case where the game control is performed based on the points stored in the gaming device. Thus, the game control can be performed in real time in accordance with the change of the points.

(2-4) The instruction information receiving means receives information for instructing transmission of the update information of the points from the gaming device (LSI 117),
Each time the information transmission means receives information for instructing transmission of the update information, the information transmission means indicates the amount of change (current holding point related information) from the previous reception of the information to the current reception. Update information is transmitted (FIG. 5: addition number counter and subtraction number counter).

  According to such a configuration, in accordance with an instruction from the gaming device, update information indicating the amount of change based on the previous transmission time of the update information is transmitted from the slot machine to the gaming device one by one. . For this reason, in the gaming apparatus, it is possible to manage the latest score by updating the score with the update information transmitted one by one.

  (2-5) Receiving correction information (correction instruction command) for correcting the score (value of the score counter) stored in the score storage means to the score stored in the gaming device In this case, it includes a point correction unit (LSI 117; corrects the number of points according to the correction instruction command) for correcting the point stored in the point storage unit based on the correction information.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored on the gaming machine side and the slot machine side are caused by an abnormality in the size of the points stored on the slot machine side due to fraud and other causes. Even when the stored score does not match, the score stored on the slot machine side can be corrected to the score stored on the gaming device side.

  (2-6) The information transmitting means sequentially transmits the update information at a time interval (200 ms) shorter than a predetermined one game regulation time (4.1 s) (FIG. 30).

  According to such a configuration, since the update information is transmitted at intervals shorter than the one game restriction time, the change amount of the score notified by the update information is sequentially transmitted between the one game. . As a result, it is possible to notify the game device of the amount of change in the points in detail.

  (2-7) including a remaining score determining means (LSI 117, FIG. 51) for determining whether there is a remaining score necessary for continuing the game based on the score stored in the subsidiary score storage means .

  According to such a configuration, since the transmission of update information is not in time at the time of determination, there is a difference between the points stored on the gaming device side and the actual points (the points stored on the slot machine side). Even if there is a gap between them, the determination based on the actual score can be made.

  (2-8) When receiving information for instructing game prohibition (operation instruction in FIG. 54 (with prohibition request)), game prohibition means (LSI 117 and LSI 117) for entering a game prohibition state in which a new game cannot be started The main control board 116 is controlled to be in the bet number operation invalid state, and includes “BET prohibited” in FIG.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to enter a game prohibition state in which a new game cannot be started in response to a game prohibition instruction from the gaming apparatus side.

  (2-9) Information for instructing to set the value of the score stored in the score storage means to the initial value is received from the gaming device (the operation instruction (clear request in FIGS. 52 and 82). Based on the fact that the score value stored in the score storage means is set to the initial value, the score initializing means (FIG. 52, FIG. 82 (LSI 117 sets the value of the score counter to 0). Initialization).

  According to such a configuration, the points stored in the slot machine can be initialized in response to an instruction from the gaming apparatus side.

(2-10) for storing the amount of change specified by the update information transmitted by the information transmission unit and storing the amount of change specified by the update information transmitted by the information transmission unit one time before Two change amount storage means (FIG. 5: an addition number counter for storing the current addition number, a subtraction number counter for counting the current subtraction number, a region for storing the previous addition number as the previous holding-related information, and a previous subtraction number are stored. Area) and
And arrival determination means (LSI 117, FIG. 57) for determining the arrival of the update information to the gaming device based on predetermined information (SQN) transmitted from the gaming device,
The information transmission means receives update information that can specify a sum of change amounts stored in the two change amount storage means when the arrival determination means does not determine that the update information has arrived. (FIG. 57).

  According to such a configuration, when it is not determined that the update information has arrived, update information capable of specifying the sum of the change amounts stored in the two change amount storage means is transmitted to the gaming device. Therefore, it is possible to reliably and efficiently collect information on the points in the gaming device.

(2-11) The information transmitting means transmits the update information to the gaming device each time it receives information from the gaming device that instructs transmission of update information that can specify the amount of change (see FIG. 5, see FIG. 57 etc.),
Change amount storage means (addition number counter, subtraction number counter) for storing the change amount specified by the update information transmitted by the information transmission means as the update information;
The change amount storage means sets the change amount sequentially specified by the specifying means while the state in which the information for instructing the transmission of the update information cannot be received even after a predetermined period has elapsed since the update information was transmitted. Based on this, the stored change amount is updated (FIG. 56),
When the information transmission unit receives information instructing transmission of the update information in a state where a change amount based on the change amount sequentially specified by the specifying unit is stored in the change amount storage unit, Update information that can identify the change amount stored in the change amount storage means is transmitted (FIG. 56).

  According to such a configuration, even if the state where communication between the gaming device and the slot machine is interrupted continues, it is possible to reliably collect information on the points in between during the state. .

(3-1) Connection unit (connector 220) for communicably connecting to a gaming device (card unit 3) that adds points using the gaming value (prepaid balance, number of medals) owned by the player And a variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and one game can be started by setting the number of bets by the number of points, and the display result on the variable display device Is a slot machine (slot machine 2S) in which one game is completed and points are added according to the winnings generated by the display result of the variable display device,
A front member (front door 2b) covering the front surface of the slot machine so as to be openable and closable;
Lock means for locking the front member in a closed state (front door opening solenoid 110, engagement protrusions 6a and 6b, engagement receiving pieces 7a and 7b);
Specific means (game control microcomputer, payout control microcomputer, addition number counter, subtraction number counter) for specifying the amount of change (addition number, subtraction number) according to the setting of the bet number and the occurrence of winnings; ,
Information transmission means (LSI 117) for transmitting update information (operation response including addition number and subtraction number) that can identify the amount of change to the gaming device;
A game prohibition state (the number of bets) in which a new game cannot be started when the information (FIG. 54; front door opening request is present) for instructing unlocking by the locking means transmitted from the gaming device is received. Game prohibition means (FIG. 54; BET prohibition by LSI 117 and main control board 116) for making the operation invalid state);
Release control means (FIG. 54; lock release by LSI 117) for performing control to release the lock by the lock means after the game prohibition means is brought into the game prohibited state,
The release control means performs control to release the lock by the lock means until a predetermined condition is satisfied when information for instructing the lock release by the lock means (FIG. 54; front door opening requested) is received. Delay means for delaying (FIG. 54; the LSI 117 delays excitation of the front door opening solenoid 110 until the wait time elapses (or until the game ends when the game is in progress)).

  According to such a configuration, the closed state of the front member can be released without affecting the game result by an instruction from the gaming apparatus side.

(3-2) The specifying unit specifies the amount of change even when the holding point changes while the game prohibition unit is in the game prohibition state (FIG. 54; Also, when the score changes during the period, the amount of change (addition number = 10 in FIG. 54 is specified).
The information transmitting means provides update information that can specify the amount of change when the amount of change of the holding point is specified by the specifying means while the game prohibiting means is in the game prohibited state. It transmits to the apparatus (addition number of FIG. 54 = 10 operation response).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to allow the gaming device to manage the points including the amount of change in points after the game is prohibited.

  (3-3) The predetermined condition is that a time equal to or longer than a predetermined game restriction time (4.1 seconds) elapses.

  According to such a structure, even if it is in a game when it is set as a game prohibition state, obstruction | occlusion of a front member is not cancelled | released before the completion | finish of the game.

  (3-4) When the information for instructing the lock means to release the lock is received during the game whose symbols are variably displayed on the variable display device, the delay means ends the game. Control for releasing the lock by the lock means is delayed until the game is prohibited (FIG. 54).

  According to such a structure, even if it is in a game when it is set as a game prohibition state, obstruction | occlusion of a front member is not cancelled | released before the completion | finish of the game.

(4-1) Connection unit (connector 220) for communicably connecting to a gaming device (card unit 3) that adds points using the gaming value (prepaid balance, number of medals) owned by the player And a variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and one game can be started by setting the number of bets by the number of points and the display result is displayed on the variable display device. Is a slot machine (slot machine 2S) in which one game is completed and points are added according to the winnings generated by the display result of the variable display device,
Specific means (game control microcomputer, payout control microcomputer, addition number counter, subtraction number counter, etc.) for specifying the amount of change (addition number, subtraction number, external output information) of game data that changes as the game progresses External output information counter),
Information transmitting means (LSI 117) for transmitting update information (operation response including addition number, subtraction number, and external output information) that can identify the amount of change to the gaming device;
From when a communication incapable state in which no signal is transmitted from the gaming device occurs until recovery processing is executed to recover from the communication incapable state and restore data consistency with the slot machine In the meantime, communication means storage means for storing the change amount of the game data specified by the specifying means (FIG. 67 to FIG. 84; the CU is activated after the transmission of the operation response transmitted immediately before the power supply of the CU is turned off. Including the number of additions, subtractions, points, etc. as the current number until the recovery process is performed, the addition number counter, the subtraction number counter, the points count counter, etc., and each data of the previous number)
The information transmission means transmits update information that can specify the amount of change of the game data stored in the storage means when communication is disabled to the gaming device by performing the restoration process (FIG. 67 to FIG. 67). FIG. 84: Recovery data is transmitted as a recovery response during the period from the transmission of the operation response transmitted immediately before the power-off of the CU until the CU is activated and the recovery process is performed).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to allow the gaming device to accurately manage game data that reflects the amount of change in game data on the slot machine side from when the communication is disabled until recovery. It becomes possible.

(4-2) Game prohibition means for setting a game prohibition state in which a new game cannot be started when the communication disabled state occurs (FIGS. 67 to 84; stop play upon detection of disconnection (betting number operation disabled state or game) Further prohibition state))
The non-communication storage means is specified by the specifying means during a period from when the communication disabled state occurs until the game data cannot be changed after the game prohibition unit has entered the game prohibition state. The amount of change in game data stored is stored (FIGS. 67 to 84; additions changed since the stop of play (betting number operation invalid state or game prohibited state) since the transmission of the operation response immediately before the power-off of the CU) Number, subtraction number, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, accurate game data management that reflects the amount of change in game data on the slot machine side from when the communication is disabled until the game data cannot be changed. Can be used as a gaming device.

(4-3) The non-communicable storage means stores a backup amount transmitted immediately before, which is a change amount of game data transmitted to the gaming device immediately before the communication impossible state occurs. (FIGS. 67 to 84; previous number of times),
The information transmitting means includes
The immediately previous transmitted update information capable of specifying the immediately previous transmitted change amount is transmitted to the gaming device together with the update information (FIG. 23, FIG. 67 to FIG. 84; the recovery data as the previous number is transmitted as a recovery response),
Incompatibility occurrence time determination information (SQN, figure) for enabling the gaming apparatus to determine whether or not the incommunicable state has occurred before the gaming apparatus receives the immediately transmitted update information. 23 (b)) is transmitted to the gaming device.

  According to such a configuration, in the gaming device, even if the amount of change in the game data transmitted to the gaming device immediately before the incommunicable state occurs does not reach the gaming device, it is determined to that effect Thus, the game data can be updated including the immediately previous transmitted change amount specified by the immediately previous transmitted update information, and the change amount of the game data transmitted to the gaming device immediately before the communication disabled state is Even in the case of arrival, it becomes possible to manage game data accurately.

  (4-4) The information transmitting means is a communication number for confirming whether or not communication is properly performed by updating the number every time data is transmitted / received to / from the gaming device. (SQN) is transmitted to the gaming device as information for determining when communication is impossible.

  According to such a configuration, on the gaming device side, each time data is transmitted / received, the number is updated, and the communication number is used to check whether communication is properly performed. It is possible to determine whether or not the change amount of the game data transmitted to the gaming device immediately before the disabled state has reached the gaming device.

(5-1) Connection unit (connector 220) for communicably connecting to a gaming device (card unit 3) that adds points using gaming value (prepaid balance, number of medals) owned by the player And a variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and one game can be started by setting the number of bets by the number of points, and the display result on the variable display device Is a slot machine (slot machine 2S) in which one game is completed and points are added according to the winnings generated by the display result of the variable display device,
A score storage means (score counter) for storing the score;
A remaining score determination means (LSI 117, FIG. 51) for determining the presence or absence of a remaining score necessary for setting the betting number based on the score stored in the score storage means;
Game prohibiting means (FIGS. 51 to 54; invalidating betting number operation by LSI 117) for making a game prohibited state in which a new game cannot be started,
The game prohibition means is:
Predetermined information corresponding game prohibition means ((FIGS. 52 and 54) and a game prohibition state (FIGS. 52 and 54) and a game prohibition state when predetermined information (FIGS. 52 and 54; operation instruction including prohibition request present) is transmitted from the gaming device; ,
And a point-inhibiting game prohibiting unit (FIG. 51) which puts the game in a prohibited state when it is determined by the remaining point determining unit that there is no remaining point necessary for setting the bet amount.

  According to such a configuration, as a method of prohibiting the game in the point-type slot machine, when the number of points in the slot machine decreases, the slot machine side can determine that fact and enter the game prohibition state. Because the game is prohibited because the predetermined information is transmitted from the gaming device, it is possible to respond to a command from the gaming device, and depending on the cause of the necessity to enter the gaming prohibited state. Thus, both the case where the slot machine itself makes the game prohibited state and the case where the slot machine makes the game prohibited state according to a command from the gaming device can be dealt with.

(5-2) A game device for storing and updating the score can be connected to the connection portion separately from the score storage means (see FIGS. 4 and 5).
Specific means (game control microcomputer, payout control microcomputer, addition number counter, subtraction number counter) for specifying the amount of change in points according to the setting of bets and the occurrence of winnings,
It further includes information transmission means (LSI 117) for transmitting update information (operation response including addition number and subtraction number) that can specify the amount of change to the gaming device.

  According to such a configuration, since it becomes possible to perform the point management on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the slot machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the slot machine is suppressed as much as possible. be able to.

  In particular, slot machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For this reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the slot machine is introduced can be reduced by providing the point management function not on the slot machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the slot machine. is there.

  In addition, because the point management is performed on the gaming device side, when the method of controlling to the gaming prohibited state by waiting for a command from the gaming device side when the number of points is reduced, the points in the slot machine It is possible to know that the number of points has been reduced in the gaming device only after the decrease is transmitted to the gaming device, and there is a possibility that the timing for controlling the gaming prohibited state by the time lag during that time may be delayed. When the number of points in the slot machine decreases, the slot machine side determines that fact and puts the game in a prohibited state, so that the inconvenience due to the time lag described above can be prevented. In addition, since the game is prohibited even when the predetermined information is transmitted from the gaming device, it is possible to respond to a command from the gaming device.

  (5-3) The information transmission means can specify the amount of change specified by the specification means between the time when the update information is transmitted and the time when the game is prohibited by the point-corresponding game prohibition means. The update information is transmitted to the gaming device (FIG. 51; the first action response of “the number of points = 3, the number of additions = 0, the number of subtractions = 3” is transmitted, and then the number of bets is set by 3BETs. An operation response of “the number of holding points = 0, the number of additions = 0, the number of subtractions = 3”, which is the amount of change that has occurred until the operation is disabled, is further transmitted).

  According to such a configuration, the amount of change in holding points from the time when the update information is transmitted until the game prohibition state can be grasped on the gaming device side, and the final amount after the game prohibition state is reached. The points can be managed on the gaming device side.

(5-4) a front member (front door 2b) covering the front surface of the slot machine so as to be opened and closed;
Lock means for locking the front member in a closed state (front door opening solenoid 110, engagement protrusions 6a and 6b, engagement receiving pieces 7a and 7b),
The predetermined information is information (FIG. 24; game prohibition request with operation request Bit3 = 1, FIG. 54; prohibition request present) transmitted when instructing the lock means to release the lock.

  According to such a configuration, when the front member is unlocked and released, the game can be prohibited in response to a command from the gaming device.

  (5-5) The predetermined information is information transmitted when a game end request is made to the gaming device (FIG. 24; game prohibition request with operation request Bit3 = 1, FIG. 52; operation instruction including prohibition request present) ).

  According to such a configuration, when a signal requesting the end of the game is input, the game can be prohibited in response to a command from the gaming device.

(6-1) The present invention accepts a recording medium (card) and stores a player's valuable value (prepaid balance, number of points, or number of medals) specified by recorded information recorded on the recording medium. A communication unit (S-unit communication control unit 82) that communicates with a gaming device (card unit 3) that can be used for gaming, and a variable display device that can change the display state. When the game can be started by setting, and the display result of the variable display device is derived and displayed, one game is completed, and the derived display result becomes a predetermined specific display result. Is a slot machine (slot machine 2S) that can generate a prize,
Game history data totaling means for totalizing game history data for each player (FIG. 108; normal mode processing unit of game history data management unit 291 and current player game history data storage unit of display effect control unit 292);
Game history data storage means (FIG. 108; current player game history data storage section and backup data storage section of the game data storage section 392) for storing the game history data aggregated by the game history data aggregation means;
The game history data storage means retains the storage of the game history data even after the recording medium received by the gaming device is ejected (FIG. 108; storing the game history data in the backup data storage unit). Hold),
The game history data totaling means is based on the condition that command information (same command) indicating the same player has been received from the gaming device (FIG. 109; Y is determined in S22). Inheritance counting means (FIG. 109; S12) for accumulating and totaling new game history data with respect to the game history data stored in the history data storage means is included.

  According to such a configuration, when the previous player and the current player are the same, the game history data of the current player with respect to the game history data aggregated as the game history data of the previous player When the player who has played a game once leaves the seat and returns to play again, the game history data before leaving the seat is determined to be the same player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game history data from being interrupted before and after leaving the seat even though the player is the same player.

  (6-2) In the slot machine of (6-1), when the game is resumed after the recording medium is ejected, the command information is not transmitted from the gaming device (FIG. 109; difference A game history data erasure unit (FIG. 109;) for erasing the game history data of a player who has played a game before the recording medium is discharged on the condition that a command is transmitted and N is determined in S22). S15) may be included.

  According to such a configuration, when the previous player and the current player are the same, the game history data of the previous player is transmitted to the slot machine. The game history data of the current player can be accumulated and totaled with respect to the received game history data, so that the player who has played a game once leaves the seat and returns again to resume the game. Therefore, it is possible to accumulate the game history data by taking over the game history data before leaving after being determined to be the same player, and the game history data before and after leaving the seat despite being the same player. The inconvenience of being interrupted can be prevented.

(6-3) In the slot machine of (6-1) or (6-2), the game history data totaling means includes:
In-game data storage means (FIG. 108; current player game history data storage unit of display effect control unit 292) for storing game history data of the player who is playing,
End data storage means (FIG. 108; backup data storage unit of display effect control unit 292) for backing up the game history data of the player who has finished the game,
In response to ejection of the recording medium from the gaming device, the game history data stored in the in-game data storage means is backed up by the end data storage means as game history data of the player who has finished the game. (FIG. 108; by receiving the card return notification, the storage data of the current player game history data storage unit is shifted to the backup data storage unit and stored), and when the command information is received from the gaming device, Data storage switching means (FIG. 108, FIG. 109; S12) for switching to a state where the game history data backed up by the end data storage means is stored as the game history data of the player who is playing the game by the data storage means during game May be included.

  According to such a configuration, when it is determined that the players are the same, the game history data backed up by the end data storage means is used as the game history data of the player who is playing the game by the in-game data storage means. Since the game state is switched to the state to be stored, the game history data stored in the in-game data storage means can be taken over in subsequent games, and new game history data can be added and updated to be accumulated and stored.

  (6-4) In the slot machine of any one of (6-1) to (6-3), the takeover counting means accepts a member recording medium issued to a member player to the game device. On the condition that the game history data of the member stored in the game history data storage means is accumulated and new game history data is accumulated and aggregated (FIG. 108; in the case of C-ID of the member card) Only the current player's game history data is stored and the game history is totaled).

  According to such a configuration, new game history data is accumulated with respect to the game history data corresponding to the player determined to be identical on the condition that the recording medium for the member is received by the recording medium receiving unit. Therefore, the advantage of taking over the game history data can be limited to the member players, and the player can be promoted to become a member.

(7-1) In the present invention, a game with a score is possible, and a communication unit (S communication control unit 82) that communicates with a game device that adds a score using a game value owned by the player; A variable display device whose display state can be changed, and a game can be started by setting the number of bets for one game, and a display result of the variable display device is derived and displayed. This is a slot machine (slot machine 2S) in which a winning can be generated when the display result derived and displayed is a predetermined display result, and points are added in accordance with the winning. And
Specific means (microcomputer for slot machine control, addition number counter, subtraction number counter) for specifying the amount of change in points according to the use in the game and the occurrence of winnings,
A score storage means (score counter) for storing the score;
A score update means (payout control unit 117) for updating the score stored in the score storage means according to the amount of change;
Information transmission control means (FIG. 50; addition number, subtraction) for performing control to transmit the update information that can specify the amount of change and the score stored in the score storage means from the communication unit to the gaming device Send an action response containing a number)
A player identification information storage means (FIG. 108; current player game history data storage section of the display effect control section 292) for storing player identification information for identifying a player who performs a game;
Player identification information transmission control means for performing control to transmit the player identification information stored in the player identification information storage means from the communication unit to the gaming apparatus at the start of communication with the gaming apparatus. (FIG. 33, FIG. 43, FIG. 67 to FIG. 84; a recovery response including C-ID is transmitted).

  According to such a configuration, when the gaming device is connected to the slot machine and communication is started, a player who plays a game after the connection between the slot machine and the gaming device is played before the connection. Since the player specifying information stored in the player specifying information storage means is transmitted from the communication unit to the gaming device as information for determining the identity with the player who has been connected, the game is performed after connection. The identity of the player and the player who played the game before the connection can be determined, and the inconvenience of being regarded as the same player even though they are different players can be prevented.

(7-2) In the slot machine of (7-1), the information transmission control unit sends the update information and the points stored in the point storage unit from the communication unit to the gaming device. Control to send periodically (every 200ms),
The communication unit, the update result of the points based on the update information by the gaming device,
As a result of the determination of consistency with the score stored in the score storage means, the correction information transmitted from the gaming device at the time of determination of mismatch is received (reception of a correction instruction command) ,
A score correction means for correcting the score stored in the score storage means based on the received correction information (the payout control unit 117 corrects the score according to the correction instruction command); It may be configured.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored on the gaming machine side and the slot machine side are caused by an abnormality in the size of the points stored on the slot machine side due to fraud and other causes. Even when the stored score does not match, the score stored on the slot machine side can be corrected to the score stored on the gaming device side.

(8-1) The present invention relates to a communication unit (S-unit communication control unit 82) that communicates with a gaming device that enables a player's valuable value to be used in a game, and a variable display device that can change a display state. The game can be started by setting the number of bets for one game, the display result of the variable display device is derived and displayed, one game is completed, and the displayed display result is displayed in advance. A slot machine game (slot machine 2S) in which a winning can be generated when a predetermined display result is obtained,
Game history data storage means for storing game history data generated by execution of the game in the gaming machine (FIG. 7; the S game history data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292);
Game history data display means (display 51) for displaying the game history data stored in the game history data storage means;
Game history data erasure means (RAM clear switch 293) for erasing at least a part of the game history data stored in the game history data storage means;
When the game history data is erased by the game history data erasure means, a control is performed to transmit a clear command for clearing a history display to be executed based on the game history data in the gaming device to the gaming device. Clear command transmission control means (FIG. 7; game history data management unit 291 that transmits a clear notification).

  According to such a configuration, when at least a part of the game history data is erased on the slot machine side, a clear command is transmitted to the gaming device, and the history display clear process is performed on the gaming device side according to the clear command. As a result, it is possible to prevent the history display from being flawed on the slot machine side and the gaming apparatus side.

(8-2) In the slot machine of (8-1), the game history data storage means is
Today's history data storage unit for storing today's game history data (today's storage area within the storage area for 10 days),
Including a past history data storage unit that stores game history data before the previous day (a storage area other than today within a storage area for 10 days),
The game history data erasure means shifts and stores the stored data in the today's data storage unit to the past history data storage unit and deletes the stored data in the today's history data storage unit (1 in the storage area for 10 days). The old storage area data is erased and the data in each storage area is shifted one by one to the old storage area, thereby deleting the current storage area data).

  According to such a configuration, on the slot machine side, the game history data of today stored in the history data storage unit of today is shifted and stored in the past history data storage unit storing game history data of the previous day. At the same time, since the stored data in the today history data storage unit is erased, on the slot machine side, today's game history data can be stored and held as past game history data before the previous day, and the past game history data can be stored. It can also be used effectively.

  (8-3) In the slot machine of (8-1) or (8-2) above, game data transmission control means (transmission of game data) for controlling the transmission of game data generated during a game to the gaming device The game history data management unit 291) may be further included.

  According to such a configuration, the game history data can be updated and stored on the gaming device side based on the game data generated during the game transmitted from the slot machine, and the game displayed on the gaming device The history data can be updated and stored separately from the gaming machine.

(9-1) The present invention accepts a recording medium (card) and plays a player-owned valuable value prepaid balance, the number of points, or the number of medals specified by the recording information recorded on the recording medium) A communication unit (S-unit communication control unit 82) that communicates with a gaming device (card unit 3) that can be used, and a variable display device that can change the display state. When the game can be started and the display result of the variable display device is derived and displayed, one game is completed, and the derived display result becomes a predetermined specific display result. A slot machine (slot machine 2S) that can receive a prize,
Normal game data update means for updating game history data generated by a player playing a game during a normal game that has not received a test mode notification for confirming the operation of the slot machine (FIG. 8). ; S display game history data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292),
Based on the notification of the test mode received from the gaming device, the game history data is not updated by the normal game data update means (FIGS. 7 and 108; The game history data is not stored in the P game history data storage unit or the S game history data storage unit, but is stored in the trial hit game history data storage unit).

  According to such a configuration, normal game data updating means for updating game history data generated by a player playing a game during a normal game that has not received a test mode notification for confirming the operation of the slot machine. Therefore, the game history data during normal games can be tabulated in the slot machine.

  Moreover, since the slot machine receives the notification of the test mode, the game history data is not updated by the normal game data update means, so that the normal game is distinguished from the game history data in the test mode. Only the game history data inside can be tabulated.

  (9-2) In the slot machine according to (9-1), the test mode data transmission control means (FIGS. 7 and 108) performs control for transmitting the game history data in the test mode to the gaming device. A game history data management unit 291) for transmitting game data in the trial hit mode may be included.

  According to such a configuration, since game history data in the test mode is displayed by the gaming device, various adjustment operations can be performed while viewing the game history data in the test mode displayed on the gaming device. Work efficiency is improved.

  (9-3) In the slot machine according to (9-1) or (9-2), the test mode is separate from the game history data generated when a player plays a game during the normal game. Test mode data storage means (FIG. 7, FIG. 108; test hit game history data storage unit of display effect control unit 292) for storing the game history data therein may be included.

  According to such a configuration, since the slot machine includes the in-test mode data storage means for storing the game history data in the test mode separately from the game history data in the normal game, the game in the normal game It is possible to store the game history data in the test mode separately from the history data.

  (9-4) In the slot machine according to (9-3) above, the data storage means during the test mode performs a predetermined operation during the test mode (touching the icon of the recount button displayed on the display 312) The stored game history data is once cleared based on the operation being performed, and then the storage of the game history data in the test mode is resumed (test hit mode processing based on reception of the recount notification) May be configured to clear the memory of the trial hit game history data storage unit).

  According to such a configuration, based on a predetermined operation being performed during the test mode, the game history data stored in the data storage means during the test mode is once cleared and then a new game history during the test mode. In order to resume the data storage, for example, after performing various adjustment operations based on the game history data in the test mode, the game history data in the test mode is again added again in order to add up the adjusted operation data. As described above, it is possible to start counting the game history in the test mode from the beginning.

  (9-5) In the slot machine of the above (9-4), the slot machine is in a test mode for performing control to display game history data in the test mode stored in the data storage means in the test mode It may be configured to include data display control means (a trial hit mode processing unit that performs control to display game history data in the trial hit mode on the display 51).

  According to such a configuration, since the game history data in the test mode is displayed in the slot machine, it is possible to perform various adjustment operations by looking at the game history data in the test mode displayed in the slot machine It becomes.

(9-6) The slot machine of any one of (9-1) to (9-5) above includes a point update means (point number counter) for updating the points used in the game with the game. ,
The score update means may be configured to update so that the score does not become a predetermined value or less during the test mode (adding the score based on reception of the score addition command).

  According to such a configuration, during the test mode, since the score does not become a predetermined value or less, it is possible to continue to collect the game history in the test mode regardless of the score.

  (9-7) In the slot machine of (9-6), the score update means sets a score to the slot machine when the score reaches a predetermined value during the test mode. Based on having received from the gaming device a command for exceeding the value (score score addition command), the score is updated so that the score does not fall below a predetermined value (based on the reception of the score score addition command) May be added).

  According to such a configuration, based on the fact that a command for setting the score exceeding the predetermined value is received from the gaming device to the slot machine when the score reaches a predetermined value during the test mode. Because it is updated so that the score does not fall below the predetermined value, the game has a function of outputting a command for counting the game history data even after the score becomes the predetermined value in the test mode. An apparatus can be provided.

  The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  2S slot machine, 2L, 2C, 2R reel, 2 pachinko machine, 3 card unit, 2a body frame, 2b front door, 16,116 main control board, 17, 31 payout control unit, 51,54 display, 51a display area , 110 Front door opening solenoid, 112 Front door closing detector, 116 Main control board, 117 LSI, 120 Addition pseudo ball unit, 121 Subtraction ball unit, 124 Pseudo ball, 220 connector, 309 Card insertion slot, 312 display 319, replay button, 321 lending button, 322 return button, 323 main control unit, 324 external communication unit, 325 gaming machine communication unit, 327 card reader / writer, 330 connector.

Claims (11)

A gaming device capable of converting a gaming value owned by a player into a first holding point, and a gaming device capable of playing a game with a second holding point converted for use in a game from the first holding point. A gaming system comprising a gaming machine connected to be communicable with
Conversion means for converting the first score to the second score;
First score display means for displaying the first score;
Second score storage means for storing the second score;
Game control means for performing game control of the gaming machine based on the fact that the second holding points of a predetermined point or more are stored in the second holding point storage means;
Moving means for moving a plurality of predetermined objects;
Movement detecting means for detecting movement of the plurality of predetermined objects;
Movement control means for sequentially moving the plurality of predetermined objects by the moving means when the first holding point is converted to the second holding point;
Based on the movement of said plurality of predetermined object is detected by the movement detection unit, a first lifting point display updating means before Symbol first lifting point display means for deduction the first lifting point being displayed,
Abnormal when the time interval from the detection of the movement of one of the plurality of predetermined objects by the movement detection means to the detection of the movement of the next predetermined object is outside a predetermined reference range A gaming system comprising : an abnormal time control means for executing time control . A gaming device capable of converting a gaming value owned by a player into a first holding point, and a gaming device capable of playing a game with a second holding point converted for use in a game from the first holding point. A gaming system comprising a gaming machine connected to be communicable with
Conversion means for converting the second score to the first score;
First score display means for displaying the first score;
Second score storage means for storing the second score;
Game control means for performing game control of the gaming machine based on the fact that the second holding points of a predetermined point or more are stored in the second holding point storage means;
Moving means for moving a plurality of predetermined objects;
Movement detecting means for detecting movement of the plurality of predetermined objects;
Movement control means for sequentially moving the plurality of predetermined objects by the moving means when the second holding point is converted to the first holding point;
Based on the movement of said plurality of predetermined object is detected by the movement detection unit, a first lifting point display updating means before Symbol first lifting point display means for adding point the first lifting point being displayed,
Abnormal when the time interval from the detection of the movement of one of the plurality of predetermined objects by the movement detection means to the detection of the movement of the next predetermined object is outside a predetermined reference range A gaming system comprising : an abnormal time control means for executing time control . A first lifting point display updating means first lifting point display means for deduction the first lifting point being displayed according to the value for the player in the player owned convertible at a reduced point command to the first lifting point A gaming machine comprising a connecting portion for communicably connecting to a gaming device comprising, capable of playing a game with a second holding point converted from the first holding point,
Second score storage means for storing the second score;
Game control means for performing game control of the gaming machine based on the fact that the second holding points of a predetermined point or more are stored in the second holding point storage means;
Moving means for moving a plurality of predetermined objects;
Movement detecting means for detecting movement of the plurality of predetermined objects;
Movement control means for sequentially moving the plurality of predetermined objects by the moving means when the first holding point is converted to the second holding point;
When the movement of the plurality of predetermined object is detected by the movement detection means, and transmitting means for transmitting a pre-Symbol deduction command to the gaming device,
Abnormal when the time interval from the detection of the movement of one of the plurality of predetermined objects by the movement detection means to the detection of the movement of the next predetermined object is outside a predetermined reference range A gaming machine comprising an abnormal time control means for executing time control . A first lifting point display updating means first lifting point display means for adding point the first lifting point being displayed according to the value for the player in the player owned convertible at a by pressurizing point command to the first lifting point A gaming machine comprising a connecting portion for communicably connecting to a gaming device comprising, capable of playing a game with a second holding point converted from the first holding point,
Second score storage means for storing the second score;
Game control means for performing game control of the gaming machine based on the fact that the second holding points of a predetermined point or more are stored in the second holding point storage means;
Moving means for moving a plurality of predetermined objects;
Movement detecting means for detecting movement of the plurality of predetermined objects;
Movement control means for sequentially moving the plurality of predetermined objects by the moving means when the second holding point is converted into the first holding point;
When the movement of the plurality of predetermined object is detected by the movement detection means, and transmitting means for transmitting a pre-Symbol Additional command to the gaming device,
Abnormal when the time interval from the detection of the movement of one of the plurality of predetermined objects by the movement detection means to the detection of the movement of the next predetermined object is outside a predetermined reference range A gaming machine comprising an abnormal time control means for executing time control . A second score memory for storing the second score among the first score converted from the game value owned by the player and the second score used for the game converted from the first score. Means, game control means for performing game control based on the fact that the second holding points are stored in the second holding point storage means, moving means for moving a plurality of predetermined objects, the plurality the movement detecting means for detecting a movement of a predetermined object, the movement control means for the by the moving means sequentially moving said plurality of predetermined objects when the first lifting point is converted into the second lifting point, before Symbol movement detecting means A time transmission interval from the detection of the movement of one of the plurality of predetermined objects to the detection of the movement of the next predetermined object. When outside the specified reference range Comprising a connection for communicably connected to a game machine having a abnormality control means for executing abnormality control, a gaming device capable of converting the value gaming on the first lifting point,
First score display means for displaying the first score;
Detection result by have based Dzu of said movement detecting means which is transmitted from the gaming machine, before SL and a first lifting point display updating means first lifting point display means for deduction the first lifting point being displayed, Game equipment. A second score memory for storing the second score among the first score converted from the game value owned by the player and the second score used for the game converted from the first score. Means, game control means for performing game control based on the fact that the second holding points are stored in the second holding point storage means, moving means for moving a plurality of predetermined objects, the plurality the movement detecting means for detecting a movement of a predetermined object and the second movement control means for the by the moving means sequentially moving said plurality of predetermined objects when converting lifting point on the first lifting point, before Symbol movement detecting means A time transmission interval from the detection of the movement of one of the plurality of predetermined objects to the detection of the movement of the next predetermined object. When outside the specified reference range Comprising a connection for communicably connected to a game machine having a abnormality control means for executing abnormality control, a gaming device capable of converting the value gaming on the first lifting point,
First score display means for displaying the first score;
Detection result by have based Dzu of said movement detecting means which is transmitted from the gaming machine, before SL and a first lifting point display updating means first lifting point display means for adding point the first lifting point being displayed, Game equipment. Of the first points converted from the game value owned by the player and the second points used for the game converted from the first points, the game with the second points is possible. with a connection for which the first lifting point display means communicatively connected to a game machine having a first lifting point display updating means for deduction the first lifting point you are displayed according to reduced point command to together, A gaming device capable of converting the gaming value into the first point,
Moving means for moving a plurality of predetermined objects;
Movement detecting means for detecting movement of the plurality of predetermined objects;
Movement control means for sequentially moving the plurality of predetermined objects by the moving means when the first holding point is converted to the second holding point;
When the movement of the plurality of predetermined object is detected by the movement detection means, and transmitting means for transmitting a pre-Symbol deduction command to the gaming machine,
Abnormal when the time interval from the detection of the movement of one of the plurality of predetermined objects by the movement detection means to the detection of the movement of the next predetermined object is outside a predetermined reference range A gaming device comprising : an abnormal time control means for executing time control . Of the first points converted from the game value owned by the player and the second points used for the game converted from the first points, the game with the second points is possible. with a connection for which the first lifting point display means communicatively connected to a game machine having a first lifting point display updating means for adding point the first lifting point you are displayed according to the pressure point command to together, A gaming device capable of converting the gaming value into the first point,
Moving means for moving a plurality of predetermined objects;
Movement detecting means for detecting movement of the plurality of predetermined objects;
Movement control means for sequentially moving the plurality of predetermined objects by the moving means when the second holding point is converted to the first holding point;
When the movement of the plurality of predetermined object is detected by the movement detection means, and transmitting means for transmitting a pre-Symbol Additional command to the gaming machine,
Abnormal when the time interval from the detection of the movement of one of the plurality of predetermined objects by the movement detection means to the detection of the movement of the next predetermined object is outside a predetermined reference range A gaming device comprising : an abnormal time control means for executing time control . When the first condition for updating the first holding point is satisfied and the second condition for updating the second holding point is satisfied, the movement control unit is operated by the moving unit based on the establishment of the first condition. 3. The gaming system according to claim 1, wherein the movement of the predetermined object by the moving unit based on the establishment of the second condition is started after a predetermined pause period has elapsed after the movement of the predetermined object. . When the first condition for updating the first holding point is satisfied and the second condition for updating the second holding point is satisfied, the movement control unit is operated by the moving unit based on the establishment of the first condition. The gaming machine according to claim 3 or 4, wherein the movement of the predetermined object by the moving means based on the establishment of the second condition is started after a predetermined pause period has elapsed after the movement of the predetermined object. When the first condition for updating the first holding point is satisfied and the second condition for updating the second holding point is satisfied, the movement control unit is operated by the moving unit based on the establishment of the first condition. The game according to any one of claims 5 to 8, wherein the movement of the predetermined object by the moving means based on the establishment of the second condition is started after a predetermined pause period has elapsed after the movement of the predetermined object. apparatus.

Images